Photo: Event Horizon Telescope

About the true causes of gravity, the movements of stars and planets

HEAVY ERRORS

and their concequences

Black holes have long created big business in media and science, making bestsellers and Nobel Prize winners. But do these black holes really exist? 

 

Some serious people do have doubts. This site is a critical revision of mainstream physics, especially the common concept of gravity. The author Christian Främbs reflects the key parts of our common geophysical world models, daring to refute them and offering alternative and plausible calculation methods.

 

Today's prevailing opinion is that the universe must contain some dark matter or that the vacuum is filled with infinite energies. At the same time people speculate about parallel worlds and the possibility of moving in multiple dimensions. Esotericism and science both work with vague definitions and do not go beyond abstract descriptions of diffuse possibilities. The approach of this book is different because the apple does not just fall from the tree! Based on the ancient concept of the ether, it precisely reflects on our world's physical background and causes.

 

The Key Statements of this publication: 

  • All perceptions are illusionary projections of reality. 
  • Only two facts are undoubted: There must be SOMETHING and MOTION. 
  • The ether-theorem is based on just these two hypotheses: a single real substance which is vibrating in itself. 
  • Many different movement patterns represent the phenomena, from the photon, electron and atom to the stars and galaxies. 
  • There are no fixed particles. In analogy to sound, only the structures of MOTION are wandering forward within the ether. 
  • Gravity only exists in the immediate vicinity of a celestial body, but its cause is not based on mass. There are also no forces attracting the mass; the Earth, for example, drifts passively in an ether-whirlpool around the Sun. 
  • The geostationary satellites, for example, provide clear proof, as they are contrary to the usual laws constantly dancing around. 
  • Everything is made of ONE. This ancient wisdom/spiritual concept becomes a physical/scientific reality: The homogeneous ether fills the universe without gaps, and all phenomena are only movements within this medium. 
  • The movement patterns of many particles, forces and phenomena are explained logically. 
  • New approaches for a more understandable and plausible world model are presented.

About this Site

The sheer number of publications on black holes is overwhelming and not easy to handle – neither is their content. The search engine Google offers more than 1,930,000 results in German. All authors, primarily physicians and mathematicians, use the law of gravity and other established formulae to pretend and defend their intellectual properties, using a wall of academic language that keeps the theories hermetic – giving them a well-founded scientific veneer. 

 

It might seem presumptuous and disrespectful for a layman, a non-academic and amateur like me, to question the foundations of our dominant physical world model. But I am convinced that the freedom of thought is enough legitimacy to enter the shielded ivory tower of astrophysics.

 

My work is not intended to develop a new scientific claim but became a fundamental pamphlet based on years of research and common sense.

 

When I was a boy at school I struggled with most formulae and could not understand their meaning and content. In those years, it was a kind of self-rejection of mathematics. I still wonder whether the teacher himself only pretended to understand it and just forwarded the teaching content. In any case, for me genuinely understanding physics and mathematics had been impossible back in those days. In later years, I found my own self-taught way into mathematics and physics, questioning any truth and dogma, including the common astrophysical world model. 

 

When I was a child, I often had painful experiences of mastering my own weight while learning to walk or ride my bicycle. Something strong forced me down to Earth. I grew up with gravity as a reality without thinking about its physics. Later, while searching for an answer, I came across the German version of the book HiddenNature by Alick Bartholomew and his reference to Alfred Evert, who in his series of books Ether-Physics and -Philosophy very clearly describes his unconventional ideas about ether.

 

Today, it is part of the dominant world model that the universe must contain some sort of dark matter or that the vacuum is filled with infinite energies. Highly admired academics and despised lunatics compete with one another by speculating about parallel worlds and the possibility of multiple dimensions. Esotericism and science also work with equally vague definitions and assumptions. For this reason, I have collected relevant examples of current doctrines and actual articles. They have been translated from German Wikipedia and are highlighted in italics. References are marked with XX]. I have also reproduced all necessary formulas.

 

My brother, an experienced navigator and mariner, initially motivated me to collect my thoughts and write an essay covering my analyses, questions and alternative conclusions. Rewriting the proverb that an apple doesn't just fall far from the tree describes the spirit of my work – which contradicts mainstream physics. The simple and central element of my approach is that ether is the only existing/real substance – the ONE of which EVERYTHING consists.

 

The mythological concept of ether corresponds to the ancient truth of many world models, that spread without scientific proof. By implementing a few hypotheses and logically derived consequences, this book offers understandable answers and physical evidence for the existence and nature of the ether, offering an alternative world model.

 

The book is using understandable and colloquial language to reach a wider audience. I want them to understand how the diversity of all phenomena results from the ONE. One of the key elements of our physical worldview and astronomy is as follows: 

 

Gravitational force FG  =  Centripetal force FC

This is represented in my example of a human athlete: a hammer thrower. Contrary to the centrifugal force of the spinning ball, the athlete in the centre of the circle uses his force to keep his sports equipment in orbit. The Sun is supposed to force all the planets into their orbits due to its supposedly huge mass and the resulting gravitational pull.

 

This assumption has far-reaching consequences: a strong nuclear force is supposed to force electrons into their orbits. Because electrons are negative, it had to be assumed that a corresponding number of positive particles would attract them. This results in the dilemma that a strong nuclear force would have to hold these protons together. For decades, we have been searching in vain for the Higgs particles – and if we find them, it will still be unclear why and how this glue should work. Because electrons are low in mass, but atoms are high in mass, protons must be heavy. This calculation didn't work out, so neutrons had to be invented, and the same number or even additional ones had to be added.1]

 

The previous paragraph and many texts, including their illustrations, are copied from the book series Ether-Physics and -Philosophy by Prof Alfred Evert  († 2020) but in this book they are following my own outline, chapters and notes. Like the iron ball of the hammer, many stars in the universe orbit a centre in which nothing exists. This contradicts our common laws of physics. That is why scientists added a corresponding mass: a black hole.

 

If you are a follower or disciple of classical physics, you will probably reject my conclusions as dubious. However, if you are well disposed to the thoughts of an outsider, amateur and sceptic you may appreciate my approaches for another truth on what – at its core – holds the world together.

01 Historical Outline 60]

Babylonians (1500 - 500 BC)

Long-term observations of Venus; knowledge of the phases of this planet; apparent orbital movements of the planets – their epicycles – prediction of solar eclipses. 

 

Aristotle (384 - 322 BC) 

Inferred the spherical shape of the Earth from the circular shape of the Earth's shadow during lunar eclipses. Theory of the four elements: Earth, air, fire and water. Each of these had its own gravity (according to its gravity). Therefore, under earthly conditions, everything moves in a linear and straight line – in accordance with the four elements. However, all celestial movements are curved, according to observations. From this, Aristotle concludes the existence of a fourth element, the ether, which is responsible for a non-rectilinear, i.e. non-earthly movement. 

 

Aristarchus (310 - 230 BC) 

First, albeit unaccepted, beginnings of a heliocentric world view of the movement of the Sun, the Earth and the planets. Geometrically determined the size of celestial bodies – Earth, Moon (with a 50 % error rate) – as well as the distance Earth-Moon (also approx. factor 2). 

 

Eratosthenes (284 - 192 B.C.) 

Measuring the circumference of the Earth 

-> Method: take 2 places with the same longitude but different latitudes 

-> observe differences in the angular height (parallax) of a celestial body (in this specific case: the Sun) 

-> the parallax and the known distance between the two locations,  their base, provides indications of the curvature of the Earth.

 

Hipparchus (180 - 125 BC) 

Geometric studies. Determination of the distance between the Earth and Moon with relatively high accuracy (34 instead of 30 Earth radii) via the lunar parallax. He found the obliquity of the ecliptic and its precession (more precisely: that of the Earth's axis); compiled the first major star catalogue. Ptolemy (87 - 165 BC) Founder of the geocentric world view (work: Almagest; Earth at the centre of the movement of the celestial bodies), which remained valid until Kepler's time. The movement of the fixed stars and the Sun can thus be described excellently – the planets cause problems. Artifice: introduction of epicycles; these are smaller circles whose centres in turn move on eccentric circles around the Earth. This allowed the movement of the planets known at the time to be predicted quite accurately. 

 

Nicolaus Copernicus (1473 - 1543) 

Pioneer of the heliocentric view of the world (work: De revolutionibus orbium coelestium libri VI; Sun at the centre of planetary movement). Simple circular orbits of the planets around the Sun elegantly solved the problem of the seemingly complicated epicyclic motion, which simply results from the projection of the motions onto the celestial sphere. 

 

Tycho Brahe (1546 - 1601) 

First accurate observations (accuracy is in minutes of arc) to test whether the Ptolemaic or Copernican world view is correct. Developed the so-called geoheliocentric world view, in which the Sun orbits the Earth, but all other planets orbit the Sun. Founder of the first astronomical observatory. Among other things, he observed a supernova (1572) and a comet, whose parallax he determined and discovered that this celestial body is much further away than the Moon and that comets are not atmospheric phenomena. 

 

Johannes Kepler (1571 - 1630) 

A student of Tycho Brahe, he formulated the three famous Kepler's laws as a result of numerous observations based on Brahe's work, which were highly precise for the time. Among other discoverings, he observed a nova (1604) and studied optics. 

 

Galileo Galilei (1564 - 1642)

 invented the first optical telescope, discovering both the four large moons of Jupiter named after him and the elongated shape of Saturn. The latter later turned out to be the planet's ring. Recognised that the period of oscillation of a pendulum of a given length does not depend on the amplitude of oscillation and that the trajectories of thrown bodies under the Earth's gravity are parabolas 

-> important clues for Newton's theory. 

 

Sir Isaac Newton (1642 -1727) 

Founder of the golden age of modern celestial mechanics with the development of the laws of motion named after him and the law of gravitation. The fundamental importance of his work remains unbroken to this day – with a few exceptions, modern methods of celestial mechanics are also based on his theories. His main work is set out in the Principa
Mathematica (1687). It was not until Einstein's general theory of relativity that more precise results were obtained, although these are only relevant near compact objects (neutron stars, white dwarfs, black holes). 

 

Edmund Halley (1656 - 1742) 

Contemporary and friend of Newton. For the first time systematically calculated orbital elements of comets on the basis of Newton's theory. Among other things, he predicted the orbital period of the comet named after him. 

 

Johannes D. Titius (1729 - 1796); Johann E. Bode (1747 - 1826) 

Found empirical law of the distances of the planets from the Sun; rn ≈ 0.4 + 0.3 - 2n, n = - ∞, 0, 1, ...; the Titius-Bode series. They postulated the existence of bodies at the position n = 3 where, as we know today, the asteroid belt is located. 

 

Friedrich Wilhelm Herschel (1738 - 1822) 

Discovered the planet Uranus (1781), which fits into the Titius-Bode scheme under the index n = 6. 

 

GuiseppePiazzi (1746 - 1826); Franz X. v. Zach (1754 - 1832) 

Search for a planet at n = 3 of the Titius-Bode-series 

-> Piazzi provisionally found the asteroid Ceres (1800), which later (New Year's Eve 1801) according to theoretical orbital determinations by  Carl Friedrich Gauss (see below) was rediscovered by Zach.

 

Carl Friedrich Gauss (1777 - 1855) 

mathematician; used the method of least squares to calculate possible orbital ellipses of Ceres that were compatible with the observations of G. Piazzi. Main purpose of this exercise: to rediscover the asteroid Ceres, which had eluded observation for more than a year (see also above: Zach). 

 

1802 - 1804 

The discovery of further planetoids: Pallas, Juno, Vesta; whose radial distances from the Sun all fit n = 3 of the Titius-Bode series. This led to the conclusion that they could have been fragments of a large planet between Mars and Jupiter. However, this hypothesis is highly controversial; it is also possible that the gravitational effect of the giant planet Jupiter prevented the accretion of another planet at this point. 

 

Discovery of Neptune 

Starting point: The calculated orbital parameters of Uranus calculated by Delambre (1749 - 1822) in 1790, which were modelled on the orbital parameter determination according to Gauss, deviated more and more from the observed locations of Uranus over time. In addition to other causes, the description of the constantly increasing deviations due to the gravitation of a transuranic planet became increasingly popular 
<-> inverse perturbation theory for determining the orbit and mass of the unknown planet.

 

Jean J. Leverrier (1811 - 1877); John C. Adams (1819 - 1892) 

They devoted themselves to the above-mentioned task of inverse perturbation theory with the success that both independently presented quite similar orbital parameters of a hypothetical transuranic planet, which were unfortunately ignored by the scientific community for a long time. 

 

Johann J. Galle (1812 - 1910) 

Started the systematic search for the unknown planet on 18 September 1846 after Leverrier informed him of his theoretical results in a letter. Galle then discovered Neptune on 23 September 1846 in the region of the firmament indicated by Leverrier and Adams. 

 

Henri Poincaré (1854 - 1912)

Used the three-body problem to show that the idea, based on the successes of classical celestial mechanics, that all movements in the cosmos could be determined with arbitrary precision if only the initial conditions were known precisely enough, was untenable. The unpredictability is due to the non-linearity and complexity of celestial mechanical many-body problems. 

 

Albert Einstein (1879 - 1955) 

developed the special and general theory of relativity. The latter in particular is significant for celestial mechanics (compact objects: Black holes, neutron stars, white dwarfs 
->  Schwarzschild & Kerr metrics, Friedmann universe) 

-> There is no homogeneous, stable universe (perihelion rotation of Mercury's orbit, etc.). His other major scientific achievements: Photoelectric effect; theory of Brownian motion.

02 Double and Multiple Star Systems

As early as 150 AD, Ptolemy recorded the double star ν1 and ν2 Sagittarii in his star catalogue: the star at the eye of Sagittarius, which is nebulous and double, but which is not a physical double star as we understand it today. In myths of the time, the star pair Mizar/Alkor in the Big Dipper was already known.

 

It was the invention of the telescope that made the discovery of many double stars possible. The first such observation was made by Johann Baptist Cysat in 1619. In 1651 Giovanni Riccioli published the theory that the above-mentioned Mizar itself consists of two components (today called Mizar A and B).

 

According to the latest findings, as many as 60 to 70 per cent of all stars in our Milky Way are part of double or multiple star systems, which is thought to be related to the physical conditions during star formation. 

 

In their search for habitable exoplanets, astronomers using modern space telescopes, such as the Hubble or Kepler telescopes, are discovering new star systems with two or three Suns at their centres that are orbited by planets. NASA's Kepler space telescope, for example, covers an area of 155,000 stars in the constellations of Lyra and Swan. It monitors the brightness of the stars. When the light of an observed object dims, a third object is suspected of passing in front of the stars. If this is repeated at regular intervals, the presence of a planet orbiting this pair of stars is assumed. The size of its shadow cast and the duration of the transit can be used to calculate the distance to the centre and deduce the size and mass of the planet. The masses of the stars in the centre can also be calculated using this data, thanks to common celestial mechanics theory. 

 

Double Star System Kepler 16 

Figure 02.01 shows the double star system Kepler 16, which has been detected at a distance of 200 light years. This was reported by researchers in the journal Science on 16 September 2011. The computer simulation created from the recorded data shows a planet passing in front of the two stars. The approximately Saturn-sized planet Kepler 16b, whose density is about 1/3 higher than that of Saturn, orbits the two stars in 229 days at a distance of about 105 million kilometres. This corresponds roughly to the orbit of Venus around our Sun. The two central stars orbit each other every 41 days. Experts call such objects circumbinary planets. 

 

The theory that the two stars are significantly smaller and fainter than the Sun published on www.scinexx.de contradicts the information on the radius of the planet and its orbital period to the extent that the two stars together have a mass of 1.7854E+30 kg, which is approximately the same as our Sun's mass of 1.9884E+30 kg. In addition, the fact that Kepler 16b with the radius of its orbit is smaller than the assumed limit for planet formation in binary systems is very unusual. 

 

According to the classical understanding of gravity, it was previously assumed that a planet in a binary system could maintain a constant orbit if it was at least seven times as far away from the stars as the stars are from each other. Assuming a distance of only 30 million kilometres between the stars (distance Sun-Mercury approx. 58 million kilometres), this would be a required minimum distance of approx. 210 million kilometres.

Double Star System Kepler 47 

Figure 02.02 above shows the double star system Kepler 47 (A, B), the discovery of which was reported on 29 August 2012 by the Department of Astronomy, San Diego State University. Kepler 47 is located in the constellation Swan, which is about 3,400 light years away from Earth. In this computer graphic, the star pair is orbited by two planets, the outer one (D) of which moves within the habitable zone. Due to the constantly changing gravitational interactions in this star system, astronomers assume very turbulent, chaotic and unstable conditions in this system. Using the transit method, the researchers were also able to determine their sizes and orbital periods. The outer planet, which is around four and a half times the size of Earth, is probably located in the so-called habitable zone, where liquid water and therefore possibly life can exist.

 

In the centre, two stars (A, B) orbit each other once every 7.5 days at a distance of only 15 million km (see figure 02.02 below, not to scale). The planet Kepler 47b (C) orbits the pair of stars at a radius of about 50 million kilometres, which takes it about 50 days. Its weight is about eight times that of the Earth, it is about three times as large and could be a rocky planet. 

 

The second planet Kepler 47c (D) has a significantly larger orbit with a radius of approx. 150 million kilometres, about twenty times the mass of the Earth and requires 303 days for one orbit. It is similar to the gas planet Uranus in our solar system. Even if it lies at a similar life-friendly distance from its two stars as the Earth does from the Sun, life on this planet is probably not possible. 

 

These parameters can be used to determine the mass in the centre according to the law of gravity. 

 

Variant 1: With a radius of 50 million kilometres and an orbital period of 50 days (planet Kepler 47b), this is a mass of 3.9620E+30 kg. 

 

Variant 2: With a radius of 150 million kilometres and an orbital period of 303 days (planet Kepler 47c), this results in a mass of 2.9129E+30 kg. 

These two different results actually call into question Newton's law of gravity, which is valid throughout the universe. This is because both results should be roughly the same if you compare the mathematical calculation model with the method used to determine the mass of our Sun. This is due to the fact that the mass of our Sun can be calculated both with the distance to Neptune (4,495 million kilometres) and with the much smaller distance to Earth (150 million kilometres) as well as with the distances of the six remaining planets, which in all cases provides an approximately identical result of 1.9884E+30 kg. 

 

I was asking myself why, at this small distance of only 15 million kilometres from each other, the two stars do not immediately merge into one star, if you compare this constellation with our Sun and its enormous gravitational pull (distance Sun - Mercury 58 million kilometres), which is supposed to force all planets into their orbits. 

Double Star System Kepler 1647 

Figure 02.03 shows a simulation of the double star system Kepler 1647. The closely orbiting pair of stars was discovered on 14 June 2016 by NASA's Goddard Space Flight Center, is around 3,700 light years away from Earth and is located in the constellation Swan. 

 

Unfortunately, no information is available on the distances of the orbiting pair of stars. It is orbited by the Jupiter-sized gas giant Kepler 1647b, whose mass is about 1.5 times that of Jupiter, at a distance of 2.72 AU = 408 million kilometres, which takes it 1,107 days to orbit. Its orbit is in the habitable zone. Life on it may be probably not possible, but possibly on an orbiting satellite that has not yet been discovered. Due to its orbit and the time required, the combined mass of the star pair is approx. 4.3916E+30 kg, i.e. more than twice that of our Sun. As astronomers believe that such large planets cannot survive for long in such unstable binary star systems, they are very surprised by the age of Kepler 1647b, which is 4.4 billion years old – about the age of our Earth. 

03 Space-Time-Quantum-Zero-Point-Energy 62]

Nebulous Space-Time Curvature 

In his younger years, Einstein used to put his disciples (purely mentally) into rockets or trains or dark lifts and surprisingly many believed (and believe) him that there can only be subjective, relative views of the world, regardless of the fact that, for example, the stationmaster has objective knowledge regarding currently stationary and moving trains. Not all of them travel through space at almost the speed of light, but Einstein nevertheless explained (still plausibly for many) that space is connected to time – and that this spacetime is curved by mass. He could not explain all the cases of attractive force effects mentioned above, but only attributed the effect of gravity to curved space (without explaining why and how mass should produce this curvature). 

 

Everyone knows this dented blanket (Fig. 03.01 top row centre), along whose slope the planets fall around a Sun, always straight ahead, whereby straight in this case means a curve. I doubt whether anyone could gain a concrete idea of space-time or understand Einstein's theories of relativity – because it is not possible to understand what is wrong, but at best to point out the errors (which is sufficiently available in extensive literature). Here, for example, is an arbitrary compilation of images on gravitation through space-time curvature from the Internet (like these from websites of renowned scientists). It is up to everyone to agree with these visualisations, but I would just like to ask the following questions: 

 

  • As with the blanket above, the grid of space-time is dented downwards in all the images – but why or what should pull this blanket or grid under the respective mass in each case? 
  • If a planet or moon were to slow down a little, would they fall into an orbit south of the south pole? 
  • The funnel at the bottom left is intended to show the powerful curvature into a black hole. Do masses only have a gravitational effect in one direction or should there not be many such funnels around the black hole? 
  • Does it make sense to visualize this model in this form? And can this idea of space-time curvature exist in reality? 

 

Mind you, the experts spend decades to visualise this crucial fact in apt images. Despite overwhelming evidence to the contrary from high-ranking scientists, practically all main-stream physicists still invoke the validity of the theory of relativity. I also refer to Einstein, but to his late statements on the real existence of an ether.

 

Four-Dimensional 

In this context, the report on the 25th International Congress of Mathematicians in Madrid is interesting. The mathematician Grigori Perleman from St Petersburg, sometimes described as the most intelligent person in the world, does not accept the Fields Medal – one of the highest honours – although he has – possibly – solved one of the most difficult problems in mathematics: the nature of the surface of four-dimensional bodies (and thus significance for this space-time world view). He would possibly be entitled to the one million dollar reward by the American Clay Foundation for the clarification of the Poincare conjecture, on which experts have been racking their brains for 100 years. 

 

I was previously believing that maths, as the clearest of all sciences, had no problem calculating in any number of fictitious dimensions. But obviously the problem must not concern real relationships such as the surface of a fictitious body. On the other hand, it is reassuring that maths refuses to find a solution when overly unrealistic fictions are put forward as axioms. In this respect, it should be clear that Einstein's famous mathematics cannot reflect reality either (as has been pointed out many times).

But again, I agree with Einstein: Curvature plays a crucial role in reality, there is no such thing as an exactly straight line. Figure 03.02 shows a curved space at A (see curved X-, Y- and Z-coordinates) and in it something is supposed to move from E to F on a curved path. Relativity mathematicians will have fun calculating this inclined path relative to the respective curvature of space, specifying all locations and accelerations. 

 

However, I am struggling with direction of where the vector of inertia is pointing. Straight ahead, of course, but this does not mean exactly forwards, but a direction in all current curvatures in all three dimensions (if you ignore time as the fourth dimension of this movement in space-time, i.e. if you only consider a three-dimensionally curved space). 

 

For example, when a comet comes close to the Sun, it intersects the spectrum of curved space lines inwards. At its reversal point it moves on a circular section around the Sun, i.e. its inertia now also points into the circular line – and how should it ever be able to leave it again? If you judge by the pictures above, in the end they all gather south of the south pole.

 

The Term Space

Colloquially, space is used in the sense of, for example, living space, intermediate space, hollow space and the like. In a scientific sense, space is a purely geometric concept. To describe shapes, locations, distances, movements, etc., a rectangular coordinate system is useful, the zero point of which can be chosen arbitrarily. Einstein is right: pretty much everything is curved – everything can be curved, especially the paths of movements. Only these fictitious coordinates of an abstract space (at B) must not be curved, but must theoretically be thought of as completely rectilinear, otherwise not even a curvature can be described. 

 

Only in this purely geometric sense the clear term space is used, within its arbitrarily chosen section each location can be clearly defined with simple X, Y and Z specifications (for the figurative meaning of space the common term universe is used). Terms such as left/right, front/back, top/bottom, which always refer to this fictitious coordinate reference system, are usually sufficient to describe it. 

 

The picture at B again shows the movement of something from E to F. This is an illustration of a real movement. The something must be real, otherwise it could not move in reality. Space, on the other hand, is not real, but exclusively a fictitious concept, only necessary for the exact observation or discussion or communication of real processes. Non-real space can never have energy. Only the ether is real in space and the energy is only ever the movement of the ether. 

 

The term ether, which is perceived as old-fashioned today, is used here intentionally. This is because the more up-to-date term space-energy is merely an abstract combination of two fictitious terms, i.e. empty words whose use only causes confusion and can never provide an explanation. Nor should we equate space with ether, because space is an abstract concept, whereas ether is a real substance. 

 

Concept of Time 

In the picture above at C again coordinates X, Y and Z are drawn resp. areas of green, blue and red characterise this space. Something (G) moves unevenly in it on an uneven path. Twelve positions (easily defined by coordinates) of this red point are marked during the course of the movement. Next to it at D a clock is shown, whose hands are moving in known manner (and twelve positions during movement are marked at border of clock-face). Here in this picture, the red dot assumes the above positions one after the other (and the distance it has travelled is marked). The illustration also shows various positions that this clock hand assumes one after the other. 

 

Only the movements are real, whereby those of the red dot and those of the hand are completely independent of each other. Of course, the dot and the pointer can only be at one specific position in space at a time and then move to the next position. In this rough visualisation, it naturally takes a moment for both to reach their next position, but there is no such thing as time anywhere in reality. 

 

In us and around us there is no real space (the green-red-blue walls above), but only the continuous movement of everything (including what appears to be at rest) is real. There is no such thing as time as a real phenomenon; rather, every measurement of time goes back to some suitable movement.

Only when a person wants to determine the speed or its change of a moving something do we bring the abstract concept of time into play. 

 

However, these measurements are only ever a comparison of two independent movements. To determine the distance, a fictitious reference frame of space is used and to determine time, an event that repeats itself as uniformly as possible is chosen (which is ultimately also a distance of the same length as a movement). Theoretically, the scale for distance and time can be chosen completely arbitrarily – and this clearly shows that the dimensions of space and time are completely abstract, while only movement can ever be real – and movement always logically implies a real something. 

 

In this sense, the argument about time has been settled, yet new mysteries are constantly being invented. In fact, time is not constant, insofar as the same clock is ticking differently in a different environment. Clocks are made of atoms, atoms are ether-vortices whose speed depends on the behaviour of the surrounding ether. Even on a mountain, the clock ticks faster than in a valley. The clocks of the GPS satellites have to be calculated backwards (but by a factor of 20 compared to what would result from the theory of relativity). 

 

It is therefore in my opinion a fiction or completely absurd to try to explain the real events in the universe on the basis of the purely abstract concepts of space and time or their combination as space-time or even on the basis of a curved four-dimensional abstraction.

Quantum Theories 

If the theories of relativity do not work, then the second pillar of modern physics, quantum mechanics (or its subsequent theory variants), serves to explain this world. Jim AI-Khalili, for example, has illustrated the developments and statements of this science in his book Quantum, for example by means of these magnificent pictures (see Fig. 03.03). The subtitle promises Modern physics to marvel at. 

 

It is astonishing to read the following: On the one hand, quantum mechanics forms the basis for our understanding of the world, but on the other, no one really seems to have understood what it actually means. The paradoxes of quantum mechanics are discussed using the famous double-slit experiment as an example, because no other experiment illustrates its riddles more impressively and beautifully. 

 

Of course, Planck's findings regarding quanta and Einstein's Nobel Prize for the introduction of the photon and explanation of the photo-effect are explained. As a result, it is stated that today the wave-particle duality is established beyond doubt, followed by the observation that physicists find the concept of photons rather confusing. 

 

Schrödinger devised his famous wave function, the interpretation of which was disputed for decades and is still disputed today. Heisenberg generated the uncertainty principle, which, for example, only allows probabilities for the location and speed of a particle, which are also superimposed to form superpositions, the collapse of which only occurs upon observation. Schrödinger's famous cat was and still is the subject of debate as to whether and that it is really only dead when someone looks into the box – incredibly nonsensical mind games by such clever people. Today, due to decoherence, it is accepted that an event can also exist through interactions of a different kind, just as if the hammer only becomes a hammer when it strikes the anvil. 

 

Using the wave function and superposition, the author starts a second attempt to explain the double-slit experiment, only to conclude: We have the right to a rational explanation, but so far none has been found. The validity of quantum theories is repeatedly invoked because mathematics is logically consistent, but the problem is that nobody can explain the facts correctly in non-mathematical language. 

 

Bohr himself was puting it this way: There is no quantum world. There is only a quantum physical description. It is a mistake to believe that the object of physics is to discover what nature is like. Physics is about what we can say about nature. Somehow this hurts a layman: physics is what physicists talk about nature – and not the endeavour to explain how and why nature is like this. So what Jim AI-Khalili says will be true: Some of the most important scientists of our time have even openly admitted that nobody really understands quantum mechanics. And they have probably not only studied popular science literature (like the one quoted here). 

 

Regardless of this, particle accelerators continue to be built in order to recognise the most sub-elementary particles and thus the ultimate basis of all matter by bombarding particles with waves/particles. Hundreds or soon thousands of quarks have been discovered, but all of these cannot be the building blocks of matter, but are scrap left over after destruction. 

Zero-Point 

A special edition of German popular sience magazine Spektrum der Wissenschaft entitled From the quantum to the cosmos has published various articles by renowned scientists on this problem. In these, the history of the development of quantum theories up to their most recent results is addressed. I would like to point out just one of these discovering, the Bose-Einstein condensate shown on the title page. The corresponding article was written by Graham P. Collins, editor at Scientific American. 

 

According to current doctrine, the structure of matter eludes precise observation due to the uncertainty principle. In the above particle accelerators, matter is bombarded by fast-flying particles, which of course means that no picture of the resting state of matter can be obtained. Conversely, atoms would have to be immobilised as much as possible in order to obtain a sharp image of their structure. 

This is exactly what is achieved in so-called atom traps by restricting their movement as much as possible using laser beams and magnetic fields, practically cooling them down to a minimum temperature. The atoms turn into a gaseous condensate – and its quantum vortices can actually be photographed, as the picture shows this aggregate state of a plasma. 

 

The article gives the following hint: In August 2000, Wayne Hu and his colleagues from Princeton University speculated that the dark invisible matter, which apparently makes up around ninety percent of the mass of the universe, could exist in the form of a Bose-Einstein condensate of extremely low-mass particles. If this bold hypothesis is correct, the coldest gases would also be the most common. 

 

Of course, the temperature in space is very low because there are few particles there that could knock on a thermometer. There would be gas condensates everywhere, to which extremely low mass is now assigned, because otherwise the calculation would not work out again due to too much invisible or dark matter. 

 

In these zero-point experiments, condensates can be stirred using lasers and various vortex patterns can be produced, which can also be directly visualised. It is quite clear that no hard parts can be recognised in them, and these should crystallise out during condensation or at minimal temperatures. Collins states unequivocally that the classical idea of atoms as particles that collide like tiny marbles fails completely when interpreting these experiments. 

 

Against this background, it remains incomprehensible why the hunt is still on for any particles or masses if all experiments ultimately leave nothing but motion. However, these experiments in no way show the motion structure of atoms. These images primarily reflect the movement pattern of the atom traps, i.e. their strong magnetic fields in combination with the laser irradiation. 

 

Ether and Motion 

These condensates cannot be equated with the medium of these phenomena. That is why the more common term zero-point energy cannot be used instead of ether. Ether is a real substance which is in motion within itself. Temperature (whether zero-point or at the surface of the Sun) is a measure of the movement of secondary phenomena (i.e. at the level of previous marbles). And energy is only an abstract concept anyway. 

 

The term zero-point energy is once again a combination of abstract terms, a meaningless and empty phrase. This term only expresses the astonishment of physicists that there is still a lot of movement at the zero point of material movements. This clearly shows that matter is a secondary phenomenon that can only occur on the basis of a primary medium. 

 

Whoever wants to present a new model must refer to one or rather two pillars of current physics: Einstein and quantum theories. This book refers to Einstein's late statements: Space without ether is unthinkable, ether must not be thought of in terms of particles and normal movements are not given in it, moreover to current confirmations by quantum physics, which even in extreme situations could not detect any evidence of any hard particles of matter, but only perpetual movements in manifold patterns. 

 

Physics is at a dead end as long as it is still stuck in particle thinking or in a wave-particle dualism. Moreover, it is subject to misconceptions about motion, especially that of waves. I am sorry that I am probably alienating some readers with this criticism, but the incomprehensibility and paradoxes of relativity and quantum theories cry out for a more comprehensible model. Here, alternatives are presented in simple language with clearly defined terms. However, spatial imagination is required in order to grasp the complex motion sequences in the three spatial dimensions. I am trying to illustrate the considerations and processes by simple images.

Real or Abstract 

Once again, I would like to emphasise the difference between the real world and fictitious reference worlds. Figure 03.04 again shows the plasma from previous zero-point experiments. You can obviously see something wobbling within itself, with no recognisable internal boundaries. The oscillating structure is generated and limited by magnetic fields and laser light, by means of which this photo can also be obtained directly. The laser beams encounter different movements at different points and are reflected in different ways, from which this coloured image is generated. 

 

If this prison would be liberated, the movements would appear differently. However, this something will continue to exist in reality, just as it was surmised above such plasma is present everywhere in the universe. I call this particle-less something a continuum called ether – but the term etherplasma would be equally appropriate. 

 

As free ether with universal shape of movements I call this substance outside of local movement pattern, while these space-bounded occurrences (like at picture resp. like electrons or also galaxies) are called Bounded ether and move e.g. in shape of Potential-Vortex-Clouds. 

 

This plasma consists of a substance and a piece of this substance is located directly next to another, similar piece. The only difference between the various positions are the current movements, which merge seamlessly into one another. Ether is gapless, so one cannot speak of ether-particles. Also previous piece of that substance (or a portion of it) is real not separable. Therefore I use geometric term ether-point, if one point within ether should be observed in its motion. This substance naturally has an extension (piece by piece or directly point by point), not only encompassing this plasma bubble here, but the whole universe without subdivision. 

 

Movement can not happen by shifting parts at boundary surfaces towards each other, but only by one point turning around another and all neighbouring points behaving analogue. As this picture is illustrating, only swinging and twisting can take place, from place to place with changing intensity or on differently curved paths. In the centre of a movement pattern, the movements are generally relatively wide-ranging and reduce towards the outside to swinging on narrower paths. 

 

In this picture, a clock is drawn once again and in comparison with its movement, the frequency of the oscillation can be determined. A scale is also drawn in and it can be clearly seen that, analogous to time, expansion or space can only be measured by comparing it with a metre rule. This abstract world of space and time (highlighted here in light yellow) are arbitrary, fictitious standards of comparison invented by humans, while only the world of ether-plasma and its movements actually exists. 

 

It might seem annoying and witless to some readers if I repeatedly emphasise this distinction between real and abstract. However, if we want to recognise the essence underlying all phenomena, we must not discuss it with imprecise collective terms (as is the primary custom in practically all disciplines), but must precisely describe the properties of the real basis of all phenomena, because only in this way can the recognisable laws of nature be logically explained.

04 Celestial Maths 

How many times do you have to fold a sheet of A4 paper with a thickness of 0.1 mm in order to bridge the distance between the Earth and the Moon? This was one of the tasks that a company set its prospective job applicants in order to draw conclusions about their aptitude and IQ. As an applicant, I would certainly have failed this task. But Thank God other talents and skills were important in my career. For many people, thanks to their abilities, it's no problem to calculate this with a smile. Mathematically, it's no problem at all. But does the practical realisation of this task correspond to reality? Because every folding attempt ends at the latest after six or seven folds. 

 

Johannes Kepler (1571 - 1630) started from the idea that the Copernican system was merely a (hypothetical) model for simpler calculation of planetary positions. He discovered that the Earth was not at the centre of the world view (geocentric world view), but that all planets move around the Sun in elliptical orbits (heliocentric world view), the basis of his three Keplerian laws. His calculations were based on the extensive and documented long-term observations of planetary positions by Tycho Brahe (1546 - 1601). 

 

Seeing the heliocentric world view (the Sun as the centre) as a physical fact met with dogmatic resistance not only from the Catholic Church, but also from Kepler's Protestant superiors. On both sides, the teachings of Aristotle (384 BC to 322 BC) and Ptolemy (around 100 to 160 AD) were considered sacrosanct.

The Law of Gravity 

In 1686, Isaac Newton (1642 - 1726) believed that he had discovered gravity as the cause of planetary motion. He then defined the law of gravity in his work Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica. Figure 04.01 shows the principle in simplified form. It states that every point of mass attracts every other point of mass with a force that is directed along the connecting line. The larger the masses, the stronger their attraction. Conversely, he believed he could recognise this:

 

The further the distance between the two masses, the smaller their force of attraction. He applied this realisation not only to the falling apple, but also to all celestial bodies in the universe. 

 

Newton wrote the formula in the usual way of the time

 

 

F ~ m1, F ~ m2, F ~ 1/r^2.

However, due to the lack of a constant, this formula was not used at beginning. One hundred years later, in 1798, Henry Cavendish succeeded in measuring two attracting bodies with the help of the gravitational balance invented especially for this purpose. See Figure 04.02. The balance consisted of two spherical test masses, each weighing m = 0.73 kg, which were connected to form a dumbbell and suspended from a torsion wire so that they could perform free horizontal rotational oscillations. Two large spheres, each weighing m = 158 kg, at an equal distance r close to one of the test masses each, generated the attractive force that deflected the test masses approx. 1° from their rest position.

The torsional force F was determined from the deflection angle, which balances the attractive force of the large and small spheres at this distance. The necessary knowledge of the torsional stiffness of the wire was obtained from the period of the torsional oscillation. The measurement at that time deviated by only 1.2 degrees from today's value G = 6.6743·10^-11 m^3/(kg·s^2). The weakest of the forces of nature is therefore only 

 

0.000000000066743 m^3/(kg·s^2).

 

In 1873, 200 years after Newton, this notation was introduced by Alfred Cornu and Jean-Baptistin 

Baille:

With this notation, we now move away from Newton's mathematical abstraction and connect both celestial bodies by mentally mounting a rod r from centre to centre, forming a square on it and dividing the sum of the multiplication of the masses m by the area of the square. The result is multiplied by the gravitational constant G to obtain the formula for calculating the force of attraction,

which also applies to the entire universe. Thus, centuries of observations of celestial bodies resulted in a theory that consists solely of the assumption that the larger the masses, the stronger their attraction. Even if the law is confirmed by numerous mathematical calculations in circular reasoning, the actual causes of these forces of attraction remain completely unexplained.

Calculating the Mass of the Earth (method 1)

If you know the distance and orbital period of a celestial body orbiting a heavier celestial body, the so-called central body m, you can determine the mass m of the central body. It is not even necessary to know the mass of the celestial body orbiting the central body. This principle is illustrated in Figure 04.03. It sounds almost fantastic, but like maths makes it possible. A tethered flight model, it is assumed that the gravitational force FG of the Earth is equal to the radial or centripetal force FC of the Moon, as otherwise the Moon would at some point be attracted to the Earth or move away from the Earth. 

The derivation of the formula for calculating the mass according to Keppler's 3rd law is as follows:

By inserting these numbers into the above formula, you obtain

The mass of the Earth is 6,029,287,686,527,090,000,000,000 kg,

 

in words: 

six septillion twenty nine sextillion two hundred and eighty seven quintillion six hundred and eighty six quadrillion five hundred and twenty seven trillion and ninety billion kilograms. 

 

This correct calculation is based on the general data on the gravitational constant G, mean distance Earth-Moon r, as well as its orbital period in days t and surprisingly deviates slightly from the result of 5.9722E+24 kg officially stated on Wikipedia. 

 

This method is also used to calculate the masses of the Sun and all other planets in the solar system that are orbited by a satellite or Moon. It does not matter whether the mass of the Sun is calculated using Neptune, Saturn or another planet. The results are almost identical. 

 

The planets Mercury, Venus and our Earth's Moon, whose masses could only be approximately determined by flybys of space probes or the Apollo program in the early 1960s, are exceptions to the mass determination according to the law of gravity. Similarly, all stationary celestial bodies without satellites cannot be calculated according to the law of gravity.

* Wikipedia; G = 6.67430(15)E^-11 m^3/(kg·s^2)

Calculating the Mass of the Earth (method 2) 

In general, it is noticeable that on various platforms of the Internet the information on planets about their size, mass etc. differs slightly or is rounded up or down. Wikipedia gives the mass m of the Earth as 5.9722E+24 kg. This number was presumably determined using the acceleration due to gravity g of 9.81 m/s^2 The formula for calculating the mass m using the gravitational acceleration g is as follows:

Calculating the Gravitational Acceleration of the Earth 

To calculate the gravitational acceleration g on a planet, you need its mass m. To do this, set the weight force of a body 

F = m · g  equal to its gravitational force  

F = G · m1 · m2/r^2

Calculate in a Circle 1]

Fig. 04.04. By rearranging the formulae according to the values sought, their results can be determined. In this way, all natural constants result from the calculations with the correct value. This is not surprising when the components of all formulae are practically inserted into each other in a circle. In addition, it remains completely open whether the assumptions and initial data actually correspond to reality. It is well known that it will be possible to calculate any result if it is already implicitly contained in the input data.

Calculating the Earth's Gravity 

If the masses of an orbiting celestial body m2 around a central body m1 are known, the gravitational force F of the central body, e.g. the Earth, can be calculated using the following formula:

The gravitational pull of the Earth is 198,163,759,448,323,000,000 N kg·m/s^2. 

 

It is very unfamiliar to make friends with such huge numbers. In order to understand what is going on in celestial maths, I took the trouble to recalculate all the relevant calculations. It took a while for me as a layman, using a pocket calculator and an Excel spreadsheet, to muddle through and understand the mathematical hyroglyphs such as 0.1234·10^24 corresponds to the notation 0.1234E+24. In order to be able to understand the calculations, I have listed all of them in detail. 

*Wikipedia

Calculating the Centripetal or radial Force of the Earth 

The mass of the Earth generates the centripetal force F on its orbit around the Sun. It is given in Newtons N and is equal to the gravitational force of the Sun acting there. It can allegedly be calculated using two methods. 

 

Method A: with orbital velocity v

Method B: with angular velocity w

Both results are quite different and deviate from each other by 1.0704E+10 N kg·m/s^2, which corresponds to a difference of about 0.3 per cent.

* Wikipedia

Calculating the Mass of the Sun 

In all previous calculations, the determination of the mass of a planet or the centre of a supposed black hole is the basis for calculating its gravity, centripetal force and gravitational acceleration. Because our Sun is of central importance for the history of astronomy and supposedly holds all planets on the different radii of their orbits due to its strong gravitational pull – and has done so for millions of years – I will repeat the calculation of the mass of the Earth shown at the beginning of this chapter, with the necessary data for determining the mass of the Sun.

In figures, this is 1,988,504,559,770,430,000,000 kg and is approximately 330,000 times the mass of the Earth. However, the mass of the Sun can be calculated not only from its distance from the Earth, but also from the distances to all the other planets. Their results differ only slightly from each other:

* Wikipedia; **author's own calculations

Calculating the Gravity of the Sun

Shown in full numerical length: 35,414,460,829,709,900,000,000 N kg·m/s^2. 

The Sun's gravity is 177 times greater than that of the Earth, which is remarkably small looking at the huge difference in mass.

Calculating Jupiter's Gravity (with moon Io)

 

This result is surprising. Jupiter's gravity is about 1.75 times bigger than that of the Sun, although its mass is over a thousand times bigger. 

* Wikipedia

Special Case Mass of the Moon (according to F. Link: Der Mond; Springer-Verlag) 

Wikipedia is saying its mass is 7.3460E+22 kg, which is about 1/81 of the Earth's mass. The resulting average density is 3.344 g/cm^3. In comparison: the Earth 5.5 g/cm^3. The gravitational acceleration g on the Moon is 1.62 m/s^2. As the Moon itself has no Moon or satellites, its mass cannot be calculated using the previous (law) formulae. Instead, we refer to the tried and tested toolbox of mechanics. 

 

The Moon always shows us its same face. Experts refer to this as bound rotation although, while the Moon orbits the Earth once, it has rotated about 28 times on its own axis. As with a dumbbell, the common center of gravity CG or center of rotation of the Earth and Moon should not lie directly in the center of the Earth, but approx. 4,641.8 kilometers 61] away from it (see Fig.04.05). This was the result of calculations of the angular differences of only a few seconds of arc of individual solar positions observed from the Earth. The orbit around the common center of gravity of the system means that the Earth is periodically in front of or behind the center of gravity. The Earth and Moon egg, so to speak, on their orbit around the Sun. As a result, the position of the Sun is perceived as periodically shifted. See schematic representation in Fig. 04.06. The resulting angular dimension rad is

The distance of the center of gravity CG from the center of the Earth is calculated using and the distance Earth-Sun r E,S = 1 AU (1.4960E+11 m) as follows

The relationship known from mechanics applies to the position of the center of gravity of two (point) masses:

From this follows:

The mass of the Moon can therefore be determined from astronomical observations without the gravitational constant G on the Earth. 61] 

 

However, if the mass of the Earth does not correspond to reality according to current doctrine, this result is obsolete. Regardless of this egg dance, the fact remains that the Moon's orbital speed slows down considerably during the day and increases at night, overtaking the Earth again, so to speak 3], which cannot be explained by conventional celestial mechanics and actio = reactio thinking. A precise description of the orbit of our Earth satellite follows in a later chapter.

** Wikipedia gives the mass of the Earth as 5.9722E+24 kg

Earthly Comparison 

The dimensions of celestial bodies, their gravitational forces and masses are almost inconceivable to us humans in our everyday life in space. Mathematics provides us with seemingly correct, absolute results, which we (have to) take note of in amazement. However, we cannot even check whether these results correspond to reality or are correct. Calculating the mass on a much smaller scale for comparison is perhaps helpful and provides an indication of the coherence of this celestial mathematics. 

 

Task: In Fig. 04.07, a sphere with a radius of 2.019 m orbits a center in 0.4528 s. What is the mass at the center?

Everyone will be amazed about this result! The orbital period and distance correspond to those of a hammer thrower weighing approx. 100 kg just before it releases the rope with the ball attached to it. Critics will argue that Newton's law of gravitation and its derivations for calculating masses, gravity, centripetal forces and gravitational acceleration can only be applied to celestial bodies. I counter that the radius of this model calculation corresponds approximately to the size of Henry Cavendish's experimental setup for determining the gravitational constants, which is used for universe-wide calculations. So why should this calculation, applied to earthly scales, not be applicable, even though further calculations with the dimensions of the hammer thrower provide quite realistic results?

* Wikipedia; **author's own calculations

Calculating the Gravity of a Hammer Thrower

Calculation of the Centripetal Force of the Hammer

* Wikipedia; **author's own calculations

The 100 kg athlete must exert 3,672 N kg·m/s^2 against the centrifugal force of the hammer in order not to be pulled out of the circle, which is roughly equivalent to a weight of 367.2 kg. 

 

In physics teaching materials, only the Sun and the Earth are usually listed as examples of mass and gravitational forces etc., all other planets are not. Just out of interest, because the above result for Jupiter cannot be correct, I have used this method to calculate the gravitational forces of all the planets in the solar system, including their moons or satellites. The same applies to their centripetal forces, as in the example calculation for the Earth above. All the results are summarized in the following chart.

With all the previous calculations and results for determining the masses of celestial bodies, it is questionable whether the principles used are at all accurate and reflect a true picture of reality. Particularly striking is the calculation of the hammer thrower, which contradicts all real conditions. As the calculations of the athlete's gravity and the centripetal force of his hammer appear to be very real, it can be assumed that the determination of mass and further calculations based on this, such as gravity, are fundamentally wrong. There is also the question whether celestial mathematics, based solely on observations, is even capable of expressing the real situation in figures, as such model calculations only represent a narrow section of reality and do not take external (unknown) factors into account. 

 

It is more than questionable to deduce the functioning of planetary motion from the observation of a falling apple alone, and consequently the law of gravity with universal validity. For example, different gravitational forces are measured at different places on Earth at different times of day 1]. 

Table 04.08 summarises the data for all the planets in the solar system. The values shown in black are those given on official webpages. Some of these values vary slightly or are rounded. The gravity (green) is then calculated based on this with the help of their moons/trabants. The gravity of Mercury and Venus is only estimated (in italics), as no official data is available and none of the planets has got moons that are relevant for the calculation. The respective centripetal forces are printed in red. If you look at the calculations and the values derived from them, e.g. gravity or centripetal force of the planets individually, each may represent a conclusive result in itself. However, when all the planets are compared with eachother, a completely different picture emerges. The following comparisons are particularly striking: 

 

  • Although Jupiter has got a one thousandth of the Sun's mass, its gravity is 1.8 times higher. The gravitational acceleration on Jupiter of 24.97 m/s^2 is not even a tenth of the Sun. 

 

  • The sum of all centripetal, radial, or centrifugal forces of the planets is 5.6043E+23 N kg·m/s^2, almost 16 times higher than the gravitational force of the Sun. And that with a total of the masses of all the planets of just 0.1342 percent of the Sun.

The basic consideration for the functioning of the solar system is that the gravitational pull of the Sun and the centripetal forces of the respective planets are equal, as shown in the following mathematical expression – otherwise the solar system would fly apart or collapse.

The values of the centripetal forces of the planets from the previous table are shown again in the chart above. The yellow column represents the gravity of the Sun, the blue columns the centripetal forces of the planets and their true-to-scale distances from each other. 

 

According to current theory, the red-dashed curve shows the course of our Sun's gravity, which decreases with the square of the distance and theoretically extends to infinity, which is expressed by the r^2 in the denominator of the formula for calculating gravity. 


 

The red-dashed curve also shows how high the columns of centripetal forces of the planets must be for the statement gravitation = centripetal force to be correct. Mercury, Mars, Uranus and Neptune would have to be sucked in by the Sun because their centripetal force is too low, while Venus, Earth, Jupiter and Saturn would have to fly away into the universe because their centripetal force is too high.

Chart 04.09 shows that the centripetal forces of the planets at their respective positions do not come close to the gravitational force of the Sun and are in some cases many times higher or much too low – and this with an assumed solar mass of 99.86% of the solar system, which is only 0.14% of the planetary mass. 

 

The reason for this is the fundamentally false assumption that all planetary movements are based solely on gravity. Mathematical formulae calculating masses, gravitational forces etc. are all based on the error using a gravitational constant under terrestrial laboratory conditions. They do not correspond with the realities outside the Earth. As these calculation methods are used throughout the universe, it can be assumed that all knowledge about gravity, stellar and planetary masses, their movements and celestial mechanics is absolute wrong.

 

Of course on Earth an apple is falling from the tree at an average speed of 9.81 m/s^2. But at different speeds in different places and at different times. To conclude by circular reasoning that the Earth therefore has an average density of 5.5 g/cm^3 is purely speculative as long as the nature of gravity has not been researched. In Newton's epoche, an average density of only 2.75 g/cm^3 was assumed and even much earlier, in ancient myths and legends, a hollow core was even thought to exist inside the Earth. It is absolutely wrong to transfer these earthly ratios to other celestial bodies, such as our central star, the Sun, which is supposed to force the planets into orbit due to its enormous mass and gravitational pull.

05 The Solar System

The Planets & Co. 

Figure 05.01 shows to scale the proportions of the Sun and planets, their respective inclination to the ecliptic (red), their axes of rotation (white) and the time in hours and minutes (blue) they need to rotate once around their own axis. This shows that each planet has its own characteristics. Given the supposedly constant gravitational pull towards the centre of the Sun for millions of years, one would assume that all planets have a more simular alignment of axes, rotations and movements. 

 

However, a closer look reveals that each planet consists of a complex vortex system that is very different from its neighbouring planets: the central planet, its moons and/or satellites, similar to the entire solar system. Its respective sphere of influence extends far out into space like an aura and is not limited to its actual size. 

 

The term gravity used in connection with Newton's law of gravity, which is supposed to be the cause of planetary motion and their gravitational forces in the solar system, presents a false analysis of the real situation. In the circular, almost horizontal and elliptical orbits of the planets around the Sun, gravity and the attraction derived from it have virtually no effect at all. 

 

If gravitational attraction is to be the cause of the planets' movements and their orbits around the Sun, other forces must exist that keep these planets in their vertical positions. But far above and below the solar system there is no massive planet or star that could generate these vertical forces. The planets are assigned with their masses and with the composition and the respective earthly weight resulting in. But mass alone has no weight. It is absolutely wrong to derive a gravitational force from their masses alone. Only in a certain distance from the celestial body a radially directed (attractive) force has got an effect, which increases with the square of the distance and whose true cause is described in later chapters. All celestial bodies, if they have sufficient distance to their neighbours, drift purely passively in the infinite sea of the universe. 

 

In Fig. 05.02 above, the Sun and its planets are shown on a scale of 1:20,000,000,000,000 (in words: one to twenty trillion). One millimetre = 20,000,000,000 km. The diameter of the Sun shrinks from 1,391,400 km to approx. 0.07 mm and is perhaps just recognisable as a tiny dot if the print quality is very good. Looking at this graphic, it is hard to imagine that such a tiny Sun dot could have such enormous gravitational pull. 

Astrophysicists are divided on the true size of the solar system and its sphere of influence. Some estimate the heliopause at a distance of about 122 AU from the centre of the Sun. This is about four times the distance between the Sun and Neptune, and in fact the orbits of the known planets lie well within the heliosphere (Neptune is the outermost planet at 30 AU). The same applies to Pluto and the Kuiper belt (30-50 AU). 

 

In the meantime, transneptunian objects have been found whose orbits extend far beyond the heliopause. And much further away is the Oort cloud, which astrophysicists suspect a distance of up to 100,000 AU (1 AU = 150 million km) from the Sun, which corresponds to around 1.6 light years. As the r^2 in Newton's law of gravity means that the gravitational pull of the Sun decreases with the square of the distance, but theoretically extends to infinity, according to the formula 

a gravitational effect should also be present in these distant objects. This is why other astronomers define the Oort Cloud as the boundary of our solar system. 22]

 

In Fig. 05.02 above, the arrowheads indicate the respective positions of the planets. The gas giant Jupiter is ten times smaller in diameter than the Sun and the Earth is ten times smaller again, at a distance of one astronomical unit (AU = 150 million km) from the Sun. The blue bars below indicate the perihelion – the closest point to the Sun – and aphelion – the furthest point from the Sun – of their orbits. The dwarf planet Pluto is not shown in this diagram, as its aphelion lies far outside this diagram. 

 

Potential Vortex 

The figure below shows the planets and their speed in space (light blue area). The ecliptic of the solar system is a vortex system, similar to a whirlpool, whose limit is assumed to be around 10,000,000,000 km. The planets move faster and faster from the outside to the inside. Neptune, Uranus, Saturn and Jupiter, for example, move respectively at 5.4, 8.6, 9.7 and 13 km/s. The Earth is moving forward at around 30 km/s, Venus at 35 km/s and Mercury is even faster at an average of 48 km/s. This has nothing to do with the conventional idea of gravitational and centripetal forces. This movement pattern is clearly the characteristic of a potential vortex: rotating faster from the outside inwards, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity 3] (see colored lines), whereby the drive energy is completely different from that of a hurricane.

For example, Hurricane Rita in 2005 was the strongest level 5 hurricane (highest category) observed in the Gulf of Mexico since regular records began in the mid-19th century and the third strongest hurricane ever observed in the Atlantic. See Fig. 05.03. Its size was roughly equivalent to the area of Germany. Rita reached average wind speeds of up to 290 km/h. The highest wind speeds were measured on the edge of the eye, whereby in the eye itself and the area of the lowest air pressure of the entire cyclone system it was relatively calm. 

 

Like with the previous cyclone, the acceleration of the planets in their orbits towards the center cannot increase indefinitely because the Sun has a rotational speed of only 2 km/s at its equator. From Mercury inwards, the potential vortex must change into a rigid vortex, see Fig. 05.02 below. Its characteristic is a constant angular velocity, whereby the absolute velocity decreases from the outside to the inside. 3] 

 

Every few decades the planets are briefly within a quadrant on their orbits around the Sun. For example, on October 28th,1845, as can be seen in the top view of the solar system in Fig. 05.04. Since the sum of the centripetal forces of the planets, according to celestial mathematics, is almost 16 times higher than the gravitational pull of the Sun (see Table 04.08, column Centripetal force), the Sun should have been pulled out of its position at that time. This is also a clear indication that the ideas of classical celestial mechanics do not correspond to reality, if one assumes that there should be an attractive effect between the celestial bodies even over many millions of kilometers. 

 

The entire solar system rotates counterclockwise, from the outside inwards with increasing speed. Mercury, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn and Neptune also rotate to the left (prograde) around their axes of rotation. In contrast, Venus, Uranus and the dwarf planet Pluto rotate retrograde, i.e. against the main direction of rotation of the system, see white arrows in Fig. 05.04. Scientists assume that the reason for this were collisions with asteroids or protoplanets (= precursors of a planet) during the formation of the solar system.

Asteroids 

Mars orbits the Sun in an elliptical orbit with an average radius of 228 million kilometres in just under 687 days. The orbital plane is inclined 1.85° to the Earth's orbital plane. 

 

Mars has two moons. Phobos, with a size of 26.8 × 22.8 × 18.4 km, orbits Mars at a radius of 9,378 km. It takes 7 hours 39 minutes to do this, which is three times as fast as Mars rotates on its own axis. The smaller moon Deimos, with dimensions of 15 × 12.2 × 10.4 km, orbits Mars at a radius of 23,459 km. It takes 30 hours and 18 minutes to do this. Both moons have a bound rotation, i.e. they always face the same side of Mars, just as we can only ever see one side of our Moon from Earth, for example. 

 

Fig. 05.06 shows a top view of the orbit of Mars (M) around the Sun (S). Although Mars is the second closest planet to Earth, it was not until the year 1990 that an asteroid called Eureka, a so-called Trojan, was discovered, which follows the planet at an angle of 60 degrees on its orbit at position L5. It has a diameter of about 1.8 km 8]. Four other asteroids are now known to share the same orbit with Mars. One asteroid precedes Mars by 60 degrees at position L4 and four follow it by 60 degrees at position L5. Four other newly discovered asteroids, which have not yet been catalogued, are also assigned to the group around Eureka at position L5 5]. And that's not all: a small moon of Eureka was discovered in 2011. It has a diameter of about 460 metres and orbits Eureka at a distance of 2.1 km in about 0.7 days. 9] To date, astronomers have also discovered Trojans on Venus, Earth, Jupiter, Uranus and Neptune, some of which are orbited by their own moons.

Jupiter and its Trojans 

Fig. 05.05 shows a top view from July 2006 of the asteroid belt and Jupiter (J) with its Trojans (green). By April 2017, more than 650,000 asteroids had been recorded, with a total mass of around 5 per cent of the Earth's Moon. 4,603 so-called Greeks precede Jupiter at the Lagrange point L4 and more than half as many, 2,476, follow it as Trojans at the Lagrange point L5, each at an angle of 60 degrees. 13] There are no asteroids around the Lagrange points L1 and L2 in the immediate vicinity of Jupiter, at the half eight o'clock position, and around L3, opposite at the half two o'clock position. 

The asteroid belt, which resembles a donut, orbits the Sun like a potential vortex – from the outside inwards, the asteroids rotate faster, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity 3], corresponding to all the planets on their orbits (see yellow arrows). This leads to the conclusion that not only all planets are in motion on their orbits around the Sun, but also the entire space in between. (Whereby no wheel turns, but a circular swinging with a beat takes place. See Chapter 11 Galaxy Milky Way, Counter-Rotating). 

 

In this top view, the Jupiter Trojans and Greeks each form the formation of a crescent. In themselves, these formations are in motion. For example, individual Trojans and Greeks fall back within this formation or are overtaken by others and then pick up speed again. Others are relatively stationary within these crescents. The Jupiter Trojan (617) Patroclus, which moves on the Lagrange point L5, a moon was first discovered in 2001 and named Menoetius. Both celestial bodies move in circular orbits around a common centre of gravity. (I deliberately put the common in italics, as this common centre of gravity around which the pair revolves is a purely mathematical assumption from Newton's law of gravity and is no proof of the actual motion). Since then, three more Trojan moons have been detected. 

Fig. 05.07 at A shows a side view of the asteroid belt including Trojans, whose thickness is about 350 and a diameter of about 1,500 million km (10 AU), with flowing transitions to the universe. 

 

In real terms, Jupiter's Trojans are roughly in the form of two parabolic mirrors facing each other vertically and aligned towards the Sun, see the oblique view from at the top at B, where Jupiter has advanced anticlockwise to approximately the eleven o'clock position. The computer simulation shows the situation on March 26th, 2026. 

 

Fig. 05.07 at C shows the situation on December 17th, 2010. The asteroid belt is faded out and the asteroids referred to by scientists as Hildas (red) can be seen, which have the formation of a triangle that also orbits the centre with Jupiter. It appears as if these Hildas are flushed towards the corners, whereby the velocities of the individual asteroids also increase here with decreasing radii towards the centre of rotation, analogous to the planetary motions (see the animations, whose link, if active, can be seen to the right of the images). During the time Jupiter orbits the Sun twice, all Hildas move around the centre three times. Astronomers call this a 3:2 orbital resonance. 

 

According to celestial mathematics, Jupiter's gravity is supposedly 1.8 times stronger than that of the Sun. See the calculation of Jupiter's gravity, although its mass is only 1,048th of the mass of the Sun! All relevant results of the calculations of all planets in the solar system are there summarised in a table. 

 

There are no asteroids in the neighbourhood of Jupiter (and its moons), which is even supposed to influence the position of the Sun due to its mass and strong gravity. It is also striking that on the opposite side of Jupiter, in the Lagrange point L3, see Fig. 05.05 and 05.07 below at C, where there is no massive planet, a large number of Hildas are positioned. 

In relation to other planets in the solar system, the Trojans have a completely different movement pattern, as shown in Fig. 05.08 for the Sun-Earth system, for example. Here the Trojans move from Lagrange point L4 via L3 to L5 and then back to Lagrange point L4, as shown in the so-called horseshoe at A. B shows the movement of the Earth Trojan 2010 TK7 with its diameter of approx. 300 metres, which moves in an interval of 390 years on its orbit from L4 to L3 and then back again, approaching the Earth to a maximum of 20 million kilometres, contrary to the mathematical descriptions of the Lagrange points L1 to L5 in the following chapter. 

 

With all these fascinating movement patterns of the asteroids, Trojans, Greeks and Hildas, it is easy to forget that they are just galactic dust. Due to its vanishingly low mass and centripetal force compared to Jupiter and the other planets, the dust should be instantly attracted by the Sun or even by Jupiter itself. If one follows celestial mathematics with its fundamental statement 

one inevitably comes to the conclusion that none of this can have anything to do with gravitational or centripetal forces. These celestial objects, like the planets themselves, drift rather purely passive in a vortex system that resembles a gigantic whirlpool. Classical celestial mechanics, however, explain the arrangement or movement patterns of the Trojans & Co. as follows:

Lagrange Points L1 to L5

As early as the eighteenth century, the Italian mathematician and astronomer Joseph-Louis Lagrange (1736 - 1813) calculated on the basis of the classical laws of gravitation that in a system with two massive bodies (e.g. the Sun and a planet, but also a planet and a moon), there are five special equilibrium points (L1 to L5). Celestial bodies positioned at these five points maintain their distances and separations from their planet or Moon while orbiting the central body. 7]

 

Scientists believe that the Lagrange points are mathematically equilibrium points of the restricted three-body problem. The general three-body problem of celestial mechanics can only be solved numerically by approximation (see the following definition of the three-body problem). With the restriction that the third body has a negligible mass, third bodies can rest force-free in the Lagrange points L1 to L5. These are zero points of the gravitational field in the rotating reference system in which the two heavy celestial bodies, e.g. the Sun and the planet, are also at rest. This means that the gravitational forces of the two bodies on the test specimen (L1-L5) are cancelled out by the centrifugal force due to the rotation of the reference system. In a non-rotating reference system, the Lagrange points move synchronously with the two celestial bodies on circular orbits around the common centre of gravity. 10]

L1 to L3 are stable in the tangential direction and unstable in the radial direction and therefore unstable overall. L4 and L5, on the other hand, are Lyapunow-stable: If the test body is around the Lagrange point in this environment, it remains on a closed orbit. The decisive element is the Coriolis force, which is negligible outside this environment. Fig. 05.09 shows equipotential lines of an example gravitational field in the ratio 1:10 in the corotating reference system as a rubber mat model in purple colour 15]. 

 

The distances of the Lagrange points L1 and L2 to their planets or moons are very complex to calculate and can only be determined approximately. 

However, with this simplified formula (according to the classical method), which was made available to me by the Hamburg Observatory, the following L1 and L2 distances supposedly result for the planets in the solar system: 

The Three-Body Problem*

The three-body problem in celestial mechanics consists of finding a solution (prediction) for the orbital path of three bodies under the influence of their mutual attraction (Newton's law of gravitation). In order to obtain quantitative results, it must be solved numerically in the general case. Since the discoveries of Johannes Kepler and Nicolaus Copernicus, the three-body problem has been regarded as one of the most difficult mathematical problems, which many well-known mathematicians such as Alexis-Claude Clairaut, Leonhard Euler, Joseph-Louis Lagrange, Thorvald Nicolai Thiele, George William Hill and Henri Poincaré have worked on over the centuries. In the general case, the movement is chaotic and can only be calculated numerically.

 

The special case in which one of the three bodies has a vanishingly small mass and its effect on the other two can be neglected is known as the restricted three-body problem. It plays an important role in astronomy (e.g. in research satellites such as the Planetary Grand Tour), which leads to the problem of Lagrange points. 

* https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Three-body_problem

 

General Statements

The two-body problem can be solved analytically using Kepler's laws. However, in the case of more than two celestial bodies, the integrals are no longer algebraic integrals 18] and can no longer be solved with elementary functions. At the beginning of the 20th century, Karl Frithiof Sundman was the first to provide an analytical solution to the three-body problem in the form of a convergent power series, assuming that the total angular momentum of the system does not vanish and therefore a three-body collision does not occur, in which the distance between all three bodies is zero. However, Sundman's solution is not useful for practical calculations, as at least 10 to the power of 8,000,000 terms would have to be taken into account in the sum in order to achieve sufficient accuracy.19] The stability of a three-body system is described by the Kolmogorov-Arnold-Moser-theorem*. 


 

Approximate or exact solutions are possible in some cases: If the mass of one of the celestial bodies is small, then the three-body problem is solved iteratively (step by step in repeated calculations), nowadays with computers, or orbital perturbations are calculated that the smallest (lightest) body suffers from the larger (heavier) bodies. The above-mentioned special case (restricted three-body problem) of the equilibrium of the force of attraction of two large bodies on a vanishingly small body (taking into account the apparent forces occurring in the rotating reference system) can be solved exactly at the Lagrange points L1 to L5. The inner point L1 is used, for example, in space travel for solar research. The SOHO solar observatory is located there. For the case of three equal masses, there is a solution in which the objects follow each other on a common orbit that has the shape of an infinity sign (∞).17]

 

The preceding text shows that science is very keen to justify the observations of the Lagrange points L1 to L5 with mathematical solutions without being able to offer concrete solutions. As long as one persists in the classical actio = reactio thinking, one will not be able to arrive at any results, as celestial mechanics has nothing to do with gravitation, centrifugal forces, angular momentum and conservation laws. Instead, these (three) celestial bodies (problems) swim or drift purely passively in a vortex around the centre of, for example, the Sun or a planet, embedded in a huge whirlpool consisting of an infinite number of galaxies. A Sundman solution with 10^8,000,000 terms or the Kolmogorov-Arnold-Moser theorem* also represent a contradiction to scientific principles, theories and methodologies that have been applied for centuries:

* https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kolmogorov–Arnold–Moser_theorem

 

Occam's Razor 

This principle, named after the scientist William of Ockham (1288-1347), states: Of several sufficient possible explanations for one and the same fact, the simplest theory is preferable to all others. A theory is simple if it contains as few variables and hypotheses as possible and if these are in clear logical relationships to each other, from which the logically explained facts follow.

Unequal Equilibria 

Fig. 05.10 shows the Lagrange points L1 to L5 of the Sun and Jupiter again. The whole solar system is left-turning, also all space between the planets, with increasing rotation speeds on shorter radii like a potential vortex (yellow arrows), whereby all ether is stationary with its internal swinging with beat.

 

L3, L4 and L5 form an isosceles triangle. Jupiter orbits the Sun at a distance of 778 million kilometres. The radius of its orbit around the Sun also forms the intersection points of L4 and L5. L1 and L2 represent the alleged distance of the balance of gravitational forces of approx. 52.5 million kilometres to Jupiter calculated by the Hamburg Observatory. The black ring around Jupiter has a radius of approx. 20 million kilometres and is the beginning of its area of attraction (see later chapter 07 Voyager I Mission). In this illustration, Jupiter and the Sun are greatly exaggerated, as their true sizes cannot be depicted on this scale. 

 

The Sun supposedly has a mass of 1.9884E+30 kg*, Jupiter 1.8990E+27 kg*. This corresponds to a ratio of 1:1,080 (for Sun-Earth 5.9722E+24 kg* even 1:330,000**). See table 04.08, the planets in the solar System. 

 

The Sun's gravity is 3.5414E+22 N kg∙m/s^2**, Jupiter's is 6.3630E+22 N kg∙m/s^2**, i.e. approx. 180 per cent more, see table 04.08. (The Earth has a gravity of 1.9816E+20 N kg∙m/s^2**. This corresponds to about 0.56 per cent** of the Sun's gravitational pull). 

 

Here the celestial maths shows strange results. Jupiter's gravitational pull is greater than that of the Sun, even though its mass is 1,080 times greater. (This ratio is even more serious for the Earth. It has 0.56 per cent of the gravitational pull of the Sun, although its mass is just 1/330,000 of the Sun's mass). And Jupiter's centripetal force of 4.1606E+23 N kg∙m/s^2** exceeds the Sun's gravitational pull by a factor of more than eleven. 


* Wikipedia; ** author's own calculations

Speculation: Cause of the Lagrange Points 

These figures clearly show that the ideas of any equilibrium of attractive forces in the Lagrange points L1 to L5 in the Sun-Jupiter system and their mathematically substantiated cause cannot be correct. 

 

There is certainly an attractive force in the vicinity of each planet, but its cause is not based on mass, but on completely different physical backgrounds, as will be explained in following chapters. As described before, all planets and asteoroids drift only passively in the solar system. The Lagrange points L4 and L5 are each 778 million kilometres away from the Sun and Jupiter. In other words, far beyond their gravitational effect. Therefore, gravity cannot be the reason for their positions. The following aspects play a role for Jupiter, its Trojans and co. 

 

Every celestial body emits energy in different forms and frequencies, e.g. in the form of light, heat, radio radiation or electrically charged particles such as those of the solar wind. And this also extends much further than their supposed areas of influence. Jupiter also emits very strong ionising radiation. I therefore suspect that the radiation from the Sun and Jupiter, along with other effects, is the main cause of the positions of the Trojans, Greeks and the movement pattern of the Hildas. 

 

The radiation of the solar wind is somewhat stronger than that of Jupiter, which means that between L4 and L5 the distance between the Hildas and the Sun is somewhat greater. Both overlapping radiations push the Trojans and Greeks to their positions around L4 and L5 and thus ensure an apparently accelerated redirection of the Hildas. This is why the area around Jupiter is free of asteroids, see Fig. 05.11. 

As already explained in previous chapters, the solar system resembles a potential vortex: rotating faster from the outside inwards, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity. In addition, there is a general centripetal pressure that accelerates the Hildas on the opposite side of Jupiter. The radiation pressure of the Sun plus acceleration pushes the Hildas close to the Lagrange point L3, where they lose speed with increasing distance from the Sun (law of conservation of torque) and are captured again by the vortex system. They are then pushed back to their original distance from the Sun by the centripetal pressure of the system – back into the Hilda cycle.

06 Space Telescopes 6]

The Solar and Heliospheric Observatory (SOHO) of ESA and NASA is positioned at the unstable point L1 between the Earth and the Sun, which has been transmitting images and data of the solar surface to Earth since 1995, see Fig. 06.01 at A and later chapter 14 The Sun. 

 

SOHO is located in a so called halo orbit (HO) with a radius of 600,000 km around the Lagrange point L1, Fig. 06.01 B and C at a distance of approx. 1.5 million km from Earth. The following missions are also stationed in halo orbits: Genesis (2001, around L1 Earth-Sun), Herschel and Planck (2009, around L2 Earth-Sun), as well as Queqiao (2018, L2 Earth-Moon 14], whose orbit is approximately 350 x 13,400 km on the side facing away from Earth 59] and Spektr-RG (2019, L2 Earth-Sun). 

 

The following italicised text, has been taken from the German webpage Spektrum.de SciLogs and translated into English. The author Michael Khan, aerospace engineer and mission analyst, describes in his article Lagrange points? Excuse me? the flight manoeuvres of the space probes. 

 

The L1 point of Sun-Earth is favourable for solar observation, whereas the L2 point is favourable for orbital telescopes of all kinds. It is much easier to observe the entire celestial vault from there than from an Earth orbit during the course of the year; the Moon and Earth are far away and almost in line with the Sun; although the sensitive instruments on board must not and should not normally have any of these bodies in their field of view, this is reasonably easy to achieve out there. 

 

How can you imagine placing a body in one of these points? Well, first of all, you should say goodbye to the idea of positioning something directly in these points. They are unstable points, and their position relative to the Earth is also variable, as the Earth's orbit is eccentric and there are other forces at work than just the gravitational force of the Sun and Earth. 

 

All bodies placed in the Lagrange point actually fly on an orbit around the Sun. This is a fundamental conclusion that makes it much easier to imagine the future – at least that's how I feel. 

 

The laws of celestial mechanics require that a body on a low orbit moves faster than a body on a high orbit. If a body is at the L1 point, it is closer to the Sun than the Earth, so it should actually be travelling ahead of the Earth. A body at the L2 point, on the other hand, is further away from the Sun than the Earth, so it should actually be lagging behind the Earth. In both cases, the distance to the Earth should therefore increase continuously ... this is also the case for every other heliocentric orbit, but not for the two exceptions we are talking about here.

Let's imagine a body at the L2 point. The gravitational force of the Sun pulls it inwards, but not only that ... the gravitational force of the Earth pulls in the same direction. Although the Earth has much less mass, it is also much closer to the body, namely only about 1.5 million kilometres. The Sun is about 100 times further away. All in all, it appears to the body as if it is orbiting a slightly heavier star than the Sun. This is why it needs a little more speed at the L2 point, so much so that it takes 365.25 days to complete a full orbit around the Sun, just like the Earth. Without the Earth's gravity, it would take about five and a half days longer for one orbit. 

 

At the L1 point, the opposite is true. Here, the Sun and the Earth move in different directions, so the Sun appears somewhat lighter to the body than it really is, and a lower speed is sufficient for it than actually corresponds to its distance from the Sun, so that one orbit takes exactly one Earth year, and no less. 

 

It is easy to imagine that this trick can only work if the body, the Earth and the Sun are aligned, because only then do the forces overlap as required. The further the body deviates from the ideal position in any direction, the faster it will move away. These are unstable equilibria, like a pea balancing on the round tip of a sugar loaf. 

Fig. 06.02 shows a halo orbit (HO) around Lagrange point L1 and a Lissajous orbit named by experts, including transfer. An orbit on such an apparent loop, which is created by representing the disturbed orbit of the body around the Sun in a coordinate system that rotates with the Earth's orbit, takes half a year. The orbital speed relative to the Earth is only low there; it is almost a formation flight. This also explains why it takes two months or more from launch until the target orbit is reached: the orbital energy is just enough to prevent it from returning to Earth in an ellipse, so the speed becomes very low at great distances and the probes only make slow progress – but still at a few hundred metres per second. 

 

Whether a space probe is shot into an orbit that describes a wide loop or a narrow loop depends on technical and scientific requirements. The Herschel infrared telescope will fly in a wide Lissajous curve, whereas Planck needs a tight loop. 

 

Both are unstable – if it were possible to calculate even the tiniest perturbations to the orbit with pinpoint accuracy and to achieve an absolutely error-free orbit insertion, they could theoretically manage without corrective manoeuvres. Of course, this is not possible in practice, the orbits have to be controlled – but a small amount of fuel is sufficient to ensure that the probe does not run off during the mission, fall back to Earth or disappear into interplanetary space, never to be seen again. 

 

The dynamics of orbits in these unstable regions of equilibrium are tricky, but manageable. The idea that we are dealing with a chaotic, unpredictable and therefore uncontrollable situation is inaccurate. The SOHO solar observatory on its wide loop (a halo orbit) around the L1 point has been in operation for over a decade. 

The Journey to the Lagrange Points L1 and L2 

In reality, flight directly in the Lagrange points is not possible, because the points themselves are not simply stationary points relative to the Earth, but rather regions that are slightly variable. It would also not be desirable to be exactly in the Earth-Sun line. A spacecraft directly in the L1 point would always be exactly in front of the Sun as seen from Earth, which would interfere with radio communication from the probe to Earth. A spacecraft directly in the L2 point, on the other hand, would always be in the Earth's penumbra. Much more serious, however, is the fact that the effort required to regulate the position of the probes would be enormous if they were exactly in these theoretical locations. 

 

Fortunately, it is not necessary to fly directly in the equilibrium points. If the orbit of the body around the Sun is slightly eccentric and also inclined to the Earth's orbit, its position, viewed from the Earth, describes an ellipse-like figure (Lissajous curve) around the respective Lagrange point. There are different classes of these figures. Without going into too much detail, they can be divided into wide loops and narrow loops, whereby the deviation from the Lagrange point can range from a few hundred thousand to a million kilometres. 

Fig. 06.03* shows the orbits of the Herschel (blue) and Planck (red) missions, which are quite challenging in terms of orbital mechanics, but nevertheless manageable – interesting problems for an aerospace engineer. It is not only the operational target orbit that is interesting, but also the way to get there. The orbits in the Lagrange regions branch out into energetically similar tubular structures, so-called manifolds. These manifolds lead to completely different places in the solar system – this has a very concrete practical significance, because it is enough to shoot the space probe into the manifold and it will then slip into the target orbit months later with only minimal further action. Hard to imagine, but mathematically provable and also very useful. (Incidentally, the existence of such manifolds is also the basis for the theories surrounding the so-called interplanetary superhighway, on which flights across the solar system should be possible with less energy expenditure – but probably very long flight times – by utilising many body mechanics). 

 

A manifold branches off from the wide loop in which Herschel is to fly, leading up to an altitude of a few 100 kilometres above the Earth. So all you have to do is take off at the right time and accelerate in the right direction to escape velocity, and you are already on the manifold and on the right path to the target orbit. 


 

* Note: I consider the usual interpretation of this illustration to be incorrect. It would be more correct: Herschel's course (blue) with red projection shadows in the three-dimensional coordinate system. cf]

Fig. 06.04 shows the transfer into a narrow Lissajous orbit by means of a lunar swingby at A in a top view and at B in a side view. 

 

This is somewhat more difficult for Planck's narrow loop, because the manifold branching out from there does not reach so close to the Earth; it passes the Earth at a distance of a few tens of thousands of kilometres. In order to reach this manifold, it is therefore necessary to shoot into a high, eccentric orbit and then turn into the manifold with a considerable manoeuvre of the space probe's engines. Alternatively, one could take advantage of the fact that the manifold crosses the orbit – one could also wait for a suitable time and achieve the turn into the manifold by gaining momentum through a Moon flyby. 

 

In the case of Planck, the former is still being done, but future missions will also use the Moon flyby option saving at least fuel.

One or two points may seem a little unclear at first, but you should get used to the circumstances described: The L2 point in particular is so useful as a location for orbital telescopes of all kinds that we will be hearing a lot more about it in the future. Another advantage is immediately apparent: Because there is an unstable equilibrium in the region, it is self-cleaning. Unlike in Earth orbit, no defective or switched-off probes, upper stages and other waste can accumulate there. L2 remains clean. 6] 

 

Unfortunately, the author only describes the how, but not the why. Why the orbits of the probes can take these paths? The interested reader is left with many unanswered questions: the concept of in what kind of physical background the supposed vacuum is taking place.? My explanation for this on the basis of real ether will follow later on.

No Fiction – Just Reality! 

The author's description of the Lagrange points makes it clear how hard experts are trying to explain the phenomenon of many-sided manifolds on the basis of the laws of the heavens. On the other hand, these manifolds show that there are movements of the ether in the universe that cannot be explained using classical celestial mechanics based on gravitation, which is valid throughout the universe. Energetic, similar, tubular structures – hardly imaginable, but real. Travelling on interplanetary superhighways to other places in the solar system and the Milky Way is said to be possible in the future, completely without the waste of energy. Space probes and ships will drift (glide) purely passively to their destinations. Terms such as many-body mechanics have to be used to put the matter on a reasonably credible scientific basis. 

 

As long as we cling to the knowledge of gravity gained 400 years ago, we will never arrive at a plausible explanation for these phenomena. This is because the balance of gravitational forces of masses in the universe, over millions of light years, should have collapsed long ago due to the slightest disturbance. The fact that this is not the case is proven by the numerous explosions of stars or pulsars that are constantly taking place or have taken place somewhere in infinity and/or the (presumed) constantly expanding universe. 

 

However, if we consider the universe as a kind of gigantic ether-whirlpool, in which all celestial bodies drift purely passively in an infinite number of smaller whirlpools, this opens up completely new approaches to understanding the movements. 

 

The comparison with water is of course misleading, since ether is stationary and only the inherent movements, or the vortex patterns of the ether-oscillation, are passed on forwards and then resume their original oscillation. 

 

Fig. 06.05 shows a natural water vortex that could resemble a galactic vortex if it were visible. Embedded in it are currents with various sub-vortexes and numerous vortex braids as well as current filaments. 

According to the latest findings of marine biologists, Fig. 06.06 shows interconnected eddy currents in the world's oceans, which are used by their marine inhabitants to travel long distances from their breeding grounds to their feeding grounds in an energy-efficient manner. 

 

Everything is in motion, just like the entire universe, only unimaginably large. And everything is connected. Unfortunately, we can only see these internal movements of the universe through its celestial bodies, such as the planets, stars, asteroids or dust. We cannot see the space in between, as the ether is invisible, colourless and tasteless. 

 

In the following I will show a calculation and describe why L1 and L2 are stable and why under certain conditions interplanetary highways are theoretically usable for travelling, based on a very real ether.

Opposite Whirlpool Movements in L1 and L2

The reason described by the author at the beginning of this chapter as to why an object should fly slower at the L1 position and faster at the L2 position and thus maintain its position, because the gravitation of the Sun and Earth subtract or add and thus supposedly follow the laws of celestial mechanics, is wrong. In fact, the causes for this are the two overlapping ether-whirlpools of the Sun and Earth, whose currents (ether-oscillations with beat) subtract or add at the L1 and L2 positions. See the following calculations.

 

The law of conservation of torque states that a solid body rotating around an axis naturally attains a higher angular velocity if it is guided on a shorter radius. However, the distance travelled per unit of time remains the same. 

 

Fig. 06.07 at A shows a top view of the Earth E at a distance of 149.6 million kilometres from the Sun. The entire system is left-handed (solar-whirlpool SW). L1 and L2 are each 1.51 million kilometres* away from the Earth. For an orbit with a length of 939,964,522 km** and a speed of 29.7845 km/s**, the Earth needs exactly 365.256 days* (= 31,558,118 s). 

 

The positions of objects that would have travelled the same distance at the same speed and time on the radii of L1 and L2 are shown fictitiously at A1 and A2. According to the law of conservation of torque, the object rushes ahead of the Earth by approx. 3.64°** on the inner radius and falls back by approx. -3.57°** on the outer radius in the same period of time.

 

In reality, however, objects in the solar system move like in a potential vortex. Rotating faster from the outside inwards, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity. In reality, an object in the orbit of L1 is travelling at 29.9359 km/s, see the following calculation.

It travels a distance of 944,719,704 km** per year (B1). That is about 14,242,792 km** more than the length of its orbit. See yellow arrows in Fig. 06.07 at C. 

 

On L2, on the other hand, an object is travelling at a speed of only 29.6352 km/s and covers a distance of 935,231,740 km** (B2). This is approximately 14,220,392 km** less than the Earth has travelled in the same period. 

Embedded in this solar vortex system (SW) with flowing, smooth transitions is the Earth-whirlpool (EW), which also rotates to the left, see Fig. 06.07 at B. The radius of the Earth is around 6,378 km* and the surface rotates at around 0.5 km/s at the equator. At an altitude of 35,700 km*, satellites (GS) must move at around 3 km/s in order to maintain a geostationary position. Up to this point, the angular velocity is almost constant, as with rigid vortices.

 

At an average altitude of 384,400 km, the Moon (M) drifts around the Earth at only 1 km/s, approximately one orbit every month. Towards the outside, the absolute and angular velocity decreases, as with any potential vortex. At the L1 and L2 positions, the Earth's vortex still rotates at 0.514 km/s**, as the following derivation and calculation shows.

At this speed, an object on the radii of the Lagrange points L1 and L2 in the Earth's whirlpool travels a distance of approx. 16,214,093 km** per year, see light blue arrows in Fig. 06.07 at C. On average, this is about ± 1,982,250 km** difference to the distances that objects travel more or less on L1 and L2 annually in the solar vortex. This difference appears to be far too great to justify the theory of overlapping movements in the Lagrange points L1 and L2 and the mutually neutralising velocities. 

 

In astronomical terms, however, distances of one or two million kilometres or weights and masses of one million tonnes are practically nothing and it is not possible to calculate to the nearest gram anyway, since, for example, the Earth orbits the Sun in an ellipse, its position also varies and the universe is permanently in motion anyway. If, for example, the position of L1 were only about 136,000 km** further away from the Earth (the ether-beating in the Earth's whirlpool decreases proportionally, while that of the solar vortex increases), then these differences in speed and distance between the two whirlpools would add up to zero, which from a mathematical point of view is virtually a precision landing. See Fig. 06.07 at D. 

 

Both opposing whirlpool currents of the solar and terrestrial vortex systems almost cancel each other out at the Lagrange points L1 and L2 (at L2 + 36,000 km**) and are therefore almost stationary in both the tangential and radial directions. As with a gyroscope, this rotation system also has a stabilising and conserving effect on the movements of the celestial bodies in the radial direction. Whereby used term flow really is an ether-swinging with beat, cause ether is stationary and only its motion pattern is transferred ahead. 

Even if, on the basis of celestial mechanics calculations à la two- and three-body problem, elaborate computer simulations give the impression as to why stability prevails at these positions of all places in order to be able to place space telescopes there permanently (as here, for example, in Fig. 06.08, the Lagrange points L1 - L5 in the gravitational potential, presumably of the Earth and Moon), the preceding calculations of L1 and L2 of the Sun-Earth system show the true causes of this phenomenon – on the basis of a real ether with measurable velocities, completely without fictitious masses and their supposed attractive forces, but instead with the tried and tested rule of three.

 

* Wikipedia; ** author's own calculations

The Cause of the Manifolds 

The SOHO solar observatory, a joint ESA and NASA project, has been orbiting the Lagrange point L1 at a radius of around 600,000 kilometres since 1995 on a very stable orbit that requires only a minimum of course corrections. The experts explain this by the fact that the gravitational forces of the Sun and the Earth cancel each other out there. However, the reason for this is quite different: 

Fig. 06.09 above at A schematically shows a side view of the Earth's whirlpool, whose aura of balancing movements towards the free ether resembles a floppy hat (light blue). The Sun is located far to the left of the centre of the Earth. The ecliptic plane of the solar system is drawn as a dashed line (yellow). Both whirlpools are left-turning like at previous plan view of picture 06.07 at B. 

 

When two opposing currents meet, the weaker one gives way to the stronger one. On the side facing the Sun, the Earth-whirlpool EW deviates upwards from the powerful Sun-whirlpool SW, which is why it is inclined about 15 degrees to the ecliptic plane of the solar system. On the side facing away from the Sun, the ether-movements and directions of rotation of both whirlpools are in the same direction. 

 

Fig. 06.09 at B schematically shows the view from the Sun to the Earth in the ecliptic plane of the solar system. I assume that L1 is positioned slightly above the ecliptic due to the evasive manoeuvre of the Earth's vortex. In the peripheral zones, there are slight turbulences, see Fig. 06.09 at B. However, in the visual axis, where both currents meet directly, there is a very strong curling of the ether-movements, which leads to the fact that the ether between the main currents of both vortex systems is practically like a wheel or a roller between two discs in a circle without changing its position. 

At the same time, this circling exerts a centripetal thrust on the centre, which leads to its stabilisation. Objects that are located in the cylinder are carried along without force, such as SOHO around L1 or Herschel around L2. In Fig. 06.10 its course (blue) is shown again as a repetition, with projection shadows (red) in the three-dimensional coordinate system. 

 

Towards Earth, radius of rolls become smaller with decreasing circumferential speeds of ether-movements and a vortex-funnel comes up, see black circle-arrows at picture 06.09 at C. Assumption: analogue to fluid, slow ether-movements follow faster movements and outward beating movement-component comes up, see light blue spiral lines. As ether in principle is stationary and coherent whole, no particles are moving, but only inherent motion pattern of ether. 

 

On the side facing away from the Sun at L2, the differences in speed between the two vortex systems are much smaller, but sufficient to also form a roll, with smaller effects than at L1. See Fig. 06.07 at D (velocity data). It is therefore not science fiction to position the Herschel and Planck probes and currently also the James Webb telescope on L2, as SOHO was previously positioned on L1. As soon as the probes enter the area of the funnel, they drift without propulsion and slip almost completely force-free to their orbits around the centres of the Lagrange points of L1 and L2, where they follow the movements of this ether-vortex without propulsion and force-free. 

 

Speculation: In interstellar regions, where galactically large vortex systems meet or overlap, such ether movement patterns are presumably usable for space travel, provided we are able to recognise them and if they are accessible to us. However, as long as we remain stuck in the thrust equals mass times acceleration mindset, I fear this will remain a utopia. This would require the development of new drive concepts that cannot be realised with today's technical know-how.
 

07 Voyager I Mission

On the 5th September 1977, Voyager I launched its mission to Jupiter and Saturn from Cape Canaveral, see Fig. 07.01. Sixteen days earlier, the identically built Voyager II lifted off from the same spaceport and was to be overtaken by Voyager I on 15 December 1977, before both space probes continued their missions into space on different courses. 

 

Fig. 07.02 above shows the speed curve of Voyager I relative to the Sun. This graph was created from the official flight log data kindly provided to me by Prof Thomaz Franc, who in 2015 (C), on behalf of NASA, created an animation of the Voyager I+II missions for the scientific internet platform www.wolfram.com. The recordings end in 2020. 

 

Every 24 hours, at 00:00, Voyager I transmitted its speed and position to Earth, among other things. The Titan-IIIE-Centaur carrier rocket brought the probe to just under 40,000 km/s (relative to the Sun) with a direct approach to Jupiter. This corresponds to a speed of 15 km/s relative to Earth. Its speed then slowed down and 17 months after its launch, on the 17th February 1979, it approached the Jupiter system at 20 million km at a speed of only 14,000 km/s. See Fig. 07.02 centre. Its speed remained almost constant up to a distance of 10 million kilometres. The probe then accelerated to 20,000 km/s due to the increasing gravitational pull of the planet and passed Jupiter on the 5th March 1979 at a distance of approx. 278,000 km 11]. 

However, the probe achieved the greatest increase in speed to 33,000 km/s after the flyby, behind the celestial body, at a distance of approx. 2.7 million km, whereby the probe moved away from Jupiter at high speed, with a new direct course towards Saturn. Due to the planet's gravitational pull, its speed dropped again relatively quickly to approx. 24,000 km/s. 

 

19 months later, on the 28th October 1980, Voyager I had approached within 30 million km of the Saturn system at a speed of approx. 20,000 km/s relative to the Sun (see Fig. 07.02 below). Up to a distance of approx. 5 million kilometres, its speed remained almost constant before increasing rapidly. As with Jupiter, the probe accelerated most strongly behind the planet after the flyby, at a distance of only 101,300 km 11], on the 12th November 1980, before its speed fell again relatively quickly to approx. 22,000 km/s afterwards.

 

Experts call such close flights swing-by manoeuvres. They utilise the gravity of the celestial bodies to accelerate space probes without the use of fuel. The planets are controlled directly for this purpose. The course of the probes is calculated using complex mathematical calculations. The accuracy of calculations at these long distances naturally also contains tolerances. This is why the missiles are brought as close as possible to the target objects before the trajectory is corrected with short thrusts of the control rockets. After all, Voyager and co. can only fly in a straight line due to the lack of atmosphere in space. 

Like the solar system, Fig. 07.03 above, the Jupiter system and the Saturn system are also a potential vortex – rotating faster from the outside inwards, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity. 

 

So far, 79 Jupiter moons have been discovered (by July 2018). The most distant orbit Jupiter at a radius of around 25 million kilometres, i.e. the area in which Voyager I began to maintain its speed, see Fig. 07.03 centre. Each red X-axes represent an area of 30 million kilometres of the solar system (see Fig. 07.03 above, small red bars for Jupiter and Saturn). These outer 65 relatively small moons orbit Jupiter retrograde, i.e. against the planet's direction of rotation. Only from a radius of approx. 18 million kilometres do the moons, with a few exceptions, rotate prograde, i.e. anticlockwise when viewed from the north pole of the Jupiter system, like Jupiter itself or the entire solar system. This unstable area is presumably the transition area from the free ether (space) to the bound ether (Jupiter system). 

 

On the basis of the speed curve of Voyager I and the orbits of the outer small moons, I estimate the entire Jupiter vortex system and its area of attraction to have a radius of approx. 25 million kilometres. Whereby the greatest gravitational pull only acts in the near vicinity of the planet from a radius of 2 million kilometres and decreases by the square with increasing radius. 

 

In the previous chapter 05 The Solar System, Jupiter's Lagrange points L1/2 with a distance of 52.57 million kilometres were calculated using the formula of the Hamburg Observatory. However, the flight log shows that this transition area – Sun's gravitational pull/Jupiter's gravitational pull – exists at a distance of about 20 million kilometres.

The Jupiter system with its 65 retrograde-rotating moons, see Fig. 07.04 above, and all the other planets in the solar system have very different characteristics. Although the above formula produces an apparently correct result for the L1/2 positions of the Earth system, its application to other planets in the solar system produces considerable deviations from the real conditions and distances. 

 

A similar result is shown by the somewhat smaller Saturn with its current 82 moons. 46 of them orbit the planet retrograde, see Fig. 07.03 and 07.04 below. Here the calculated Lagrange points L1/2 are 64.44 million kilometres*. However, Voyager I's speed also remained constant from a radius of approx. 20 million km, which also represents the transition area of the retrograde to the prograde rotating moons. 

 

The previously calculated distances of the respective Lagrange points L1/2 by the Hamburg Observatory and their differences to the actual transition areas of the decreasing solar gravitational force to the gravitational force of the planets prove (see Voyager I flight log) that Jupiter and Saturn have much less gravity and consequently much less mass than previously assumed. Provided that the assumptions for calculating their mass and, derived from this, their gravitational pull according to the law of gravity are correct (see the calculation of the mass of the hammer thrower). It is also a clear indication that earthly scales such as Newton's law of gravity, when applied to other celestial objects, lead to incorrect results. 

 

Jupiter has just one thousandth of the mass of the Sun, but over 300 times more mass than the Earth. And yet, according to the prevailing scientific view, its gravitational pull is responsible for the fact that the position of the Sun in the centre varies. As I said, Jupiter's area of attraction starts at a radius of about 20 million kilometres and its distance from the Sun is 778 million kilometres. 

Janus and Epimetheus 

are two moons of Saturn that orbit the planet coorbitally prograde on a double orbit. See Fig. 07.05 above (and Fig. 07.03 below). These orbital radii have a difference of only 50 km, far less than the size of the two moons. Janus has a mass of 1.9120E+18* and Epimetheus 5.3040E+17 kg*, a little more than a quarter of Janus. Their motion profile in no way corresponds to the laws of the heavens. 

 

Regardless of its size and mass, a moon on its outer orbit requires 16 hours, 40 minutes and 18.7 seconds for one revolution. This corresponds to a speed of 57,082 km/h*. In contrast, a moon on the inner orbit travels seven kilometres per hour faster, at a speed of 57,089 km/h*. It needs 28 seconds less for one orbit, namely 16 hours, 39 minutes and 50.6 seconds*. 

 

The radius of the outer orbit is 151,460 km* and that of the inner orbit 151,410 km*. Janus measures approximately 193 × 173 × 137 km* and Epimetheus 135 × 108 × 105 km*. Every four years there is an encounter where the faster inner orbiter runs into the slower outer moon, as shown schematically in Fig. 07.05 below. Due to their dimensions, both moons should now collide with each other. Instead, both moons swap their orbits without overtaking each other. The currently outer moon changes to the inner orbit, while at the same time the moon changes from the inner orbit to the outer orbit. This manoeuvre takes a hundred days, and they never come closer than 15,000 km* from each other. This process is unique in the solar system. 

 

The following text in italics is translated from German Wikipedia. 

Janus is coorbital with the moon Epimetheus, which means that the two moons orbit Saturn on almost identical paths. Their mean distances from the planet differ by only 50 kilometres, which is less than the diameter of both moons. About every four years, the two moons come into close contact with each other, influencing each other through their gravity. According to Kepler's laws, the inner moon, whose orbit is faster by a total of 28.1 seconds (1/4 degree per day), is accelerated and moves to a higher orbit, which in turn slows it down. The outer moon is slowed down, moves to a lower orbit and is thus accelerated. In this way, Janus and Epimetheus swap their orbits during this process, which lasts around 100 days, but do not overtake each other and never come closer than around 15,000 kilometres.16] As Janus has four times the mass of Epimetheus, it always has to bear around 20 % of the total orbital change. The orbital relationship of the two moons can be understood in the context of the three-body problem, in which case the two moons are of similar size; the third body is Saturn.

Note: However, this article is marked with the note that it is not equipped with sufficient evidence and is therefore still being edited. Obviously the authors find it difficult to explain this process with the usual celestial mechanics. He continue: 

 

I don't like the wording: "The inner moon is accelerated and moves to a higher orbit, which in turn decelerates it". How should the rear moon be slowed down in the higher orbit? It is rather the case that the now outer moon, although it has been accelerated, needs more time for the now larger orbit than the now inner moon, which has been decelerated, for its now smaller orbit. The paradox is that the moon with the higher tangential speed at the time of the encounter nevertheless has the longer orbital period afterwards. Simply because the distance it now has to cover has increased even more than its speed. You should also not make the mistake of thinking in terms of concentric orbits. In circular orbits, a body must have a lower tangential velocity the further away it is from the centre body because of the centrifugal force. In elliptical orbits, however, the speed is not constant, so a body in a larger orbit can still have a greater speed at a certain point in the orbit than another body in a smaller orbit. But how should this be formulated in a generally understandable way? Sep. 2006 

 

I am not including the additional description of the so-called horseshoe orbit of the moons here, as in my opinion it does nothing to clarify the matter and, in case of doubt, only leads to even greater confusion. The last internal discussion post by the specialist authors dates from April 2017 and was updated in October 2019. 

 

Since their discovery in 1966, scientists have been endeavouring to find a plausible explanation for the movements of Janus and Epimetheus. For many experts, this previous official explanation is sufficient and may amaze a layperson. Obviously, science accepts a paradox rather than questioning why nature acts in this way. 

 

A paradox always occurs when the result of a natural process is different from what science, with its self-proclaimed laws of physics, would have us believe. 

 

As with Jupiter with its Trojans and Greeks, an attempt is made here to justify the motion sequences with the help of the mathematical three-body problem, which is exclusively a topic of celestial mechanics and ultimately provides no real results apart from the Sundman solution with 10^8,000,000 terms. I cannot imagine that the vanishingly small masses of Janus and Epimetheus compared to Saturn (mass ratio Saturn-Janus approx. 1:300,000,000) cause any measurable interaction that causes this unusual orbital exchange of the two moons. The increase in speed of 28 seconds from outer to inner orbit per orbit corresponds exactly to the characteristics of a potential vortex, for the calculation of which absolutely no mathematical two- or three-body problem solutions are required. 

 

The famous apple fell at Newton's feet with 9.81 m/s^2 . If this had happened on the moon, the legendary apple would have fallen in slow motion at 1.62 m/s^2 because the Moon has about 1/83 of the Earth's mass. Janus has only about 0.0026 per cent** of the Moon's mass. There, the apple would land gently on its surface with a fall speed of 0.0137 m/s^2**. And yet, according to current physics theory, these weak gravitational forces of Janus and Epimetheus shall be responsible for their lane change? 

 

The described evasive manoeuvre of the two moons probably begins much earlier than this 15,000 km safety distance. I suspect that this is the case from a distance of around 100,000 kilometres, because all movements in the universe are fluid with smooth transitions. At this distance, the gravitational effect of the two moons on each other should certainly be zero. And if gravitational forces do play a role, why do they stop at a distance of 15,000 kilometres from each other? 

 

Saturn, with a mass of 5.6853E+26 kg* and a gravitational pull of 4.0757E+19 N kg∙m/s^2**, is over twelve times stronger than Janus' centripetal force of 3.1738E+18 N kg∙m/s^2** and 46 times higher than that of Epimetheus with 8.8042E+17 N kg∙m/s^2**. Given the large differences in forces between the planet and these two moons, they should have crashed into Saturn a long time ago if we follow the celestial principle: gravitational force equals centripetal force. 

* Wikipedia; ** author's own calculations

 

And one more thing: both moons orbit Saturn at the same speed on both orbits, whose radius differences are only 50 kilometres. Janus has 3.6 times more mass than Epimetheus. According to celestial mechanics, either the lighter of the two should be attracted to Saturn or the heavier moon should fly off into space. And – despite their large difference in mass, both moons are travelling 28 seconds faster per orbit on the inner orbit than on the outer orbit. 

 

The orbit and radius that Epimetheus' trajectory should theoretically take according to celestial mechanics can be calculated as follows. Saturn has a mass of 5.6853E+26 kg*. This results in a gravitational acceleration on its surface of 11.55 m/s^2* (see the derivation of the formula and Calculating the gravitational acceleration of the Earth). 

 

First calculate Saturn's gravitational pull using Janus as the reference object and the formula

The force of attraction between Saturn and Janus is therefore 3.1626E+18 N kg·m/s^2. By converting the formula to r you get

According to celestial mathematics, Epimetheus' orbit would have a radius of 79,773 kilometres, i.e. about half of his actual orbit. This has absolutely nothing to do with gravitational force = centripetal force, according to Newton's law of gravity. Rather, the moons, like Saturn, drift purely passively in a huge vortex system that resembles a potential vortex, in which the rotational speed increases from the outside inwards as the radius decreases, both in terms of absolute and angular velocity 3]. In view of the difference in radius of 50 km, this can be seen in the 28 seconds that a moon is travelling faster on the inner orbit per lap, and it is completely irrelevant how large or massive the respective celestial body, moon or planet is, or which apparent centrifugal or centripetal forces are supposed to be present. See also the diagram 04.09 above Gravitation of the Sun and the centripetal forces of the planets. 

 

Dione, Helene and Polydeuces 

This trio shows the forces at work even more clearly. The three moons orbit Saturn at a radius of 377,400 km* and at the same speed of 36,081 km/h* each. The larger moon Dione (1984*, Ø 1,125 km) has a mass of 1.0960E+21 kg*. It is preceded by Helene (1980*, Ø 33 km) at an angle of 60 degrees to Lagrange point L4 with a mass of 1.1000E+16 kg* and Polydeuces, the smaller moon, follows Dione at an angle of 60 degrees to L5 (2004**, Ø 2.6 km) with a mass of 4.4960E+13 kg*. Their mass ratios are approximately 1:34:433*** and therefore, as with Janus and Epimetheus, they would have to complete their orbits on radii of very different sizes. 

 

As with Jupiter and its Trojans in the previous chapter, this is a clear indication that the law of gravity is based on completely false assumptions and is ultimately proof that the assumed masses and the forces derived from them play no role at all in celestial mechanics, and that over millions of kilometres and light years. 

* Wikipedia; ** Year of discovery  *** author's own calculations

 

08 Cosmic Velocities

Cosmic or escape velocities are certain velocity values that are of particular importance in space travel and result from the physical conditions of the Earth and celestial mechanics. An example of this would be a stone thrown horizontally at the first cosmic speed, which no longer falls back to Earth but flies around the Earth on a circular path. However, this is practically impossible due to the high air resistance on the Earth's surface. 

 

The ISS space station (Fig. 08.01) requires at least the first cosmic velocity v1 in order to remain motionless in an orbit r at an altitude of 370 km without falling back to the Earth's surface. 

 

The Earth's gravitational force FG acts as a centripetal force FZ, which forces the spacecraft into a circular orbit.

 


 

According to Wikipedia, the ISS space station needs 93 minutes for one orbit, which corresponds almost exactly to this result of the speed of v1 = 7,686 m/s. 

 

The same applies, for example, to GOES I, a geostationary weather satellite orbiting the Earth at an altitude of r 35,786 km, see computer simulation in Fig. 08.02.

It is noticeable that the masses of the spacecraft play no role at all in these calculations, or are simply shortened out. A much lighter space capsule weighing only around one tonne docking with the 420 tonne object is subject to the same physical conditions as the ISS space station itself. Docking would not be possible at all due to the large difference in mass and the resulting difference in centripetal forces. But near the Earth, where gravity is actually at work, its masses (according to conventional wisdom) are simply too small in relation to the Earth's mass to have any practical effect. The true physical causes of gravity are described in chapter 16 The Nature of Gravity.

 

For comparison: the calculation of the orbital velocity vm of the much more massive Moon (Fig. 08.03). Here, too, the gravitational force of the Earth FG should act as a centripetal force FC, which forces the flying object (Moon) into a circular orbit r.

This result corresponds to the official data. By converting the formula to mE, the mass of the Earth can also be calculated using the velocity and orbit of the GOES I weather satellite (data overleaf):

The mass of the Earth can also be determined using data from the ISS space station. The masses of the moonless planets Mercury and Venus were calculated in this way when research satellites were sent to them in the 1960s. 

The Parker Solar Probe space probe is currently travelling to the Sun. See photo montage 08.04 above. On its mission, which will last around seven years, it will fly around the Sun 25 times, approaching its surface to within 6 million kilometres* and flying through its corona. See the elliptical flight path in the illustration below. The calculated course provides for seven swing-by manoeuvres with Venus in order to gradually reduce the speed of the probe to gradually approach the Sun. 

 

At the peak of closest approach (periphelion), the probe reaches a speed of up to 200 km/s*. This corresponds to around 720,000 km/h*. In doing so, the probe develops a centripetal force of around 4,566 N kg∙m/s^2**. The furthest point from the Sun (aphelion) is at a distance of approximately 110 million kilometres* from the Sun. Parker Solar Probe needs 88 days* for one orbit of the last three circles. This corresponds exactly to the time and escape velocity of Mercury on its orbit with a radius of 58 million kilometres*, which it needs for one orbit around the Sun. 

 

In fact, the probe's course is much more stretched. During an orbit of 88 days, the entire solar system continued to rotate. Earth by approx. 90 degrees**, Venus by 140 degrees** and Mercury by 360 degrees**. Due to the swing-by manoeuvres with Venus, the real course should therefore look much more garland-shaped than shown in Fig. 08.04 below. Calculation of the average radius of Parker Solar Probe's orbit: 

According to the laws of the heavens, the result corresponds exactly to Mercury's orbit. In this orbit, Parker Solar Probe would have an average centripetal force of only 26.47 N kg∙m/s^2**, see calculation.

For comparison: Mercury has 12,788,000,000,000,000,000,000 or 1.2788E+22 N kg∙m/s^2**. 

 

Mathematically, these correct results correspond absolutely to celestial maths, and yet are no proof of the real conditions. Since the respective formulae already contain the values we are looking for, this calculating in circles, i.e. rearranging the formulae according to the values we are looking for, is completely worthless. 

 

The ISS space station at an altitude of 370 km*** requires purely mathematically a gravitational pull of the Earth of 3,676,539 N kg∙m/s^2** (centripetal force) to force it into its orbit, the GOES I satellite at an altitude of 35,786 km*** requires only 336 N kg∙m/s^2**, i.e. almost nothing, and the Moon at a distance of 384,400 km*** requires 194,929,471,802,239,000,000 N kg∙m/s^2** due to its comparatively huge mass. 

 

Since, according to the law of gravity, the gravitational pull of the Earth (or planet) increases exponentially towards its centre and decreases with increasing radius, this is a physical impossibility! This also applies to the centripetal forces of all planets in the solar system, as already shown in the tables of chapter 04 Celestial Maths.

 

Just as the solar system is a huge ether-vortex system in which all the planets are embedded with their own vortex systems, the Earth with the Moon is also a vortex system that drifts purely passively within it, almost without any gravitational or centripetal forces. 

Regardless of their size and weight, the ISS station, satellite and Moon (also Janus, Epimetheus, Dione, Helene and Polydeuces) are subject to the same conditions of (ether) space pressure, which shakes their atoms from the outside. This is the only reason why repair work is even possible due to the large difference in mass between the ISS (approx. 440 tonnes*, FC = 3,676,539 N kg∙m/s^2***) and the astronaut (incl. spacesuit approx. 210 kg****, FC = 1,838 N kg∙m/s^2***) as shown in Fig. 08.05. The lighter astronaut, with a centripetal force 2,000 times lower than that of the ISS station, would have to be instantly attracted to the Earth. The experts explain this fact by saying that the tiny masses of the ISS station and astronaut have absolutely no effect compared to the strong gravitational force of the Earth. 

 

However, the extreme differences in mass between the Sun, Mercury and Solar Probe cannot be ignored. According to current theory, the Sun's gravitational pull is approx. 2.8 times stronger than Mercury's centripetal force of 1.2788E+22 N kg∙m/s^2**. And Solar Probe's average centripetal force of only 26.47 N kg∙m/s^2** on Mercury's orbit clearly proves that truncating the masses of the test objects follows mathematical logic, but not reality. Attractive forces in relation to any (Earth or solar) masses therefore play no role whatsoever. 

The reasons for this include the following: Towards the Earth, the ether behaves somewhat more conformal to its internal movements and therefore the pressure from below is somewhat weaker than that from above. The difference results in the radial thrust of gravity. The structure of the free ether changes only marginally, but increasingly towards the Earth. This results in the relatively weak force of gravity, which is maximum at the Earth's surface and barely perceptible above the magnetosphere. This is described later in Chapter 16 The Nature of Gravity. 

 

Like the double and multiple star systems (Chapter 02), the Sun also has a much smaller mass and gravitational pull than is assumed. This is proven by the time-lapse recordings of its flares, which in reality hang around in space for days or weeks before slowly sinking back to the surface of the Sun. And the close flights of the Parker Solar Probe with its average centripetal force of just 26.47 N kg∙m/s^2** should be proof that all previous assumptions about the Sun's gravity and the laws derived from it are completely wrong.

* Wikipedia;  

** author's own calculations; 

*** Calculations in each case Earth radius r = 6,378 km plus ISS space station altitude r = 370 km; 

**** Estimate

09 Galaxies

Fig. 09.01 shows the Andromeda galaxy, also known as Messier 31. It is around 2.5 million light years (LY) away from the Milky Way. Its diameter is about 140,000 LY and its halo extends over one million LY 27]. Around 500 globular star clusters rotate around the centre. 23] As deviations between calculated and observed rotation in the galaxy have been found in relation to Newtonian dynamics, a type of dark matter is assumed, although it is completely unclear what dark matter actually is. In addition, a black hole of around 100 million solar masses is suspected in the centre and traces of a past collision with another galaxy are believed to have been found. 28] 

Irregular Galaxies

The Magellanic Clouds are two irregular dwarf galaxies in relative proximity to the Milky Way, see Fig. 09.02 above. They are counted as part of the Milky Way subgroup, but may not be gravitationally bound to the galaxy. 32] The Large Magellanic Cloud at a distance of around 163,000 light years contains around 15 billion stars, while the Small Magellanic Cloud (Fig. 09.02 below) at a distance of around 200,000 light years contains around 5 billion. 33] 

 

The Large Magellanic Cloud lies in the constellations Swordfish and Table Mountain, the Small Magellanic Cloud in the constellation Toucan on the border with the Small Water Snake, both in the southern sky. They are not visible from Central Europe. The inhabitants of the southern hemisphere have probably been aware of the two galaxies since prehistoric times by observations with the naked eye, but they were first recorded by the Persian astronomer Al Sufi in his Book of Fixed Stars in 964. 

 

Until then, astronomers thought that these two galaxies were satellite systems orbiting our Milky Way. In 2010, a group of astronomers led by Gurtina Besla and Nitya Kallivayalil from the Harvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics in Cambridge, USA, came to the surprising conclusion that the two clouds arrived one to three billion years ago and are in a sense only passing through. This view is based on the fact that, according to observations with the Hubble Space Telescope, the two star systems are moving considerably faster than previously assumed. 

 

According to the researchers, this leaves only two possible explanations: Either the Milky Way is significantly more massive than thought, so that it can bind the fast star systems to itself. However, this would contradict other observations. Or the Magellanic Clouds are not bound to the Milky Way and just happen to be in its neighbourhood.

This raises a new problem: The two galaxies are trailing a long tail of hydrogen gas behind them. Until now, astronomers believed that this Magellanic stream had detached itself from the star systems as they travelled through the Milky Way. According to astronomers, however, this never happened. 38] 

 

Irregular galaxies have neither clear structures nor a clear plane of symmetry and accordingly lack spiral arms like spiral galaxies. They also have no shape like elliptical galaxies and lack a galaxy centre. Instead, they have several, irregularly distributed smaller condensations. They therefore do not fit into the Hubble sequence, but form a special class, which is abbreviated as Ir (irregular) or Irr.

 

These galaxies have much less mass (between 700 million and 130 billion solar masses 34]) and a significantly lower gravitational field than regular galaxies; they are also fainter on average. Irregular galaxies make up about 4 per cent of all galaxies. 35] 

 

They contain a lot of gas, dust and young stars, which are very irregularly distributed. Most older stars are often distributed in a more regular, flattened structure and rotate as in spiral galaxies. 

NGC 1569 (Fig. 09.03) is an irregular dwarf galaxy in the constellation Giraffe in the northern starry sky, which is estimated to be 1 million LY away from the Milky Way and was discovered in 1788 by the German-British astronomer William Herschel. 37] It is classified as a starburst galaxy and a Seyfert galaxy. This galaxy belongs to the class of galaxies with irregularities, absorption and resolution. 

 

A distance measurement based on Hubble Space Telescope data from 2007 led to a correction of the distance by about 4 million LY and showed that NGC 1569 is a member of a group of ten galaxies around IC 342 (Maffei group). The gravitational interaction with the other members of the group is considered to be the trigger for the starburst. 36] 

 

Since scientists believe that the entire universe is connected by mass attraction, it is all the more astonishing that the possibility is mentioned here that the Magellanic Clouds are not gravitationally connected to the Milky Way. This is also an indication that the previous world model cannot be credible. Instead, these galaxies are referred to as irregular because they do not fit into the current concept of celestial mechanics, or simply because there is no plausible explanation for them; moreover, these galaxies would have to collapse due to the laws of gravity, as there is no rotation or hardly any or no dynamics at all around a galaxy centre in order to balance out any mass attraction forces through centrifugal or centripetal forces. 

Estimates of their mass are also extremely vague. There ain't any moons or satellites around celestial bodies that could be used to calculate the masses of stars if Newtonian mathematics were correct. The masses of stars are estimated on the basis of their brightness and number and compared with the (supposedly incorrect) known mass of the Sun. Completely disregarded are undiscovered planets, whose existence can only be speculated about. 

 

The example of the distance of galaxy NGC 1569 to the Milky Way shows how far apart the measurements can be, see above. 

 

Source: Hubble Space Telescope

Spiral Galaxies 

Fig. 09.04 at A shows NGC 5194/5195 or the spiral galaxy known as Messier 51 in the constellation of the Hunting Dogs. The distance to the Milky Way is about 25 million LY. Deviating distance measurements give distances of between 15 and 37 million LY. 

 

B is the double spiral galaxy NGC 5427 in the constellation Virgo in the northern starry sky. It is estimated to be 114 million LY away from the Milky Way. 

 

C are the galaxies NGC 4676 in the constellation Coma Berenices, which are about 296 million LY away from the Milky Way. The scientists surmised that the two galaxies collided about 150 million years ago and will merge into an elliptical galaxy in about 400 million years. 

 

D are the barred spiral galaxies NGC 5257 and NGC 5258 in the constellation Virgo. They are about 302 million LY away from the Milky Way. 

 

E is Arp 273, a pair of interacting galaxies in the constellation Andromeda, which is estimated to be 340 million LY away from the Milky Way.

Globular Clusters 

are collections of many stars in which the stellar density shows a spherically symmetrical distribution, decreasing equally in all directions from the centre, where the stars are very close together, to the edge. Around 150 are known in the Milky Way's halo* 21] and it is estimated that many are still undiscovered. 22] The Milky Way's halo* has a diameter of approximately 165,000 light years (50 kpc). Despite these huge distances, the prevailing opinion is that these globular clusters are gravitationally bound to the galaxies orbiting them. 

 

Fig. 09.05 shows, for example, the centre of the globular cluster Messier 22 (M22) as observed by the NASA/ESA Hubble Space Telescope. It is estimated to be 12 to 13 billion years old. This is very old, considering that the universe is only 13.8 billion years old.

 

Messier 22 has a diameter of around 70 light years and is also one of the closest to Earth at a distance of only 10,000 light years. It was discovered by Abraham Ihle in 1665, becoming it one of the first globular clusters ever discovered. This is not very surprising as it is one of the brightest globular clusters visible from the northern hemisphere, in the constellation Sagittarius, near the Galactic Bulge – the dense mass of stars at the centre of the Milky Way. 

Normally, chaotic movements take place in globular clusters. In other words, no rotations on orbits as a counterpart to any mass attraction forces in the centre. In view of this, all globular clusters would have to collapse. This fact alone is also an indication that the interpretation of Newton's observation of the functioning of our solar system and his conclusion on the law of gravity with its universe-wide validity does not correspond to reality. 

 

Although globular clusters are extremely stable objects by cosmic standards, they are said to become star-poor over time, become smaller and smaller and eventually disintegrate – at least that is what science assumes.30] 

 

The enormous density in the centres of globular clusters is said to ensure that every now and then a star is literally kicked out of the cluster. This is said to happen when two stars approach each other in such a way that, due to their strong gravitational effect, the speed of one star increases accordingly, so that it finally leaves the cluster catapult-like. 

 

Since M22 is supposed to be almost as old as the universe itself, I consider this scientific hypothesis to be absolutely wrong. 

 

Nevertheless six planet-sized objects that do not orbit a star have been discovered in Messier 22. Therefore, two black holes are suspected at the centre, which was previously considered impossible for reasons of celestial mechanics and the movement patterns within globular clusters. Both non objects are said to have 10 to 20 solar masses each. 29] 

Another example is the globular cluster Messier 80 (NGC 6093), M 80 for short, see Fig. 09.06 above. It is located in the constellation of Scorpius south of the ecliptic. The cluster is around 33,000 light years away from the solar system (other sources estimate the distance to the Sun at 28,000 light years) and has a maximum diameter of just under 90 light years. Its distance from the galactic centre is 12,500 LY. It orbits the Milky Way system on a highly inclined path. One orbit takes about 70 million years. Its age is estimated at 13 billion years. 31] 

 

The mass density in the centre is around 5.7 solar masses per cubic parsec**. This makes M 80 one of the densest globular clusters in the Milky Way. It consists of around 100,000 stars. 20] M 80 is relatively easy to find in the night sky as it is not far from the bright stars Antares and Delta Scorpii. 

 

The halos of giant elliptical galaxies such as Messier 87 (Fig. 09.06 below) can even contain 10,000 globular clusters. 24] These orbit the galaxy at a distance of 40 kiloparsecs (around 131,000 light years) or more. 25] 

* The halo (from the ancient Greek ἅλως hálōs halo) of a galaxy is an approximately spherical area that is larger than the galaxy itself and in its centre the galaxy is embedded.

** 1 parsec (pc = parallax second) corresponds to about 3.26 light years or 206,000 astronomical units (1 AU = 150 million km) or about 3.09E+16 metres (30.9 trillion kilometres).

10 Black Holes

The history of black holes is directly linked to the question of whether light has mass or, in other words, whether light can be influenced by gravity like a particle of matter. In the 17th century, the nature of light was disputed. According to Newton, it is particle like, whereas according to Huygens it is wave-like and without mass. Since both the finite speed of light and the concept of escape velocity (the speed limit at which an object breaks free from the gravitational force of a body) are known, the idea of particle-like light (possibly endowed with mass) leads to a body that is so massive that the escape velocity is higher than the speed of light. In this context, black holes can be seen as a typical example of a paradox where a theory reaches its limits. 

 

In 1783, the Reverend John Michell, an English geologist and amateur astronomer, explained in an article sent to the Royal Society the concept of a body so massive that even light cannot escape. He writes in his article: 39] 

 

If the semi-diameter of a sphere of the same density of the Sun exceeded that of the Sun in the proportion of 500 to 1, a body descending to it from an infinite height would have attained a greater velocity at its surface than the light, and consequently, supposing light to be attracted to other bodies by the same force in proportion to its inertia, all light emitted from such a body would be made to return to it by its own gravity. 

 

He declared that these bodies, though invisible, must produce detectable gravitational effects: 

If from the motions of these rotating bodies another luminous body revolved round them, we might still be able to infer with some probability the existence of the central body; this might also give us a clue to some of the irregularities of the rotating bodies which could not be easily explained by any other hypothesis. Michell's very abstract hypothesis received no response at the time. 

 

It was not until 1796 that the mathematician, philosopher and astronomer Marquis Pierre-Simon de Laplace, who was passionate about celestial mechanics and gravitation, rediscovered this idea. In his book Exposition du System du Monde he wrote: 40] 

 

A luminous star of the same density as the Earth, with a diameter 250 times that of the Sun, would not emit any of its rays towards us because of its gravitational pull. It is therefore possible that the largest luminous bodies in the universe are invisible due to this cause. 

 

He presented his thesis to the audience of the Academy of Sciences, but the physicists remained sceptical about the existence of such an object. Thus the concept of the black hole was born, but Laplace's mathematical demonstration seemed too fanciful to astronomers. Moreover, the experiments of Young and Fresnel led physicists to reject the particle nature of light in the first half of the 19th century. Laplace stopped including this notion of the black hole from the third edition of his book Exposition du system du Monde. 

 

The concept of the black hole remained silent for more than a century. It only reappeared in the 20th century when Albert Einstein published his general theory of relativity.

 

The Search for Gravity Monsters 

After black holes were encountered more or less by chance just a few decades ago, nowadays, thanks to improved technology, black holes are suspected in almost all centres of galaxies. In addition, the huge telescopes are increasingly picking up radio radiation from these directions, which confirms the astronomers' assumptions. Where there are a large number of celestial bodies in one place, there is of course radio radiation, which also overlaps several times. For example, it is not only our Sun that emits strong radiation, but also planets and other celestial bodies. Obviously, their (equalising) ether-movements with their free environment (universe) cause electromagnetic waves that astronomers can receive with their sensitive, globally networked telescopes. 

 

Some of the most common methods believed to to detect black holes are described below. 

 

Kinematic Detection 

The orbits and speed of the stars orbiting a supposed black hole (centre) are used as evidence. Just as, for example, the mass of the Earth has been calculated using the Moon or the Sun. If an extremely high mass is calculated, it is reasonable to assume that it is a black hole. 

 

The measurement of the orbit of the star S2, which orbits the black hole Sgr A* in the centre of our Milky Way on a Kepler orbit, allowed very precise statements to be made about the mass concentration in the central area. See following calculation. Another kinematic method determines the Doppler shift and the distance between the dark object and the star orbiting it, from which the gravitational redshift and then the mass can be estimated. 54] 

 

Eruptive Detection 

Stars that come too close to the tidal radius of a black hole should be torn apart by the tidal forces that occur, releasing characteristic X-rays that can be detected by devices such as the Nuclear Spectroscopic Telescope Array. 

 

Aberrative Detection 

Black holes have the property of deflecting or focussing electromagnetic radiation, which should make it possible to identify them. For example, if the shape of a star's elliptical orbit appears distorted, it is reasonable to assume that a black hole is present between the observer and the star. 54] 

 

Obscurative Detection

The gravitational redshift allows a black colouration to be detected at the edge of the black holes, as the relativistic radiation near the event horizon is suppressed so that a black hole becomes recognisable. 54] 

 

Temporal Detection 

The temporal distortion (known as time dilation) that a black hole triggers in objects orbiting it or in its vicinity (which can be recognised by analysing the light curves) should make it possible to identify a black hole. 54] 

 

Spectroscopy 

Lensing effects and gravitational shifts are said to distort the spectra of stars when they are in the vicinity of black holes. 54] 

 

Gravitational Waves 

Accelerated black holes or mergers of two black holes are said to cause ripples in space-time that can be measured with gravitational wave detectors such as LIGO. The observations of gravitational waves from the collision of two smaller black holes, each with 29 and 36 solar masses, presented by LIGO in 2016 were supposedly the first direct evidence of gravitational waves. 

 

Radio Telescope Images with VLBI 

With Very Long Baseline Interferometry (VLBI), radio telescopes can achieve a resolution comparable to the radius of a black hole. The Event Horizon Telescope project has thus succeeded in recording images of the accretion flows around the supermassive black hole M87 at the centre of the Messier 87 galaxy, providing the first direct images of the black hole's surroundings. When in April 2019 the results of an coordinated action of April 2017 were published, it was a scientific sensation that made it onto the cover of many international journals like the german news magazine Spiegel, for example. 55] See lead picture of this site. 

 

Due to gravitational and relativistic effects, the accretion flows and images of the heated gases in the vicinity of the black hole appear as a ring that surrounds a dark area – the so-called shadow of the black hole. The shadow is an enlarged image of the area bounded by the event horizon due to the gravitational lensing effect. On a linear scale, it is up to five times larger than the event horizon and is limited by the photon orbit on which light circulates around the black hole and either disappears in the black hole or penetrates outwards in the event of small disturbances, 56] according to the experts' conception and interpretation. 

 

The images allow conclusions to be drawn about the mass and rotation of the black hole through comparison with computer simulations, but not yet about its angular momentum. 57] According to the current state of technology, only the shadow of the supermassive black holes in M87 and Sagittarius A* in the centre of the Milky Way is so large that they can be observed with the Event Horizon Telescope (EHT). 

Galaxy Messier 87 

Fig. 10.01 above shows an infrared image of the giant elliptical galaxy Messier 87, about 55 million light years away, near the centre of the Virgo galaxy cluster, taken by NASA's Spitzer Space Telescopes. The mass of M87 is thought to be around 2 to 3 trillion solar masses within a radius of 100,000 LY. 

 

Although there is no rotation in M87 like in a spiral galaxy, a black hole was allegedly discovered in its centre in April 2019, from which a high-energy jet at least 5,000 light years long is ejected, which can be observed at various wavelengths 46], see Fig. 10.01 centre. Measurements have allegedly shown that the flow velocity of the matter in this jet is four to five times the speed of light. 52] 53] 

 

However, this raises new questions about the current physical world model. Without a medium that allows this, these speeds would be inconceivable. Even today, the speed of light is considered to be the maximum of all things. But even at CERN, particles are already being accelerated to faster than light speeds in crash tests, as a German TV news channel mentioned in a subordinate clause a few years ago. 

 

This black hole is said to have a mass of 6.5 billion solar masses. 45] For the first time, scientists have succeeded in visualising this black hole, or what they believe it to be, in an image calculated from radio images taken by the Event Horizon Telescope, a combination of several telescopes around the world, see Fig. 10.01 below. 

 

The donut shape is said to be formed by the black hole being surrounded by a rotating accretion disk of ionised gas, which is said to be perpendicular to the giant jet flowing from the core of the galaxy. The gas in the disc is said to move at speeds of up to about 1,000 km/s 51] and is eventually accreted (collected) by the black hole. The dark area in the centre of the image, which is surrounded by luminous areas, is the so-called shadow of the black hole. It is about 2.5 times as large as the event horizon (= Schwarzschild diameter of approx. 38E+12 m) of the supermassive black hole in the centre. 44] It should also show good agreement with the simulations based on the general theory of relativity. 

 

Of great interest to me is the fact that we are talking about a disc here, although the enormous gravity should theoretically act from all sides. There are also problems explaining the 5,000 LY long, axial jet, which doesn't really fit in with a black hole that supposedly swallows everything and from which there is no escape. And another paradox: there is no evidence of the rotation of celestial bodies as a counterpart to gravity in the centre of this galaxy. 

Galaxy Messier 51 

In contrast to Messier 87, Messier 51 is a whirlpool or spiral galaxy in the constellation of the Hunting Dogs, similar to our Milky Way, see infrared image in Fig. 10.02 above. There is also said to be a supermassive black hole at its centre. The distance from us is about 25 million LY. However, there are also differing estimates of between 15 and 37 million LY. M51 has a nearby, allegedly interacting companion galaxy of the irregular type. 

 

Fig. 10.02 below shows the above image as an X-ray image of M51 taken by the Chandra satellite, which is very similar to the image of the black hole of M87 (Fig. 10.01 below). However, both images are not photographic long-exposure images of any light pulses, but data points of electromagnetic waves or radiation rendered together to form an image, which the respective sensors of the telescopes have filtered out and recorded. 

 

M51 is said to have a very active galactic nucleus, also known as AGN (Active Galactic Nucleus). It is approximately the size of the solar system and appears dot-shaped on images – similar to stars. Scientists assume that the accretion (collection) of matter by the black hole in the centre is responsible for the release of energy and radiation of non-stellar origin.

Sagittarius A* 

Sgr A* (Sagittarius A star) is thought to be a super massive black hole in the centre of the Milky Way, see X-ray image Fig. 10.03 above. This is accompanied at a distance of three LY by the medium-sized black hole IRS13 with 1,300 solar masses (Mʘ). This is a group of seven stars that revolve around a common centre of gravity. 

 

A team of astronomers has been observing the surroundings of Sgr A* since 1992. The orbits and velocities of 28 stars have been measured, see simulation Fig. 10.03 centre. This alone is a technical masterpiece, as the centre of the Milky Way is not visible from Earth due to the high density of stars and dust. Near-infrared cameras with adaptive optics at the Very Large Telescope in Cerro Paranal in Chile, the imaging spectrograph Sinfoni, the speckle imaging camera SHARP I and other instruments from the European Southern Observatory (eso) were used to analyse the electromagnetic waves and radiation. Observations from the Keck telescope in Hawaii, the New Technology Telescope and images from the Hubble telescope were also analysed. 43] 

 

The investigations suggested that the central mass can only be explained by a black hole and that around 95% of the total mass in the observed sector must be located in this black hole. The measurement of the infrared and X-ray emission in the accretion zone indicates that this black hole allegedly has a high angular momentum. 41] 

 

The powerful radio source Sagittarius A* in the centre of the Milky Way is said to be a supermassive black hole of 4.3 million solar masses. 42] A few years ago, its mass was estimated to be around 2.7 million solar masses. Thanks to highly sensitive telescopes, the mass at the centre of the galaxy could be specified more precisely by observing and analysing the orbit of the star S-2 from 1992 to 2008. See Fig. 10.03 below. Using this data, the mass at the centre could be determined according to Kepler's third law. 

 

Calculation of the Mass of Sgr A* 58]

Since the observation took place at an oblique angle to the object, the true size of the orbit of the star S-2 had to be determined first. The known data are:

The mass of the black hole is approximately 3,736,500 solar masses. In the official press releases of the European Southern Observatory eso1332de and eso1512de as well as the Max Planck Society of 24 November 2014, Sagittarius A* is specified with approx. 4 million solar masses. 

 

The size of this so-called non-rotating and non-electrically charged black hole with its event horizon is calculated according to the formula of the German physicist and astronomer Karl Schwarzschild (1873-1916) as follows.

According to this, the Schwarzschild radius, or the event horizon of Sagittarius A* with 3.7346E+06 Mʘ should be approx. 11,013,898 km, see Fig. 10.04. 

 

In comparison: The Sun has an equatorial diameter of about 1,392,684* km. If, according to official theory, its mass was compressed into a sphere with a radius of only three kilometres, then no ray of light could reach the outside from its surface. The mass of the Earth (r ≈ 6,378 km) would only form a black hole at a radius of less than one centimetre. 

 

Singularity* 

In physics and astronomy, a singularity is a place where gravity is so strong that the curvature of space-time diverges, i.e. is infinite. This means that the metric of space-time also diverges at these locations and the singularity is not part of space-time. Physical quantities such as mass density, for the calculation of which the metric is required, are not defined there. 

 

According to ART, there are singularities in space-time under very general conditions, as Stephen Hawking and Roger Penrose showed in the 1960s (singularity theorem). The singularities can be formulated mathematically and depend on special mass values M, angular momentum J or other parameters, among other things. The physical law in question for the limit value r –> rc, where rc is a critical parameter value, is not defined, invalid and unsuitable for describing the conditions. Singularities can be point-like, i.e. infinitely small, or non-point-like, in which case spacetime curves around the object to such an extent that size specifications cannot be set in a meaningful relationship to the metric of the surrounding space.

 

It is assumed that singularities reveal the limits of the general theory of relativity and that a different model (e.g. quantum gravity) must be used to describe them.

Black holes are also described by scientists using three physical parameters: 

  • mass (Schwarzschild metric), 
  • angular momentum (Kerr metric) and 
  • electric charge (Reissner-Nordström metric).

 

The multipole moments are omitted and four further distinctions are made. 
Black holes

  • without electric charge and without rotation
  • without electric charge and rotation
  • with electric charge and without rotation with electric charge and rotation.

 

The No-Hair Theorem and the Information Paradox of Black Holes* 

A uniqueness theorem by Werner Israel states that a black hole is completely characterised by mass (see Schwarzschild metric), electric charge (see Reissner-Nordström metric) and angular momentum (see Kerr metric). This prompted John Archibald Wheeler to say: Black holes have no hair. This is why it is referred to as the no-hair theorem or Glatz theorem. Further information from the interior cannot be obtained, not even through Hawking radiation, as it is purely thermal. 

 

The no-hair theorem suggests that black holes cause a loss of information, as the Hawking radiation produced during their dissolution contains no information about the history of the black hole's formation. The disappearance of information contradicts a fundamental principle of quantum mechanics, the postulate of the unitarity of time evolution. The problem is also known as the information paradox of black holes.

 * Wikipedia

Gas Cloud G2 

During their long-term observations of the supermassive black hole Sgr A*, astronomers were surprised to discover a gas cloud that should come very close to the centre of Sgr A* on its orbit. Fig. 10.05 shows the scenario, as the researchers imagined the impending event, in several simulated sequences in an orbit calculated according to the laws of the heavens. 

 

A scale bar is shown in the images. The length of the bar is 10 LD, i.e. the distance travelled by the light in ten light days. For comparison: Sunlight takes about four hours and sixteen minutes to reach Neptune, the outermost planet in our solar system. Transferred to this scale, that would be about two tenths of a millimetre. 

 

This observation is a technical masterpiece that can only be achieved with the symphony instrument of the Very Large Telescope (VTL), the interconnectable optical, near-infrared and mid-infrared telescopes of the European Southern Observatory. This is because the centre of the Milky Way cannot be seen from Earth, as celestial bodies and stardust prevent a direct view. 

 

In the press release eso1332en of the European Southern Observatory from 17.07.2013, the researchers from the Max Planck Institute describe how the gas cloud G2, shown here as a fireball with a huge tail, would be drawn out like a spaghetti by the black hole's strong gravity during the critical phase of its passage (the closest possible approach, known as the peribothron or pericentre) between February and September 2014, with large parts of the gas cloud being swallowed up by the mass monster like a predator feeding. During the entire process of G2 approaching Sgr A*, a very strong increase in X-ray radiation from the centre was also predicted. 

To the great surprise of the researchers, however, the G2 gas cloud remained completely intact as it orbited the black hole, as the image from the Very Large Telescope (VLT) in Fig. 10.06 shows. The press release eso1512en from the 26th March 2015 states, among other things: 

 

The images in infrared light, originating from the luminous hydrogen, prove that the cloud was compact both before and after its closest approach to the black hole Sgr A*. 

 

The symphony instrument at the VLT not only provides very sharp images, it also splits the infrared light into its spectral colours and thus makes it possible to determine the speed of the cloud. It was discovered that the cloud was moving away from the Earth at around ten million kilometres per hour before its closest approach. After it had swung around the black hole, it moved towards the Earth at around twelve million kilometres per hour, according to measurements. 

 

The resistance of the dust cloud to the extreme gravitational tidal forces so close to the black hole strongly suggests that it is surrounding a dense object with a massive core rather than a loose, free-flying cloud. This theory is supported by the fact that there is no evidence so far that the monster in the centre is being fed with matter, as this would lead to brightening and increasing activity.

The team of scientists from the University of Cologne summarises the new results as follows: We have looked at the most recent data, especially those from the phase in 2014 when the closest approach to the black hole took place. We cannot confirm any significant expansion of the source. It is certainly not behaving like a coreless dust cloud. We assume that it is a young star enveloped in dust. – End of press release. 

 

These events clearly show that scientists' ideas about gravity do not correspond to reality. Instead, the formation of a star in the cloud is now being surmised in order to explain the processes according to conventional physics.

11 Galaxy Milky Way 1]

Ether and Dust 

All physical phenomena are vortices of ether within ether. Unfortunately, this only real existing substance is totally transparent. Movements can only be perceived on the basis of the entrained dust. Material dust grains are themselves vortex systems, but they emit light (or radiation) or can be recognised by reflections of light. The heat systems of the microcosm are too small or move too fast for direct perception. 

 

The whole universe is full of dust and some of these grains are gigantic in the form of planets or stars. Together they form the huge vortex systems of galaxies. In these, in turn, everything is in rapid motion; on the other hand, changes often only become apparent in eons. We have practically only still images from which we can deduce the processes in the sky. Below is an analysis of the celestial mechanics of our galaxy and the solar system, which provides a highly unusual view of the world. 

 

Figure 11.01 shows a photo of the Andromeda galaxy M31 with its bright centre and beautiful spiral arms, a typical phenomenon in the universe. It was assumed that our galaxy has got a similar structure. More recently an image of the Milky Way has been developed (see top right) that shows a bar in the centre. This type of barred spiral galaxy is also widespread, and it can be assumed that this form inevitably occurs during the development of a galaxy. 

 

For example, due to general space and radiation pressure, there is initially only a concentration of celestial bodies in the form of a globular cluster galaxy. As soon as a rotation (more realistically a round oscillation) occurs in it, this bar structure (as described below) results. Due to external influences – or internal explosions – this shape can later dissolve again or even be completely destroyed. 

 

This image below shows a side view of the Milky Way. The centre is formed by a dome shaped cluster of stars. The widely protruding disc is remarkably flat (ten times wider than it is high). This is the typical appearance of spiral galaxies. Of course, this image of the Milky Way cannot be a real photo, but was modelled by astronomers on the basis of a large amount of data. This image of our Milky Way is therefore presented of an extragalactic observer from a distance – the obvious question for us is how this system works.

Dynamics of the Bar 

In the centre, the stars are not evenly distributed, rather the bar seems to work like a rotating broom, picking up all the dirt. So there must be a corresponding oscillation of the ether. This movement pattern can be easily explained using the movement sequences shown in Fig. 11.02. 

 

In principle, two circular movements are superimposed. A clock with radius R1 (blue line) rotates clockwise around the central pivot point D1, always viewed from above, i.e. from the north pole of the galaxy (see blue dotted circle). At the end of the blue hand is the centre of rotation 2 (red), around which a second hand with radius R2 (red line) rotates. The outer clock rotates anti-clockwise twice as fast as the inner clock (see red dotted circle). 

The observed ether-point (AP, black) is located at the end of this second red pointer. In the starting position, both radii point to the left in a straight line, so that the ether-point is initially positioned further to the left. When the blue pointer rotates upwards by 45° (see upward curved arrow or at A), the red pointer simultaneously rotates downwards by 90° (see downward curved arrow). The new position of the ethr-point is above the point marked D2. 

 

If the blue pointer continues to rotate and then points upwards (after a total rotation of 90°), the red pointer points inwards (after a total rotation of 180°). The ether-point (at AP) is now relatively close to the centre. On the other sections there is a corresponding path. The observed ether-point moves at an ellipse-like track: centrally close to centre at a flat section and swinging aside far outward, there however running back again at a relative sharp bended apex (at B). 

 

So here are contrary movements effective. The wheels of this gear also do not rotate at the same speed, but at a ratio of 1:2. A different ratio results in interesting tracks, as shown in the centre line of this picture.

Normally, C would return to the stretched position. However, if the red pointer rotates too slowly (e.g. only 1:1.8), the stretched position is only reached later, e.g. as shown here at D. The apex shifts forwards in the direction of rotation (see arrow E) and moves further and further ahead of the original position (see arrow F). This results in a loop-shaped path, i.e. the entire bar is rotating. 

 

The bottom line of this illustration shows a special feature of this movement sequence. The positions of the ether-points are marked on the upper half of the orbit, which arise after the internal clock rotates by 22.5 degrees. The distance between the positions indicates the distance traveled per unit of time. There is an acceleration between the vertex and the point near the centre (see red arrows G). There is a corresponding delay from the flat section to the far outside (see gray arrows H).

 

At overlays of previous chapters in same direction, each phase of deceleration and phase of acceleration did exist. Fastest speed was achieved at wide stretching section of track and thus I called this movement a track-with-beat. Here, the superposition of opposing circular motions (and a gear ratio not equal to 1:1) results in two phases of acceleration and deceleration. Strangely enough, the slowest speed is always given at the apex points far outwards. 

 

This rotating sweeping broom pushes the dust at the forward-rotating side (at G) accelerated inwards – and pushes the dust along its rear side (backwards in the direction of rotation, i.e. at H) slowly outwards. As a result, the central space is swept away – although new dust is pushed in from the poles (or from above and below)

Oscillating Cones 

This gives the impression of rotation and the dust does indeed rotate. Ether as such is relative stationary and all times only swinging at more or less short radius. All ether is swinging within previous motion pattern, each ether-point (nearby) parallel to its neighbour, each around its own turning point. The dust all times is pushed only by the beats into a favoured direction, resulting the material rotation or flow. 

 

At picture 11.03 upside, longitudinal cross-sectional view through axis of Milky Way (M, red) is shown purely schematic. Ether of central bulge is swinging (by previous beam-movement pattern) and also at upside and downside surfaces of disc exist similar swinging motions. These circled swinging motions are reduced to smaller radius in direction of free ether. 

 

All neighbours on the vertical connecting lines move on a conical shell (see A). All neighbours in the horizontal plane oscillate on analogous cones parallel to them. This tapering of the oscillation also takes place in an analogue manner around the curve of the central dome. In this image, these cones (green) are shown schematically on the upper and lower surfaces of the Milky Way. The cones are of course drawn much too short here. The relationship between the radius of oscillation and the length of the cone will be at least 1:10,000, but the cone could also be a hundred times longer in reality.

 

In any case, the violent upward and downward oscillations within this potential vortex can be easily equalised. All external disturbances lead to inward wave impacts, i.e. the dust is washed onto the central surfaces from above and below. This effect is the only reason for the flat, compressed disc shape of spiral galaxies.

Sliding Disc 

Balancing in a horizontal plane, on the other hand, is problematic. The disc swings back and forward, as shown by double arrow B. Within gapless ether, theoretically this movement runs infinite far, i.e. all ether within this plane should swing synchronously. Free ether F (marked blue) of all environment however stands like an immovable, massive wall. So in this direction, central coarse swinging affects much further out and balancing to fine swinging of free ether must be done by other kind.

 

In this picture, a schematic cross section is sketched below. A disc-shaped surface represents the central plane of the whole galaxy, which is surrounded by the free ether F region (light blue). The disc is first located to the right (light red) and then moves to a position (dark red) further down to the left. The path of the centre of the disc is marked by arrow C. In order to emphasise once more, ether of that disc doesn't rotate, many parallel arrows D are drawn, all ether-points swing parallel at these relative small radius. 

 

In this position, the front edge of the disc pushes to the left (see arrow E). Also at free ether F, this pressure wave affects further to left side. Within uncompressible ether, this movement can not be cushioned. Ultimately, a movement in one direction can only be stopped by a movement of the ether at right angles to it. In the following, we will now examine how this motion sequence is realised in the Milky Way.

Dirt Deposit on the Left 

At picture 11.04 at centre of Milky Way only previous swinging area A of beam (red) is drawn. This (nearly) elliptic track again is drawn only representative for all ether-points of this area, which swing at analogue tracks, however at much smaller dimensions. As all ether there is swinging parallel, an (apparent) flow results corresponding to this pattern of movements. Vortices of material particles drift ahead within these tracks-with-beat, so really exists a material flow of dust. At this beam downside left exists movement H (see black arrow). Free ether (light blue) opposes this movement (see arrow F) resp. delays this material flow. This is counteracted by the fact that the particles drift slower and slower towards the apex anyway and are (almost) stopped there. While the beam rotates around the system axis, it deposits the dust at the respective position of its apex (marked by yellow dots at B). 

 

The picture below shows the situation after the beam or its loop path has rotated 45 degrees clockwise. The flow H continues to deposit dust in the area of the apex, as marked here by the yellow dots at D. The dust previously deposited at B remains behind with relatively little forward movement. However, this region now comes under the influence of the right part of the beam. 

 

At its flank G exists accelerated ether-motion. However, this motion runs onto decelerated motion H resp. must partly avoid into sideward space (see arrows G). This pressure-component pushes previous dust B further outward. This process is analogue on both sides of the beam. 

 

On the one hand, the dust is deposited at the respective apex of the beam due to a delayed flow, on the other hand it is pushed further outwards by the accelerated flow. Overall, this results in this image of the spiral arms (see E), which slowly move outwards from the centre of the galaxy and drift forwards in the direction of rotation – see the representation of the Milky Way in the top right of the first image 11.01. The similarity is probably not entirely coincidental. 

Short and Compact Bar 

If this bar works so perfectly, the question arises as to why it does not extend to the edge of the galaxy. Rather, the bar ends abruptly in the area of the transition from the dome to the disc. 

 

Absolute ideal shape of a body is a sphere, which here however is build only in shape of an upper and lower dome. Turning motion at surface of sphere can easily change into small-scale swinging of free ether, like sketched at previous picture 11.03 by green cone A. At the equator of a sphere, the appearance of a circulating wave-with-beat is inevitable (as will become clear again in the following chapter using the example of the Sun). The superposition of rotations in the same direction there does not conform to the superposition of rotations in opposite directions here in the beam. This is why the beam ends at the edge of the dome, also because counter-rotating pressure from the surroundings prevents it from advancing outwards. 

 

This relative braking effect of the free ether also has direct consequences for the beam itself, as it is the cause of the backward-rotating radius R2. This in turn results in the elliptical path on which the movement runs from the left to the right apex and back again on the other section of the path. This only works on a two-armed beam because otherwise these paths would cross. 

 

In the area of the beam, the ether is quite stirred by the back and forward movements, while it is less turbulent further to the left and right of the beam. The general pressure always acts in the direction of the coarser oscillation (see previous chapters), so the stars are preferentially flushed into the area of the bar. This is why the bars of all galaxies appear so bright and the areas to the side of the bar are largely swept clean.

Gigantic and Tiny 

Figure 11.05 is intended to illustrate the proportions between the Milky Way and the solar system – which are beyond our usual dimensions and therefore almost inconceivable. 

 

The structure of our galaxy is shown schematically at the top of this image. In the Galactic Centre GC, the previous bar is marked as a red ellipse. The Sun S (yellow) or the entire solar system is outlined on the left. From our perspective, the view in the direction of the centre (light yellow) is obstructed by a lot of dust and the opposite side of the galaxy (light grey) is not visible. On the visible side, the spiral arms are marked as green bands. The whole galaxy is clockwise, seen from above or the north pole of the galaxy. The Sun is located between two spiral arms (A and B), close to the inner side of the outer spiral arm. 

 

The centre line of this image shows some data. The radius of the Milky Way is given as 50,000 to 80,000 light years (LY) – understandable, because vortex systems of the ether have no fixed outer boundaries. The solar system is located about halfway along this radius, about 26,000 light years from the centre. The solar system is about 15 light years above the galactic plane. It is positioned close to the inner side of spiral arm A (green).

 

In the course of the Milky Way's clockwise rotation, the solar system travels through space at around 220 km/s (recently 280 km/s have also been quoted – according to which the central mass of the galaxy should also be correspondingly greater). For car drivers, km/h is a common unit of measurement: this vehicle of the solar system races round the bend at 220 - 3,600 or around 800,000 km/h – and we don't notice a thing (as otherwise only a UFO crew would due to their own gravitational system). 

 

The light of the Sun arrives on Earth after about 8 minutes. It is a further 150 astronomical units (AU) to the heliopause (the limit of gravity or the Sun's sphere of influence). The Sunlight needs 8 · 150 = 1,200 minutes = 20 hours to get there. If we calculate generously, the solar system has a diameter of 2 light days (LD).

At the bottom of this image, these relations are translated into familiar orders of magnitude. A large river (light blue) flows around a bend, with the right bank (red) representing the centre of the galaxy. The river is 10 kilometres wide, with the left bank (green) representing the previous spiral arm A. Close to the bank there is a tiny vortex S (yellow) – 2 mm in diameter. This is our solar system and – although many do not want to admit it – we are only a marginal phenomenon on the edge of this marginal phenomenon. 

 

Certainly the comparison between ether and water is a bit of a limp. But everyone can answer the question for themselves as to whether the Sun, including its planets and all the other flotsam of this water, is influenced by gravity from the right bank – or by pressure from the left bank. 

 

Of course, this current does not flow completely uniformly, but will have many additional eddies (especially in the area of the spiral arms further inwards). Everyone can answer for themselves whether a ray of light can travel through this medium in a straight line and at a constant speed for thousands of years.

 

This comparative picture is not complete, because the green bank is not a real mainland, but in turn only slightly delayed drifting flotsam. The river is actually twice as wide, interspersed with further flotsam up to its swampy bank (of free ether). The water surface therefore has a diameter of around 40 kilometres. And something else is missing: in the centre is a tower about 4 km high with a pendulum (a connecting line), which swings at a radius of 40 cm or even just 4 mm at the bottom (at least further than the entire solar system). By pressure of that minimal swinging, movements at that huge water-surface (resp. within whole galaxy, cause ether is gapless) result.

Counter-Rotating 

Figure 11.06 now shows the situation of the solar system (yellow) on the inside of its spiral arm (green) on a larger scale. The galaxy is right-turning (see arrow A) and exerts an outward beating (see arrow B). Opposite to this, resistance of free ether also affects through flotsam of spiral arm (see arrow C). 

 

These two offset acting forces B and C (in reality only ether-swinging, here however with different impact) result the rotation of the solar system. This is counterclockwise (see arrow D), i.e. in the opposite direction to the rotation of the galaxy as a whole. This rotation of the solar system is also not a rotation, but only a swinging with a left-hand twist. 

 

This twist, or rather beat, has two important components: One acts in the direction of the centre of the galaxy (see arrow E), so it represents a centripetal pressure. I call this the concentrating effect of the free ether on local vortex systems. The other component of the beating oscillation acts in the direction of rotation of the galaxy (see arrow F). The ambient pressure exerts a kind of conserving effect on the local vortex system, so to speak.

If you imagine this motion sequence as a gear train (although in reality there is no rotation), the solar system would roll like a wheel along the surface of the spiral arm. At the contact point on the left, the speed is zero, on the right side it is maximum (twice as fast as the forward movement of the wheel axis). Friction at the spiral arm decelerates movement on the one hand, and on the other hand accelerated beating feeds the torque back into the general galactic rotation.

 

Skew 

This picture below left shows a vertical section through this area. The plane of the solar system is represented here as a flat ellipse G. Its swinging to the left and back to the right is marked as a double arrow. The inward movement (to the right) meets the general outward swing (to the left) of the counter-rotating galactic rotation (see arrow H). 

 

As already mentioned above, this general outward movement can ultimately only be cancelled out by a movement at right angles to it. The rotational movement of the solar system must therefore not only take place in this plane, but must deviate downwards (alternatively upwards). This results in the position of the solar system as a diagonally standing disc (see image below left) – just as the ecliptic is actually inclined to the galactic plane and is slightly twisted in relation to the line between the Sun and the galactic centre. 

 

As a result, the swinging of the ecliptic has the effect of pushing inwards further down (see arrow M) while the outward movement essentially takes place at the top (see arrow N). There the movement is nearly conform to galactic pressure H. The ether can not move far away, but must swing back to its original place. If the outward movement takes place at H, there must also be an inward movement, e.g. slightly below it. The ecliptic movement M will therefore encounter at least a reduced counter pressure (see arrow I). 

 

Spiral 

This picture below right shows the forward motion of the ecliptic in space. As the galaxy rotates, this disc moves in space, here to the top right from the yellow to the brown and then to the position marked in grey. The rotating movement thus takes place on a spiral path P. Along the spiral arm, this results in a spiralling forward rolling movement, i.e. a cylindrical movement pattern. This motion is quite conform to previous galactic pressure (previous arrows H and I) resp. this spiral-forward-rolling is also common motion pattern further inward within galaxy. 

 

These edge-vortexes occur e.g. frequently at gas planets, however are also common appearance within fluids. For example, the water in the bend of a stream flows along the outer bank of the bend precisely in these spiralling rolls. Not only at the edge, but also further in the centre of the stream, the water moves in a similar way – and the galaxy flows or rolls around in a similar way. This movement process can also be compared to a gear train (but only in terms of the result). As with a planetary or solar gear train, the (somewhat skewed) wheel of the ecliptic mediates between the speeds of the inner fast rotation and the outer slow rotation, in this case of the spiral arm. This applies analogue between all spiral arms until finally the free ether forms the resting boundary surface of the galaxy.

 

Galactic Whirlwind 

The barred spiral galaxy therefore rotates in a manner comparable to a whirlwind, because both are potential vortices. Outside there is resting air or resting ether, while inwards there is increasingly faster rotation. Both systems need a triggering moment, e.g. rising warm air in a cyclone, or an initial rotation in the birth of a galaxy. In a cyclone, the air then flows spirally inwards and upwards; in a galaxy, the dust is concentrated in the centre. Both result – self-accelerating – from the pressure of the environment, in the case of the cyclone due to the higher static air pressure of the environment, in the case of the galaxy due to the pressure of the universe from the wide environment of the free ether. 

 

The atmospheric vortex does not require any gravitational force – and neither does the supposed gravitational force of a gigantic mass in the centre of a galaxy (whereby gravitational attraction through nothing is neither conceivable nor can it exist in reality). With the common idea of gravitational attraction, the above bar and many other phenomena, for example, could never come about – which we actually know or could know, but do not say. 

 

Isaac Newton recognised the laws of (terrestrial) gravitation and extended their application (inadmissibly) to planetary systems, the calculation of the necessary mass of the celestial bodies and their centrifugal forces and much more. He expressly did not want this phenomenon of gravitation to be interpreted as an attractive force (to which all his successors nevertheless reduced it). The ancients knew that there must be an ether – but physicists could not come to terms with its properties. 

 

Drifting in the Ether 

It was believed, for example, that an ether-wind must rush around our ears as we race through space at the crazy rotational speeds of the Earth, the solar system and the galaxy. People believed or still believe today that there is matter on the one hand and (possibly) an ether on the other. Yet it is ancient human knowledge that everything consists of one. 

 

So the question is why we are not aware of this wild chase through space. The secret of the UFO's own gravitational system is easy to uncover: All dust and all celestial bodies are collections of atoms and these are vortex systems of ether within ether. All atoms have a certain pattern of movement – and all are deformed by the impact of the local ether, all in the same way, whether soil, water or air – and of course the atoms of our body as well. Everything simply floats in the ether, driven forward by the respective beat of the ether-vibration. 

 

The ether does not beat down on us from the outside, nor does its beat hit us from the outside. The ether at our current location vibrates through us, including its beating – and because we drift through space in conformity with it, we feel nothing of it at all. 

 

The movement of the bar above has been represented here in a simplified manner in only one plane, although this would result in a traffic jam (as briefly mentioned above). In reality, all movements must always take place in all three dimensions simultaneously. This beam-movement pattern shows phases of acceleration and there must always be a corresponding deceleration (because in the basically stationary ether, every movement must ultimately lead back to its original location). In this respect, this beam would only shake the dust back and forward. 

 

Any kind of superposition results in acceleration and corresponding deceleration. However it's also valid, at one time-unit exists slow motion and at second time-unit faster motion – and at this fast phase longer distance is travelled – so each hitting also results forward motion of particles drifting within ether. Their vortex-systems are moved some ahead within space by each single, minimum beat. The ether itself does not wander correspondingly far distances, but only swings at its place, one ether-point next to the other. 

 

The movements of the ether take place in the order of magnitude of the speed of light, the fine swinging of the free ether like the coarse swinging of the bounded ether. With the rotation of the galaxy, we race through space at 220 or even 280 km/s – but this is not even one per mille of the 300,000 km/s at which the ether always moves in its circular swinging anyway. The deformations from above and the accelerations/decelerations from the superpositions are correspondingly minimal. 

 

Ether is transparent, but hard like steel – and like steel, ether is not really resting, but is always moving internally at high speed, in manifold patterns of movement. Only if one assumes that this gapless ether is the only substance that really exists are there suitable starting points for elucidating this unknown flying object called the Milky Way.

The Teacup Effect 

Newton was British and as such was probably a notorious tea drinker. Imagine that if he had looked more intensely into his cup, physics might have been spared many errors with regard to the world view of the entire cosmos, the galaxy, the solar system and much more. The attentive tea drinker may have noticed that tea residue collects in the centre after stirring, see Fig. 11.07. Many scientists and coffee drinkers have already studied this. Even Albert Einstein wrote an essay about it. Contrary to the usual description, this is my explanation of the phenomenon. 

 

Stirring causes the fluid to rotate, whereby it rises on the outside of the vessel wall due to centrifugal force and is slowed down in the outer layers. Due to gravity, the fluid tends to flow back to the centre, creating a centripetal pressure towards the centre, which further accelerates the spirally rotating fluid on decreasing radii. In addition, a second effect from the law of conservation of torque is at work: a body rotating around an axis naturally attains a higher angular velocity if it is guided along a shorter radius. 

These two effects cause an increasingly faster spiral flow towards the centre of rotation than on the outside, or a slight suction in the form of a vortex tuft. However, suction in and of itself has no effect at all. Water and air molecules fly on their own with their molecular speed (water approx. 650 m/s, air approx. 500 m/s) behind the collision partners in front. And when many molecules do this at the same time, a suction is created, without any extra energy input. This minimal pressure difference causes suspended particles, such as tiny pieces of tar, to be pushed towards the centre (by the general hydrostatic pressure) and down to the bottom of the cup. No-one would probably think that tea leaves rushing ahead would pull the following tea leaves behind them, in complete contrast to the idea in celestial mechanics. The vortex cannot spread any further into the depths and is slowed down or reflected at the bottom of the cup, which leads to hectic movements of the fluid and the tea leaves until the rotation has come to a standstill.

12 Ether Model of Atoms 1]

Note: At this book often is used term ether-point and represents only one position within ether to describe motion's processes. In no case is this ether-point a material particle, atom or molecule. 

 

Speculation: Atoms 

The atoms consist of the same ether as their surroundings, so there are no solid (elementary or sub-elementary) particles. Atoms are localised vortex complexes with a basically spherical shape. In their aura the ether moves from the outside inwards on ever-widening orbits. The widest movements take place on just one shell, which converge again to smaller radii towards the centre. 

 

The movements are oscillating on more or less circular paths, which are called eyes here (instead of the electrons of conventional atomic models). There are atoms with only one or up to a hundred eyes. The oscillation of all eyes cannot be completely synchronised on the spherical shell. This results in transition areas with relatively unsteady movements. The number of these edges between the eyes corresponds to the mass number of the atoms. The mass of an atom thus results from the bulkiness of its movement pattern. 

 

There are also no weak and strong nuclear forces. The cohesion of the atoms results only from the general ether-pressure of the environment, and because inside all movements can only co-operate in this form. This hypothesis is explained step by step below.

Inner Life of the Hollow Spheres 

In the following, the search for the perfect movement pattern within a sphere will be analysed. These movements are easier to visualise, e.g. using a (glass) hollow sphere in which a rod is enclosed. In Figure 12.01, this sphere (yellow) is sketched at A and a moving rod (red) is arranged diagonally within it. This rod represents the connecting line of neighbouring ether-points, at its ends two ether-points (black) are marked. This rod can take any position within this hollow sphere and could be turned arbitrarily, e.g. like shown by both arrows. 

 

However, each ether-point must always return to its original location (without rotation), e.g. always remain near the north pole N. There it can swing e.g. at rosette-tracks, which schematic are shown at B of this picture. If the ether-point stays within this north pole area, its antipode will move on analogue tracks within a corresponding range at the south pole. Neighbouring ether-points at connecting line will move within double-cone (light red). 

 

At C is sketched an extreme extension of rosette, where loop-track drawn here reaches nearby to equator (and in total these loops wander ahead, see arrows). The ether-point returns again and again to its focus G (white), travelling long distances in between, each time slightly offset in the direction of rotation. Here too, its antipode (as well as all other neighbours) moves analogously and synchronously.

Monopole Sphere 

If suitable motion residues meet by chance, a spherical object could well arise spontaneously. However, it is then unlikely that perfectly symmetrical movements will immediately materialise. It is much more likely, uneven and rather tumbling swinging will come up, e.g. like sketched at this picture at D. Upper ether-point moves at relative wide loop- or rosette-track, while downside ether-point wobbles at shorter radius (within light blue areas). Connecting line (red) again moves within two cones (light red), which however are different sizes, so their tips (blue, at H) meet below equator (dotted ellipse). 

 

The unavoidable consequences are now shown at E: The upper ether-point has moved relatively far to the left from its north pole, while the lower ether-point has not moved so far to the right. On the left side, too many ether-points have moved downwards than would fit onto a geometrically exact spherical surface. Conversely, too few ether-points have moved upwards from below on the right-hand side. The sphere will thus be deformed: On the left side it will be bulged (marked red, see arrows) and on the right side (and also at the top) it will be slightly dented (marked green, see arrows). Both observed ether-points (inclusive their neighbours at connecting line) thus are swinging at their rosette-tracks (by different scale) and same time whole surface of sphere between is pulsating (where these dents and dings move ahead in turning sense all around). 

 

At F, this sphere with its unequal inner cones is drawn once more by smaller scale. Around this sphere now also its aura (green) is drawn, thus that area of necessary balancing movements towards free ether. Upside is swinging within wide range, thus at relative wide tracks, so balancing motions reach out correspondingly far (marked by large dark-green cone). At the south pole S, the oscillation takes place on narrower orbits, so that only a relatively thin equalisation range is required there (marked by the small dark green cone). 

 

This object is quite comparable to the jellyfish. Like the latter, it has an uneven aura and thus a negative charge, and thus experiences different pressure from the surrounding free ether. This structure thus scurries through space, constantly driven by the ether, always with the south pole in front. A quieter constellation only results when this monopole docks onto other objects in a suitable position. This will always be at the quiet place (here at the south pole), whereby, for example, two of these monopole spheres will also connect. Opposite to previous hollow jellyfish resp. shell, this motion-pattern however represents a massive sphere, as all ether within sphere-surface is also swinging in synchronous motion (thus not only previous cones between observed ether-points, but all neighbours in all directions in analogue manner). 

 

Speculation: H 

This tumbling-swinging and circulating-pulsating object (at previous picture derivation at D and E, inclusive its aura at F) is by far most common material phenomenon within whole universe: hydrogen. This chemical element makes up more than 99% of the mass of our solar system, because the Sun and the gaseous planets consist mainly of hydrogen. Hydrogen atoms are the lightest and move the fastest of all gases at almost 1,800 metres per second. 

 

Hydrogen is not only present in atomic form for a short time, but also forms exothermically a diatomic molecule called deuterium (very rarely also triatomic as tritium). In the Sun, hydrogen burns to helium, whereby 0.73 % of the mass is converted into energy (see also below or the later chapter 14 The Sun). Of all the chemical elements, hydrogen forms the most frequent compounds, which is why it usually only occurs in molecules on Earth, e.g. as water and in organic substances. This small dancing ether-vortex is therefore the basis of all life.

Dipole Sphere 

In principle, a more uniform surface is characterised by the symmetrical oscillation of the observed ether-points, i.e. a dipole sphere as sketched in the previous Figure 12.01 at B. In this case, the entire inner area also oscillates. There, the entire inner area also oscillates in the same direction and uniformly, as shown by the connecting line (red) or its symmetrical inner cone (red) with its cone tips converging in the centre. The problem of linear motion elements shown there was reduced by the path-with-beat. But only the rosette trajectories derived from this result in a variety of forms of movement on spherical surfaces. Especially interesting is extreme version mentioned at previous picture 12.01 at C, where swinging motions of rosette reach nearby equator. This movement pattern is shown again in detail in the following Figure 12.02 at A. 

 

Marked in white is a focal area at the poles N and S, near which the observed ether-points always return. The path of an upper ether-point is marked as a blue curve and the area of the overlapping rosette is marked in light blue (and, analogously, the lower area is marked in red). 

 

The motion sequence can be imagined in this way, for example: The north and south poles and the equator are marked on a small glass sphere. Inside the hollow sphere is a toothpick as long as the diameter. One end of this rod is located near the North Pole and is now guided on a curve to the equator (as indicated by the arrow at A), then back up again on a curved path and the next downward movement is slightly offset to this (also to the left for left-turning curves). The other end of the rod (in the southern hemisphere) must necessarily describe the analogue paths. 

 

At this toothpick, a second toothpick can be attached, e.g. right angles to it, which naturally again will do analogue movements within hollow sphere. The ether-point B (here offset by about 90 degrees from A) at the end of this second rod is marked with its path. While A swings from north to equator, B moves from equator to south. On the (invisible) reverse side, the antipodes also move from south to the equator and from the equator northwards. 

 

Instead of these two, a whole bunch of toothpicks could be arranged in the hollow sphere, i.e. a ray-shaped star – and they will all move synchronously. This ether moving in the same direction and uniformly now actually forms a perfect swinging pattern within a sphere and at its surface (because all ether-points no longer move on exact circular tracks but on long rosette tracks). The aura (not shown here) outside the surface drawn here is also uniform, because analogue movements on all sides are due to smaller radii. However, swinging here is relative wide (90 degrees), so outer equalising cones will reach out relative far. Seen from the outside, it would be difficult to recognise the actual motion sequences, but the wobbling, swinging and apparent turning of this object would nevertheless be experienced as beautiful and perfect. 

 

Speculation: He 

The motion pattern of this object is the second most common material phenomenon in the universe: helium. It occurs predominantly in the gaseous planets and in stars as a result of hydrogen nuclear fusion. Helium is the lightest noble gas, it does not form compounds – precisely because it is a perfect sphere with self-contained ether-movements. 

 

Superfluidity Helium comes closest to the idea of an ideal gas. It only becomes liquid at very low temperatures and is virtually super-liquid at very low temperatures, or exhibits the rare property of superfluidity. The result of the spectacular experiments is roughly sketched in Figure 12.02 on the right at C. The helium HE (light red) creeps up the walls of a beaker (grey) – i.e. against gravity – and flows or drips down again on the outside. 

 

The term temperature is an expression of the speed of material particles as they move relative to each other. This movement is greatly reduced at low temperatures or ultimately comes to a standstill. All movements of the ether, both the free ether and within the atoms, are unaffected by this. The surface of the atoms also continues to oscillate, including the bumps and dents that occur, i.e. the rotating-pulsating surfaces. Of course, the aura also continues to vibrate with its equalising movements, i.e. all atoms tremble even at the lowest temperature. The helium atom is so round that it always remains independent. Although its aura is symmetrical, it is strongly oscillating so that these atoms do not catch on each other. The ether-pressure acts on each individual atom within the beaker (see small arrows in the picture above), while practically no counter-pressure is exerted by the calm surface of the beaker. The general pressure of the universe wants to flatten all elevations – which here leads to these highly mobile helium atoms being pushed upwards along the cup wall.

 

Atomic Number, Mass and Radius of Atoms 

In the periodic table of chemical elements, atoms are listed according to their atomic number (number of protons in the nucleus, normally also the number of electrons) and the atomic mass (number of protons plus neutrons) is also noted. The atoms are organised according to the structure of their electrons. However, Bohr's planetary model no longer corresponds to current knowledge as achieved by quantum theories. However, I have chosen a different representation here, which is based exclusively on the necessities of the ether-movements. 

 

In the following pictures, some atoms are shown schematically and their atomic numbers (black digits) and masses (blue digits) are noted. An interesting criterion is the radii of the atoms, which are in the range of 10-10 metres. These tiny lengths are almost impossible to measure, especially because atoms do not have an exact boundary. Often the covalent radius of an atom can only be determined indirectly via its connections in molecules. The size ratios of the atoms are represented by spheres of different sizes in the following images. The characteristic movement features are shown (although the respective aura should also be taken into account).

One, Two and Three Eyes 

In Figure 12.03, the hydrogen atom H with its atomic mass of 1, which has already been discussed, is sketched at the top left. The ether-points oscillate asymmetrically on rosette paths, at the top within a wide range and at the bottom within a smaller range. Only at the bottom is there a relatively constant movement and only in such areas can atoms combine to form molecules. The H has only one eye (as I call these areas so that they are not confused with the term and the vortex system of free electrons). 

 

Helium He is said to have two electrons (or protons) and indeed there is symmetrical oscillation around both poles. However, the rosette orbits extend so far to the equator that docking to this noble gas is not possible. On the other hand, this wide swinging requires a large aura. Although the He atom is somewhat smaller than the H atom, it therefore has four times the mass. 

 

Within a sphere, three of the above toothpicks could also form a triangle and its three vertices could oscillate within a certain range. This triangle (red) and its three eyes (white) are shown above right. This atom is the trivalent lithium Li, an unfortunate constellation that takes up a lot of volume and therefore has a mass number of 7. This structure is not actually a sphere, but rather requires a flat aura. This element is the least noble of all atoms and a gap filler in combination with other atoms, e.g. to serve as a storage/donor of free electrons in batteries. It would only become a round thing when two of these platelets are combined to form hexagonal carbon. Then it would shrink into hexavalent C, a compact sphere, only half the size and with the appropriate mass number 12 (see bottom right).

Speculation: Coal 

It is well known that coal was formed from organic material. However, there are deposits of coal enclosed in primary rock, where there could never have been biological material. For this reason, there is a tendency today to believe that coal was formed purely inorganically. Free lithium often occurs in such rock formations, but these rocks also degas, for example by methane gas rising. Under certain pressure and temperature conditions, hydrocarbons are formed and when water is separated, pure coal remains (see in particular H.J. Zillmer, Der Energie-lrrtum). 

 

Four, Five and Six Eyes 

The bottom line of Figure 12.03 shows constellations that produce beautiful spheres, crystals and compounds. At the bottom left is the 4-valent beryllium Be with its mass number 9: a perfect tetrahedron formed from four equilateral triangles. Four observed ether-points are shown at the corners and their range of motion is marked as a white area. 

 

The great stability of this movement pattern results from the fact that an ether-point can move slowly at the moment or even stand still for a short time or, conversely, be relatively fast – and the other corner points can easily balance out this imbalance within the sphere. Nevertheless, bumps and dents will also appear on the surface in the short term, resulting in the trembling of the atoms discussed above. This tetrahedral movement pattern can naturally form very beautiful crystals, so that beryllium is a common component of gemstones. 

 

If this three-sided pyramid is completed to form a double cone, the result is the 5-valent boron B, whose higher mass 11 is even packed into a much smaller volume. The mass 12 of the C atom, whose six eyes form a hexahedron, requires an even shorter radius. This pattern is ideally suited to the formation of various compounds, especially hydrocarbon chains, which are the basis of all life. 

 

It is already clearly recognisable here that mass does not correlate with the volume of the atoms. Rather, it is generally true that the more and more uniformly the eyes are arranged (in the periodic table from left to right the increasing atomic number or number of electrons/protons), the more compact the spheres are. On the other hand, more electrons and/or a non-uniform distribution obviously require more additional neutrons.

Eight, Ten and Twelve Eyes 

This series continues, as shown in Figure 12.04 using some atoms with higher atomic numbers. The 8-valent oxygen O with its corresponding mass number 16 is sketched at the top left. Eight eyes are formed when two tetrahedra are fitted into a sphere, which are mirrored around the centre (shown here in red and blue, each with a triangular area highlighted). 

 

This magical symbol is given great spiritual significance. In this picture on the bottom right, a cutting pattern shows how this shape is created from equilateral triangles and squares. 

 

At the top centre of this picture, four-sided pyramids are fitted into the sphere, again mirrored. In this atom with its ten eyes, the three inner electron shells are completely filled. The ten eyes are distributed so evenly on the surface of the sphere that the appropriate mass number 20 is given. The movement pattern is so uniform that only a relatively thin aura is required. The atom of this neon noble gas Ne therefore has an even smaller radius. 

 

However, when the fourth electron shell becomes necessary, large asymmetries arise again. At the bottom left, the green ring shows the much larger radius of the magnesium atom Mg (atomic number 12, mass number 24 ), although it only has two additional eyes compared to the previous neon. The atom of chlorine Cl (atomic number 17, mass number approx. 36) has five more eyes, which is again packed into a much smaller volume (yellow circle). The 26 eyes of iron Fe, including its more than double mass of around 56 units, also fit into the previous large volume of magnesium (with its 12 eyes and mass 24). 

 

A lot of Mass in the Same Volume 

In iron, electrons are already in the fourth shell, but obviously the shells do not have a specific thickness. It is more a question of the possibility of even distribution and even spacing between the eyes. Of course, the volume of a sphere increases with the third power of the radius, but heavy atoms obviously do not require a correspondingly larger space. Here, for example, a yellow ring is drawn around the volume of magnesium or iron (green), indicating the size of the uranium atom U with its atomic number 96 and mass number 238. 

 

The volumes of the noble gases are sketched at the top right of this picture and the same law applies to these perfect spheres. The neon atom Ne is shown in the centre (green). If its ten eyes grow to 18, the result is the initially astonishingly expanded volume of argon Ar (yellow) with its mass of 40 units. The double number of electrons/protons of krypton Kr (atomic number 36, mass 84, green) requires only a slightly larger atomic radius, as does xenon Xe (atomic number 54, mass 131, yellow), which has 18 more eyes. 

 

Impact Sensitivity 

The atoms are ether-vortices of varying complexity. The movements are more or less ordered, whereby areas of relatively constant movement are referred to here as eyes. The smallest atom H has only one eye, the largest atoms can have over a hundred of these distinctive points. The atoms are vibrating ethers with more or less perfect spherical surfaces. At (or somewhat within) the mentioned atomic radii, the swinging takes place on the widest paths. From there, previous cones of motions show inward, where inside exists less and less space. Opposite, much space is available towards outside, where also within aura of balancing movements radius of swinging are reduced to movements of surrounding free ether. 

 

This aura protects the object from its surroundings, yet it is practically constantly attacked by radiation of all kinds or mutual collisions. These impacts occur not only frontally (which leads to short-term deformations, see below), but also at a flat angle (which leads to distortions on the surface). Surface structures are stable if they can cushion the external disturbances in the best possible way – and these are equilateral triangle constructs. 

 

Figure 12.04, bottom right, shows the cutting pattern of an ideal solid that can only be formed from equilateral triangles and/or quadrilaterals. An external impact on a corner is dissipated along the edges in the best possible way. This is why these solids form the most stable atoms and the outer electron shells are only stable again when extended by six or eight or a multiple thereof. As long as the surface of an atom has not reached this structure, it protects itself by bonding with other atoms. The molecular compound will continue to tremble internally, but represents a stable structure against external shocks. 

 

Stable in the Long Term 

Any number of points can be distributed more or less uniformly on the surface of a sphere (or even within a sphere) and therefore there are atoms of every atomic number. The internal oscillation is so flexible that there can be any number of points of relatively constant movement. With more than a hundred eyes, however, the structure is obviously no longer completely stable; occasionally internal stresses accumulate or external stress leads to damage or partial or total disintegration. 

 

In this respect, it is actually astonishing that atoms can be so long-lived. As we have seen above, the movements do not take place on clean circular paths, but despite all the chaos, the distances between ether-points must be constant. This requires that within the apparent chaos there must always be areas with relatively constant movement – the previous eyes – and these in turn provide the internal stability of the entire vortex complex. From the outside, the vortex structure is stabilised by the ether-pressure present on all sides. And because ether is gapless, so everything takes place in the same medium throughout, these movement patterns continue almost unchanged for millions of years (although not totally constant, but intermittently and locally with various deformations, see below). 

 

Alternative Atomic Models 

Of course, these ideas contradict current views and theories. But Nils Bohr's planetary model has long been obsolete. It assumed that electrons rotate around a centre at breakneck speed. Because electrons are negative, it had to be assumed that they would be attracted by a corresponding number of positive particles. This results in the dilemma that strong nuclear force would have to hold these protons together. The search for Higgs particles is in vain – and if they were found, it would still be unclear why and how this glue should work. Because electrons are low in mass, but atoms are high in mass, protons must be heavy. However, because the calculation doesn't work out, neutrons had to be invented and the same number or even more added. 

 

In quantum mechanics, it was realised that the position and speed of electrons cannot be measured at the same time, so only abstract wave functions and probabilities are used for calculations – and results or interpretations are obtained that are outside of common logic (e.g. that reality only occurs with the act of observation). The Pauli principle was gratefully accepted because it is clear that, for example, two particles cannot be in the same place at the same time. However, whether the quantum numbers describe suitable criteria is again questionable due to various inconsistencies. In principle, quantum theories adopted the old idea of a shell-like structure, but replaced the electrons with electron foam or clouds – and also dissolved all elementary particles into quarks – without being able to explain why these are constantly changing and can produce material phenomena despite their very short lifetimes. 

 

Although the search for particles continues, there is a growing conviction that ultimately everything can only be movement (even though this is not concretised, but only dealt with abstractly as forces, energies or fields and predominantly only mathematically). In general, the logically necessary something that could perform movements is completely left out. In all current models, something undefined is still moving in empty space, which is at best curved or equated with energy or information, etc. From this point of view, something must be moving. 

 

From this point of view, the real observed phenomena, including the available data of chemical elements, must result from the motion necessities of a gapless primordial substance. The following speculations are intended to illustrate the differences between the ideas – and these hypotheses will be substantiated immediately afterwards. 

 

Speculation: Electron, Proton, Neutron, Quarks 

There are free electrons, these can also attach themselves to atoms, but there are 

  • no electrons in the shell of atoms (rather, these eyes are only places of relatively constant oscillating movements)

 

  • no protons, neither in the nucleus of atoms nor anywhere else. The nucleus only appears as hard because an observation beam is reflected there (it cannot penetrate the centre of the atom because all cones of motion converge there and thus the ether is maximally strained there, see below) 

 

  • no real neutrons, they are only a mathematical-abstract unit for mass to indicate the appropriate mass number together with the number of protons (whereby mass indicates the bulkiness of an atom, thus the term neutron stands at best for a range of not quite harmonic oscillations, see below)

 

  •  no quarks and certainly not as subelementary particles. The initially six (named up, down, strange, charmed, bottom, top) and today almost a thousand objects are not independent entities. At best, they were used to recognise orbital sections of ether-movements – whereby these are not directly observable in the atomic nucleus, but only the scrap after the destruction of the movement patterns of ordered ether-vortex complexes.

Distribution Patterns 

Instead of the many electron shells of current theories, only one shell of a spherical surface is considered here (roughly corresponding to or slightly smaller than the atomic radius), on which all eyes are arranged. In Figure 12.05, spherical surfaces are sketched as a simple ellipse (with axis lengths 1 : 2, height equal to the distance between the poles, width equal to the length of the equator), whereby the squares only roughly mark the available spaces. All the eyes of an atom are located on this surface, distributed as evenly as possible. Different patterns result depending on the number of eyes. 

 

Some chemical elements from the previous picture are shown here, e.g. carbon C, oxygen O and neon Ne. These form regular patterns, with more eyes (6, 8 and 10) arranged on envelope surfaces of smaller radii (the length of the radii is marked here by thick black lines). The distribution pattern of magnesium Mg (with its 12 eyes) is sketched with an additional plane and this element actually occupies a much larger surface area. Chlorine Cl (17 eyes) forms a narrow pattern on a much smaller surface, as does iron Fe (with 26 eyes) or the noble gas krypton Kr (where 36 eyes can also result in a honeycomb distribution). Uranium U with its 92 eyes requires only a slightly larger surface area. According to the conventional atomic model, additional electrons are arranged on more and more shells, which results in larger volumes. With even more electrons, the atomic radius should not actually become smaller again. Here, on the other hand, the eyes are arranged on just one shell and, step by step, the distribution pattern merely occupies an additional degree of latitude. 

 

Further eyes can be arranged on this circle or a more uniform distribution results again, with practically the same or even smaller volume. The relationship between eyes (electrons) and mass number (protons plus neutrons) is well known, but nevertheless remarkable: with beautiful patterns it is exactly 1:2 (here the top four examples), whereas with a larger number of eyes the patterns can no longer be completely uniform over the entire surface or irregularities inevitably occur (more neutrons appear). 

Edges of Triangular and Quadrilateral Patterns 

In principle, all spatial structures can be formed from triangles, including the arrangement of the eyes on the surface of the sphere. As mentioned above, triangular structures provide the best stability, preferably using equilateral triangles. Instead of relatively irregular triangles, beautiful patterns can also be created from quadrilaterals in this distribution. These can also be stable, not only as a square or rectangle, but also as a trapezoid or rhombus. The stability is therefore not created by the (corner) points, but by the edges, which thus come to the fore. 

Figure 12.06 again shows six atoms with the spatial arrangement of their eyes, whereby the spatial extension of these bodies is indicated by different sizes. Various atoms are listed in the table on the right of the picture with their atomic number (black) and mass number (blue). Hydrogen H is not a real atom, but a sphere with one pole that vibrates a little more strongly and a relatively calm pole. Helium He also occupies a special position because there is extensive oscillation around its two poles. Perhaps its mass number 4 indicates that its orbits form a four-petalled rosette. The lithium platelet Li with its 3 corners and edges is almost exotic, bending so violently with every disturbance that it corresponds to a relatively large mass number of 7. 

 

Although the beryllium Be with its four eyes forms a beautiful tetrahedron with its 4 edges, its mass number of 9 is also somewhat excessive. The edges form acute angles so that any external impact distorts the whole structure. Boron B has one more eye and fits better into a sphere with its mirror tetrahedron. But here too, all 9 edges converge at an acute angle, so that its mass number is 11. 

 

The truly ideal shape is only achieved by carbon C with its 6 eyes and 6 edges and a mass number of 12 (conventionally 6 protons plus 6 neutrons). This atom therefore forms the basis of the atomic mass unit. At the same time, its eight equilateral triangular faces form the basis for extensions by eight eyes each (or conventionally the electrons on higher electron shells, see below). The atoms of the next atomic numbers also have two edges per eye, e.g. nitrogen (N 7-14) and oxygen (0 8-16), while odd numbers have slightly more mass, e.g. fluorine (F 9-19). With an even number of eyes, the doubling is again given, e.g. neon (Ne 10-20) and magnesium (Mg 12-24). 

 

Isotopes 

The shape of the neon is shown here as two four-sided pyramids with four squares in between. This results in these 20 edges corresponding to the mass number 20. Instead of forming squares, the 10 eyes can alternatively be arranged exclusively by triangles. However, this results in a higher number of edges – and in fact every tenth neon atom is a neon isotope with a mass number of 22. The deviating mass number of the isotopes is conventionally explained by additional neutrons (with an unchanged number of electrons or protons). In reality, the eyes of the isotopes are arranged in a slightly different way. For example, square faces can be replaced by triangles or vice versa. Compared to the original lattice structure, this results in a different number of edges and these correlate with the mass. 

In this image, for example, the 12 eyes of magnesium Mg are arranged in such a way that there is one eye at each pole and five eyes on each of two rings. The connection between the eyes is 25 edges – and every tenth magnesium atom is the lsotope-25. Four eyes could also be arranged on each of three planes, resulting in 24 edges (if the centre plane is rotated by 45 degrees). The normal magnesium Mg-24 is a beautiful UFO shape: three eyes are arranged around each of the two poles and six eyes on one plane in between. 

 

More Eyes – More Edges – More Mass 

Above atomic number 12, the mass number generally increases because there are now more than two edges per eye, e.g. even in the noble gas argon Ar with its 18 eyes and mass number 40. As the number of eyes increases, the surfaces of the bodies become rounder, even though they are still formed from triangles and squares. This increases the number of possible combinations, so that more isotopes appear, for example chlorine Cl-35 and Cl-37 or iron Fe-54, Fe-57 and Fe-58 are listed in the table above. 

 

If the surface of a (more or less) round sphere has a lattice structure of squares, four edges emanate from each corner. Each newly added point results in four new edges. With small bodies or few eyes, however, the circle soon closes so that, for example, only two new edges appear for each additional eye. In a grid of triangles, each corner point is connected to three neighbours. A new point results in three new edges, unless existing edges are included. This results, for example, in uranium U with atomic number 92 and mass number 238 (approximately 2.6 edges per eye). 

 

If one assumes that vortex centres are uniformly distributed on a spherical surface, then there is a law-like correlation between the number of eyes and the number of connecting lines between the eyes. Strangely enough, the number of these edges corresponds exactly to the mass number (except for very small atomic numbers, but these also have an unequal number of protons/neutrons when viewed conventionally). The crucial question now is why these edges should be the cause of the appearance of mass.

Unsteady Edges 

Figure 12.07 shows five eyes as clocks at A as well as the eight connecting lines (blue) between the eyes. All clocks are left-turning and turn steady, like e.g. would be possible at a pole-cap (see previous chapter). At B all clocks have turned further and all ether-points at end of each hand and also all ether-points at all connecting lines are swinging parallel around their respective turning points. 

 

At previous chapter was stated, this totally synchronous swinging can not occur at whole surface of sphere. The differences that occur can only be compensated for by orbit-with-beat or rosette movements. In the case of these small atomic objects, these differences are obviously not equalised by perfectly uniform transitions. There are rather eyes with relative constant swinging (at previous chapter also called focus) and transition areas with more restless movements (e.g. also because of continuous external disturbances). These areas between the eyes correspond to the previous edges. 

 

In this picture above right, a situation is sketched in which all clocks have continued to rotate, but one eye (at C) has lagged slightly behind and another eye (at D) has moved slightly ahead. The distances between the observed ether-points are thus no longer constant or the previously straight edges are thus curved (see blue lines). 

 

The connecting lines practically represent connecting rods between two wheels. If the wheels rotate at the same speed, these connecting rods move in a well-defined space, which is marked in light blue at E in this picture. If the wheels do not rotate at the same speed, the connecting rods would have to be elastic or the edges would have curvatures. This means that a much greater range of motion is required, as shown schematically here at F marked in light blue. 

These sketches show a view of the five clocks, i.e. a view of a spherical surface from the outside. At G, a section through three neighbouring clocks is sketched. If all hands (red) show upward at the moment, connecting lines are comparable with rigid connecting rods (blue) resp. straight edges. If the clocks do not rotate uniformly, the connecting lines are bent or the edges beat within a larger margin, which is marked at G on the right (light blue). 

 

Each time a connecting line is curved, there is too much material on the concave side and too little on the convex side. An equalisation must take place by moving ether-points into the third dimension, i.e. every curvature must always take place in all three dimensions simultaneously. In this case, the edges will not only be curved on the plane of the spherical surface (as in F), but will also be bent inwards or outwards (as shown in G).

 

Speculation: Energy Level 

According to current theory, electrons spontaneously jump to a lower energy level and back again. It is assumed here that all eyes are arranged on just one shell. However, they are occasionally pulled inwards and then return to their original position. 

 

Speculation: Radioactive Decay 

Accidental tensions can cause eyes to be shot out of the spherical surface. 

 

Dents and Dings 

The bottom line of Figure 12.07 shows sections of a cross-section through the sphere of atoms. The areas marked in green represent segments of the spherical surfaces. Three clocks (white) with the current position of the hands (red) are shown in each of these. At H, the hands of all clocks are pointing upwards, the connecting lines are marked in blue. The edges (blue) between the eyes therefore run along the surface of the sphere. 

 

At I, the upper clock points downwards, thus reducing the distance between the upper and centre clocks. The connecting line is bent outwards (see arrow) and the sphere will therefore have a bump there (the green area is extended outwards or to the left). J shows the opposite situation, with the lower clock pointing downwards. The connecting line is thus stretched or pulled inwards (see arrow), so that the ball has a dent there (the green area is flatter or slightly retracted to the right). 

 

In principle, the clocks cannot rotate in complete conformity, so such slight indentations and expansions are normal or represent the normal trembling of all atoms. However, all eyes and edges are still relatively stationary within this framework. However, this disturbance can also be more serious due to external influences, as sketched in this picture at K. 

 

The upper clock is pointing upwards and the lower clock is pointing downwards. The connecting line is extremely stretched, but of course the distance between these neighbouring ether-points cannot be stretched. Compensation can only be achieved by moving the edges closer to the centre of the atom. The central eye is thereby stretched to a shorter radius (see arrow). 

 

This extreme tension only occurs due to an external disturbance (the effect of an electron charge). Within a short time, the clocks will run synchronously again to the normal extent, the eye will return to its original radius, whereby the ether will swing outwards a little (radiation is emitted). 

 

Monster Wave 

All in all, each atom trembles due to the not quite conformal oscillation of its eyes, whereby certain tensions occur along the edges. Since ether is neither compressible nor elastic, the edges will make corresponding movements at the same time as the irregular swinging of the eyes. All movements along the surface of the sphere, including its bumps and dents, are balanced overall. Ether sloshes back and forward and back again, whereby all waves complement each other or run without any particular tension. 

 

The more eyes and edges there are on the surface of the sphere, the more such equalising wave movements run all around. Even harmless waves can overlap randomly in such a way that incredible monster waves appear as if from nowhere. In the mesh of triangular edges, these elongations can occur by chance as with K, i.e. all the pointers point apart in a star shape. After half a turn, all the hands point in a star shape to a central clock (at L). The eye can be pressed so hard onto a longer radius that its movement pattern is shot outwards from the surface of the sphere (see arrow R). 

 

This process therefore results purely by chance from the normal movements of all the eyes and edges of an atom. However, this build-up is favoured by a large number of eyes or edges. Large atoms or those with an unfavourable structure lose an eye or electron via radioactive radiation. In extreme cases, this random, internal vibration can also lead to the disintegration of the atom as a whole. This radioactivity is well known – only the actual cause was previously unknown. 

Simple and Complex Aura 

The mass of atoms does not result from any hard particles, but is an expression of the bulkiness of the movement patterns. The arrangement of eyes on a spherical surface was discussed above and there the movements run along the widest paths. Towards the centre of the atom, the space is narrower, so that all movements are reduced to smaller paths. Towards the outside, there is more and more space, but even there there must be a balance to the resting free ether of the surroundings. The complexity of the entire movement pattern results in the mass of an atom. Light atoms have a simple knitted aura, heavy atoms have a complex aura. In each atom, however, there are areas with relatively simple, uniform oscillation (the eyes) and in between the transition areas with complicated movement (the edges). 

 

Picture 12.08 shows at A a view onto a part of previous sphere-surface (green). Two eyes or clocks (white) and the connecting line (blue) between them are shown. If both clocks turn synchronously, observed ether-points (at end of both red hands and all neighbours at connecting line) move parallel to each other (like rigid connecting rod). This picture shows a cross-section through these eyes at B. Marked are connecting lines (black) towards free ether (here left side). Radius of all parallel swinging motions are reduced towards outside to smaller radius, here again marked by light green cones. 

 

All connecting lines swing parallel to each other (see arrows). If the oscillation in the eye changes (e.g. becomes narrower or wider or runs along rosette-shaped paths), the oscillation in this aura changes analogously. All movements within the eyes are thus easily cushioned to the outside (especially as the connecting lines to the outside are not rigid straight lines, but rather the neighbours move uniformly on spiral lines and, if necessary, move into the third dimension).

At this picture at C are drawn two clocks, which do not turn totally synchronous. Edge (blue) then must behave like an elastic connecting rod (here relations are overdrawn strongly). This bending can occur at plane of sphere-surface, however inevitably will have effect cross to. At D schematic is shown, how at this surface comes up corresponding bump. At this point, ether is pressed outward (see arrow). 

 

Wide-Range Equalisation 

However, this radial movement of the edge cannot be equalised as easily as the oscillating movement of the eyes. Instead, it results in complex and long-range equalising movements, as sketched in the picture on the right. 

 

At E, the surface of the sphere is initially shown as a round sphere (light red). At F, surface is bulged to left side (dark red), i.e. ether-points of one edge there are moved outward (see arrows). Within ether can not exist gaps and not even less density. So this movement inevitably demands, neighbouring ether-points also move to left side (see arrows at centre). At opposite side thus results an indentation (marked yellow, see arrows). The unsteady movement of the edges can therefore not simply be cushioned at the surface of the sphere (like the swinging of the eyes), but has repercussions throughout the entire atom. 

 

However, ether-points cannot move arbitrarily far to the left, because the same and equally dense ether is already present everywhere. Only at the rear of the atom is there a corresponding void. The leftward movement of the bump at G must therefore run back to the right (see arrows H) and compensate for the dent on the rear side. This backflow runs around the atom. So there is much more ether in motion than corresponds to the small causal bump (whereby the curvatures are extremely exaggerated in the drawings). 

 

This bump and the movements it triggers are comparable to the movement of a solid ball through an ideal gas. The front of the solid exerts pressure on the gas particles, which propagates in all directions. The same pressure is also exerted on the back of the solid and the ball will move through the medium without resistance, but only theoretically in an ideal gas. However, this comparison is not correct because the conventional theory assumes a solid body on the one hand and an empty environment in which at best a few gas particles are present on the other. 

 

Cause of the Appearance of Mass 

In reality, however, an atom consists of the same ether that is also present in its surroundings, everywhere of the same density (gapless and incompressible). The local areas differ only by their movements, within the atom coarse swinging, outside fine swinging, within the aura with mediating movements. There is also no ether-flowing around the atomic sphere (as in the solid above). There is no ether-flow with wide-ranging wandering of ether-particles. All neighbouring ether-points shift only little bit into indicated directions. Because there are no fixed boundaries, this movement also goes sideways into the sphere, for example. All ether-points then return to their old position, i.e. this bump/dent is levelled out (or replaced by the next trembling movement). 

 

There is still a serious difference between common mechanics and the movements of the ether. The formation of the bump is not the (temporally preceding) cause for the (temporally later) sequence of movements, rather all movements are dependent on each other and can only start (and also end) at the same time. 

 

This is the reason why only these restless areas between the eyes are relevant for the mass of an atom. The swinging in the area of the eyes, even the orbits-with-beat and the rosette orbits there, are easy to balance and are easily cushioned by a balancing cone towards the free ether. Only the unsteady bending, the shaking of the connecting rods and the radial movement components of the edges cause these extensive ether-movements. This is the only reason why the mass number correlates so astonishingly precisely with the number of edges between the eyes (and not with supposed protons and neutrons). 

 

Inertial Mass 

All movements of the ether take place at the speed of light, i.e. at around 300,000,000 metres per second. Up to now it has been assumed that the motion complex of an atom as a whole remains in the same place. The situation is different when we hammer a nail into a wall, for example. First, the hammer must be accelerated, i.e. the inertia of mass at rest must be overcome by muscle power. Then the hammer continues to fly at a constant speed, i.e. the hammer has kinetic energy in the form of inertia of moving mass. When the hammer hits the nail, the force is transferred, i.e. acceleration and deceleration are repeated. Whether we swing the hammer at 3 m/s or 30 m/s is negligible and makes hardly any difference in relation to all light-fast ether-movements. 

 

In any case, no solid body is actually travelling through space, only the motion structures of the hammer or nail atoms are moving forwards. This process is quite comparable to the formation of a bump and dent in the previous picture (for F, G and H). When an atom is accelerated from its rest position, a dent is made at the back and the ether is pushed forward through the centre of the atom (arrow F). At the same time, the dent is formed at the front (arrow G) and the ether further to the front must move to the side (arrow H). 

 

In the above example of a stationary atom, the bump is smoothed out again by the swinging of the eyes, so that this deformation is only a short-term phenomenon of the normal trembling of all atoms. In contrast, the acceleration of an atom (e.g. the previous hammer) produces an artificial dent and bump that is not levelled out again. Ether-movements are extended in front, all around within aura results a beat towards sideward-backward, which converge at backside of aura (arrows H) and thus whole movement-structure of atom is pushed further ahead (arrow F). 

 

It therefore takes a single application of force for an initial deformation of the atom, during which this circuit is simultaneously formed around the atom. These movements continue and continue to cause the push to the back of the atom. These movements continue without resistance, because there is actually energy constancy in the gapless ether (unlike at the level of material particles, where frictional losses always occur). Because ether can neither be compressed nor stretched, all movement must always continue. This is the only way to understand the inertia inherent in mass, both the inertia of mass at rest and of mass in motion, including the concept of kinetic energy. These processes take place in the same way in all collisions of all atoms in the entire universe. Inertia of mass or the inertial mass of atoms is therefore a universal phenomenon. 

 

Speculation: Gravitation 

Gravitation is not a constant force that acts everywhere in the universe. Rather, gravity only exists in the immediate vicinity of celestial bodies. 

 

Heavy Mass 

For many readers it is probably still difficult to imagine that no solid particles move forwards in space. Nor does a portion of ether move forwards in space. Only the structure of motion is passed on forwards. At the front, the ether takes on the movement pattern of the aura front and subsequently of the whole sphere of movement, and at the back the ether flows back to its original oscillation. Different degrees of influence are required to form the first dent, bump and flow around. Complex motion patterns resist this acceleration more than simple patterns (and, analogously, different forces occur during deceleration). That's why I define mass as expression of bulkiness of atom-vortex-complex. 

 

Similar to this external disturbance (to accelerate the hammer) works a weak force, called gravity, which occurs in the free ether of the environment of a celestial body. In the environment of the Earth, there is a general movement with a blow towards the centre of the Earth, in that the ether swings slightly faster towards the Earth and slightly slower outwards again. With each beat, the movement pattern of an atom is moved a little closer to the Earth. The entire movement pattern of the atoms is slightly displaced in space, no matter how simple or complex it is (all bodies are subject to the same gravitational acceleration and therefore fall at the same speed). 

 

However, if a solid body is prevented from falling, this is comparable to the previous nail: the surface offers resistance or no longer yields at all. The impact of gravity continues to press dents onto the upper side of the atoms, the deformation is passed on and the weight of the heavy mass can be measured on a scale, the more complex the structure and the more such structures, the heavier. Because both processes (the external mechanical force and the effect of gravitational impact) are comparable, inert and heavy masses have identical values. 

 

The Earth represents a collection of roughly oscillating units. The free ether a few thousand kilometres above the Earth is finely oscillating. Towards the Earth, the ether becomes increasingly dirtier because there is a transition to generally coarser movements. This transition is asymmetric, the closer to the Earth the coarser – and this results in the previous beating or this continuous gentle push towards the Earth. This gravitation leads to the appearance of gravity. However, the Earth as a whole has no weight and its mass only results in the form of differently bulky movement structures of its atoms. 

 

There are no forces of attraction between the celestial bodies, which nobody can seriously believe anyway. This transition from pure to polluted ether only exists in the vicinity of celestial bodies, only within their aura does this centripetal thrust take place. Gravity is not a universal force and certainly not a constant (because there are no equal values anywhere anyway). It is completely absurd to make calculations based on earthly gravity over millions of light years into space. These assertions are of course in stark contradiction to current doctrine. A detailed description in a subsequent chapter will substantiate the previous statements. 

Few Eyes – Lots of Volume 

Analysing the data of various atoms clearly shows that the mass numbers are independent of the volume. Now that the significance of the edges has been recognised in the previous considerations, it is also clear why atoms with few eyes require a relatively large volume. In Figure 12.09, for example, three eyes (or clocks) are shown at A on a circular surface. The hands of these three clocks cannot always point in the same direction. This is why the distances between the hands are always different. The connecting lines (or edges) are therefore constantly curved to different extents (see blue curves). These edges move very irregularly and take up a large amount of space (marked in light blue). The aura of these atoms will therefore have a relatively large volume. 

 

This also means that the movement within the eyes cannot be simple swinging on circular paths. The ether-points there can only swing around a general focus and may also have to perform far-reaching movements (to bridge the differences in distance). That's why within these eyes mainly movements at rosette-tracks will occur. 

 

Paired Spin 

At this picture 12.09 upside right is sketched an atom inclusive its aura (light green). The eyes are located on a spherical surface (red circle). There the swinging takes place on wide tracks. Towards the outside in the direction of the free ether, the swinging is reduced to smaller radii, which is represented here by the cone B (dark green), for example. However, the wide swinging must also be reduced inwards, which is represented here by the cone C pointing inwards. 

 

The different extent of the oscillation is signalled by the three arrows at E. The inner cones meet at the centre – and there the ether can not be left- and right-turning at the same time. So if the left eye would be left-turning, the opposite eye F would have to be right-turning (seen from outside). This counter-rotating spin is also best achieved by rosette movements. 
 

At picture 12.09a at B and C is shown, how oval tracks result of overlay of two counter-rotating circle-movements, which are turning ahead or back depending on both radius. In addition, forward or backward rotating rosettes result depending on the rotational speeds. A smooth transition is therefore possible on a spherical surface. In the quantum numbers, the spin is defined as -1/2, 0 and +1/2. It remains to be seen whether this fixation is correct (e.g. because the orbit can certainly be clockwise in a counterclockwise rosette). Overall, however, the pairing of the spins of opposite eyes results in the smoothest movement in the centre of an atom. 

 

Paired Eyes 

These four eyes could therefore also produce a continuous pattern of motion inside the atom. However, if another eye is added, the harmony is lost. In this picture at the bottom right of G, an additional, fifth eye is shown. If its inner cone does not have any matching movements to the existing inner cones, this new cone should not extend so far inwards. The eye could then sit further outwards, whereby the aura as a whole would also show a bulge. This bloated volume is almost always present when an unpaired eye is added. 

 

In this picture on the left at H, the previous constellation is supplemented by a further eye, so that paired relationships are now given again. The larger number of eyes results in a better coordination of movements in the interior and this atom can again have a considerably smaller volume.

At this picture, centre K is marked dark red, because there well could come up stress within ether. As recognised above, not all eyes can swing completely synchronously. There are edges between the eyes with their bending in all directions. These lead to dents and bumps on the surface of the sphere or to trembling of the whole atom. All these movements can be balanced outwards within the aura. But all these movements also extend into the interior of the atom. The movements must converge there in a much smaller space. 

 

So it could well be that only weaker eyes are to be integrated, as sketched in this picture below left at L. The cones of this eye are smaller and do not quite reach the centre. On the other hand, an eye of normal strength could also sit slightly outside the other eyes, as sketched in M. In any case, this clearly shows why the pairing of the eyes (and their spin) results in favourable movement patterns and why conformal movements can take place despite many eyes in a relatively small volume. 

 

One advantage of a higher number of eyes, for example, is that the edges become smoother. If an edge forms a dent, then it is very likely that a dent will form in the neighbourhood. The balancing flow (F, G and H in Fig. 12.08) then no longer has to run around the entire sphere; instead, the balancing takes place in the vicinity, which leads to less stress in the centre.

External and Internal Cohesion 

It always seems astonishing how and why such complex structures can hold together and last for so long. According to conventional wisdom, the nucleus is held together by a completely inexplicable adhesive force and the electrons remain on their shells by electromagnetism – a truly absurd idea (like the belief that planets can be held in their orbits by gravity and result in a stable system). From the point of view of a gapless ether, there is no need for any mysterious forces. 

 

At picture 12.10 at A schematic is sketched an atom by cross-sectional view. It is surrounded by free ether (light blue) and its fine swinging generally affects ether-pressure onto areas of coarse motion. However, overpowering environment can not eliminate swinging. The further the connecting lines in the aura (light green) of the atom are compressed, the greater their amplitude becomes (because no movement can be lost in the ether). This results in a balance with a flowing transition from fine to more extensive oscillation at the outer boundary of the aura. 

 

All movements converge towards the centre, where a complicated tangle of movements is created in a confined space. Even there, of course, all neighbouring ether-points must always maintain the same distance from each other, synchronous or adequate oscillation must always take place in all three dimensions. The gapless ether is a hard medium and the connecting lines can only be curved to a certain extent (I estimate a ratio of 1 : 10,000). So there is a load limit from inside. Simple movement patterns of eyes and edges can move close together, complex and restless movements require more space. However, all oscillations from all directions are always as concentrated as possible. This is why the centre of an atom appears as a hard core, although in reality it consists only of normal ether. 

 

It is precisely there, at the very centre, that all movements interlock so strongly that no partial movement can be removed from it. From the inside, even the most complex atom receives its rigidity and the general structure of the atom is fixed. On the surface of the sphere, the movements can vary to a certain extent and all external disturbances are cushioned in the aura. There is the flowing boundary to the free ether, through whose counter-pressure the structure is held together from the outside. Inside, however, all movements are so rigidly harmonised that the atom must maintain its general vortex formation despite all external disturbances. 

 

Heavy Elements 

It was mentioned above that the movement pattern of hydrogen could also come about purely by chance from scraps of movement coming together in opposite directions (analogous to the winding of a tornado). Two or even three hydrogen atoms can clump together to form molecules and these in turn could form a common aura and ultimately the shape of helium atoms (more on this in subsequent chapters). It is also known that certain elements are transformed into others (under certain conditions, e.g. Na, Mg, K, Ca, N). However, it is difficult to imagine why and how heavy elements can be formed. 

 

In Figure 12.10, another atom is sketched in the centre line, but now embedded in the witch's kitchen (light red) of a star. Atoms collide with each other and are constantly hit by radiation and motion fragments. It is only by chance that two disturbances (in opposite directions and slightly offset) penetrate the aura of an atom (see arrows B and C) to create a new eye. If, by chance, a corresponding disturbance occurs simultaneously on the opposite side (D), a new pair of eyes can even form.

The probability of such disruptions is certainly given, but presumably just as many elements are destroyed in the process (and form the above movement fragments). On the one hand, the newly formed heavy elements can survive if they are pushed into the star (and form the massive core there). On the other hand, they could be accidentally ejected from the star, just as, for example, the solar wind occasionally flushes iron particles towards Earth and disrupts radio communication (which is also detailed in the following chapters).

 

Nuclear Fission 

Everyone knows about the devastating effect of the atomic bomb – but the origin of the gigantic forces is still unknown. Allegedly, a conversion of matter into energy takes place, according to the well-known formula E = m‧c^2 – but I assume that readers are aware of the tautology of these definitions. The cause of this release of force is based on the gaplessness of the ether. The decisive process is schematically sketched in Figure 12.10 below. 

 

Ignition occurs when a (heavy) atom experiences a strong disturbance from several sides at the same time (see arrows E). The aura of the atom is dented on various sides, i.e. all oscillations are shifted towards the centre, whereby the deflections are amplified. In the centre, however, the movements are already stretched to maximum deflection under normal conditions. Any further disturbance, especially if it occurs extremely quickly, leads to stress. 

 

As mentioned above, ether is a hard medium and is not compressible. A relaxation of the previous stress can only occur through a liberation blow, through weak points (area with currently not yet maximum tension), whereby one or more eyes are shot outwards (or even whole parts of the atom). This radiation occurs at the speed of light (and fragments of disordered movement fly out at a barely slower speed). These hit neighbouring atoms and thus the avalanche-like growth occurs. 

 

This process is thus set in motion by movements far below the speed of light. Only the bundling of these disturbances then results in a shortening of connecting lines, including their stronger diffraction. These accumulate in the centre and when the load limit is reached, the massive ether-movements result, which fly out into space at the speed of light. It should actually be clear that even with minimal reason and conscience, no human being can be responsible for producing this hard radiation here and leaving radioactive residual material on this planet for centuries to come.

 

Speculation: Bonding Forces 

All chemical bonds are based on just one force, the general ether-pressure, which pushes all units of coarse vibration together. The bond is more or less stable depending on the fit in terms of surface structure and the ether movement there. 

 

Valence Electrons and Bonds 

According to current theory, atoms can have one electron or many electrons arranged on different shells. In chemical compounds, however, only the outer shell is of importance, and this is only complete when all valence electrons are occupied. The inner shells are somehow submerged, especially as atoms with a high atomic number are hardly larger than atoms with a low atomic number. 

 

According to current theory, there are countless chemical compounds (especially in organic chemistry) and various rules have been developed that describe the different types of these atomic combinations. On the one hand, the atoms can exchange valence electrons; on the other hand, two atoms share an electron. There are double and multiple bonds, attraction due to negative/positive charge, bonding due to more/less neutrons than protons, taking into account the spin etc. – or not, i.e. no rule without exception. However, if there are neither protons nor neutrons and no electrons (distributed over many shells) in the atom, then the usual rules for chemical bonds cannot apply. 

Islands and Calm Waters 

In Figure 12.11, a spherical surface (yellow) is drawn at the top left of A and six eyes are drawn on this single shell (i.e. a carbon atom). The spin of the eyes must be paired, in this case three left-handed and three right-handed (marked blue and red respectively). Each arrangement of the spin results in islands of neighbouring eyes with the same spin. With these six eyes, there could be two islands in a triangular arrangement with left and right spin, or two elongated islands as shown here. 

 

At the top right of B, a band marks the area of an island (marked dark red on the outside, light red on the inside) at the north pole. At right angles to this is a U-shaped island at the South Pole (marked dark and light blue), each of which is about 120 degrees long. In the area of each island, all the clocks point in a similar direction, so that relatively synchronised oscillation is possible. This is therefore an advantageous movement pattern, even if opposite spins are not possible with exactly opposite eyes (which is a permissible exception in the case of carbon as well as in the following example of oxygen). 

 

In the area between the two islands, there must be a transition from left-handed to right-handed oscillation (or vice versa). As shown above and in the previous chapter, a smooth transition is possible, even from the superposition of two counter-rotating orbits. Standstill, linear motion, circular path with a small beat, narrow or wide oval path, rosette rotating forwards or backwards are only dependent on the relationship between the two radii and the two speeds. In the centre of the transition areas, there will always be a zone of relatively slow or smooth movement.

 

Docking Troughs 

Large-scale swinging requires high balancing cones, at smaller swinging the cone towards free ether is shorter. The aura of this atom will not be spherical, but will have two ridges (of the eyes and their edges), between which a trough (of the spin transition regions) runs all round. The deepest zone is between the end of one ridge and the centre of the other U-shaped ridge. These four positions are marked H (grey) in the picture (top right at B).

Hydrogen atoms can dock onto these troughs of quiet motion with their quiet pole (which in extreme cases is almost stationary, while the other pole is swinging out widely). This chemical compound is CH4, i.e. methane gas, the basis of all organic chemistry. 

 

In this picture below left at C, eight eyes are drawn on the surface of the sphere, i.e. the atom of oxygen. Here, the red island is elongated and has five eyes, while the blue island is short with only three eyes. This exception to the rule of spin-pairing is also absolutely permissible because oxygen can have various equivalent structures. Here there is room for only two valence electrons or there are only two troughs with a large distance between the two ridges. These in turn are marked with H (grey) and this combination of atoms is H20 – i.e. normal water. 

 

No Attraction of any Kind 

Neither the previous C nor this O attracts H. There is no negative/positive charge that could have an attractive effect (where negative charge is really a relatively thick layer of aura and positive charge is a thin or very thin layer of vibrating ether). No electrons are exchanged or shared and the number of neutrons does not matter. There are no more or less mysterious forces at work. 

 

Just atoms roll, tumble or fly around in space and meet by chance. If one atom has a hollow in its aura into which a part of the aura of another atom fits in terms of shape and movement and this second atom also happens to fall forwards into the hollow with the matching part, then a connection is formed. How long this connection is stable or the disturbance that breaks the connection depends solely on the accuracy of fit. 

 

It may be that the contours of the atoms involved have to be adjusted slightly in order to achieve a precise fit. This requires energy input. On the other hand, energy can also be released during the act of bonding if a more favourable overall structure is achieved through the mutual adjustment (this jerking movement propagates in the ether and accelerates or excites neighbouring atoms). As a rule, this is the case when eight faces (starting from the hexahedron of carbon) are completed (although this does not necessarily apply to all atoms with a higher atomic number, depending on the underlying geometrically ideal body). 

 

Pressure Only

All bonds, no matter how weak or strong, are caused exclusively by the general ether-pressure. The fine swinging of free ether from the whole environment is overpowering compared to the formations of locally coarse swinging. When atoms come close together, they protect each other and are pushed together in the direction of this pressure shadow. This is the only effective force of all chemical or physical compounds. 

 

Today, the Casimir effect is favoured as proof of the existence of ether: Two flat plates that are very close together are pushed further together without a known force being able to be named for this. It is assumed that only waves of a certain frequency can penetrate the space between them, while the pressure of waves of all frequencies is applied to the outer sides. This results in a measurable pressure – of minimal magnitude, i.e. a weak proof, moreover for an ether of indeterminate definition. 

 

The ether of my exact definition is a gapless substance and this results in movement necessities, for example the restriction of maximum diffraction of connecting lines. If this boundary condition threatens to be exceeded, the strength of ether-motions becomes obvious – see nuclear fission above. As inevitably as a motion complex is torn apart there, as vehemently is an atom held together within itself and as consistently is the connection of suitable aura surfaces effected. 

 

Common Aura 

Strong connections occur when the atoms involved can form a common aura. As an example of this, two H20 molecules are shown schematically in the bottom right of this picture. The oxygen atom O is slightly larger, its spherical surface is dark blue and its aura is marked light blue. The docked hydrogen atoms H are shown as dark red spheres with a light red aura. Both complement each other or are enclosed by a common aura E (yellow). 

 

The calm pole of H docks to a trough of O, the other pole of H is vibrating relatively far. The aura is therefore more expansive there, which is referred to as a negative charge. The opposite side of the O represents the ridge with its relatively synchronised oscillation. The O of another molecule could actually dock there because it vibrates in the same way on its ridge, but this does not happen because both vibrate in opposite directions (but the ridge of one O atom can nestle in the hollow of a second one, resulting in ozone O2). 

 

The H of another H20 molecule temporarily docks onto the ridge of the O and forms a hydrogen bridge F. However, there is no constant common aura there because this H pole vibrates too violently. In addition, this constellation is susceptible to external interference and soon breaks apart (only to form a new bridge again). Only when the molecules are no longer flying around so quickly in space these compounds can crystallise into stable ice – with a common aura. 

 

The components of a solid are also held together by the general ether-pressure or a common aura also forms around matter. The cohesion is not only determined from the outside, because there is also a common vibrating zone between the particles. This also shows a certain order that provides stability against disturbances. This emergence leads to the formation of crystals or even to the self-organisation of previously independent units. Iron, for example, forms a special inner aura that extends beyond the poles as magnetism (but this aspect also requires a description in separate chapters).

Continents and Dislocation 

Atoms can therefore have many eyes, which are in principle arranged in pairs and have opposite spin. Two or more neighbours will inevitably vibrate in the same direction, i.e. form previous islands. This means that the aura will also only have a few areas of different spin towards the outside. The old model of atoms was orientated towards the solar system with the nucleus (as the Sun) and electrons (as planets). Now a comparison with the Earth is more appropriate: on the surface of the atoms there are only a few continents (the above islands, also with different contours, especially the mountain ridges) and a few oceans in between (the above transition areas, to which other atoms can dock if necessary). 

 

With the same number of eyes, these islands can be grouped differently, which in turn results in isotopes as well as different molecules, which, for example, also result in differentiated crystallisation. The carbon shown above (Figure 12.11 at B) consists of two islands of three eyes each. An alternative is shown in Figure 12.12 on the left. 

There, four eyes (labelled 1, 2, 3 and 4, all e.g. with clockwise spin) form a large island surface (blue). The two remaining eyes (5 and 6, with left-hand spin) form a narrow island (red). On both sides of this ridge there are transition areas where four hydrogen atoms could dock (here two positions are marked dark grey and with H). However, the double peak of the narrow ridge of a second C atom could also dock (rotated by 180 degrees) in a two-position depression (DB, light grey). This results in a double bond. 

 

As an example, the graph of the ethylene C2H4, an unsaturated hydrocarbon with a double bond, is sketched in the picture above right. Although the two ridges together form a new island with the same spin, the ridges are nevertheless curved in opposite directions. This is why, for example, unsaturated oils and fats are very reactive. On the other hand, this molecule is an important basic chemical in petrochemistry, e.g. for the production of polyethylene, PVC and other products. 

 

The benzene ring C6H6 with its three double bonds (a toxic substance, but at the same time the basic material for many chemical products) is sketched in this picture below right. The C atoms form a closed and therefore relatively stable unit. On the other hand, the remaining positions for the docking of the H atoms are somewhat obstructed. Today it is assumed that the C ring forms a plane and that there are ring-shaped electron clouds above and below it (i.e. the H atoms are dislocalised). In reality, this phenomenon clearly results as an extended, common aura to equalise this somewhat tense arrangement. 

 

This formation now definitively proves that there are no electrons that rotate around a nucleus like a planet. But the image of an electron or charge cloud is also misleading, because these clouds can hardly consist of individual particles (like drops of water). Just as little can the atomic nuclei be made of hard material. But my comparison with the continents and oceans is also inaccurate in that everything is just a uniform plasma and differs locally only by different patterns of movement. Nevertheless, the geography of these areas of movement is of crucial importance for understanding chemistry. 

 

New Model

Actually, I was only looking for the perfect movement pattern of ether on a spherical surface. At first I assumed it must be a perfect sphere and all motions must run totally synchronously at circled tracks (and exclusively left-turning). It was only from the above considerations that the necessity and the possibility of diverse movement patterns emerged, which led to a new model of the atomic structure (which was not actually my intention, at least not in this context with the Milky Way, Sun and planets). 

 

I derived this ether model of atoms from some data on the chemical elements, but it stands in stark contradiction to all current ideas of chemistry and quantum theories. Compared to their complex formulae and seemingly precise calculations, the listing of hundreds of sub-elementary particles with the strangest properties, this ether model appears downright primitive. In fact, it only presupposes the real existence of ether and its decisive property of being a gapless plasma. Everything else follows necessarily from this. 

 

Of course, I was only able to demonstrate this using a few examples above, but this already resulted in (self-)understandable explanations of previous phenomena, right up to basic concepts of physics such as mass or nuclear forces. It would be desirable for chemists and physicists to list all the inconsistencies in current theories and especially the implied or unexplained preconditions (because so far every new discovery has only brought new questions and new models – up to completely unreal conditions). 

 

Quintessence 

was originally the Latin term for the fifth element, which Aristotle (384 - 322 BC) assumed and called ether. In his worldmodel, the ether existed as a massless, unchanging, eternal substance beyond the sphere of the moon, against whose background all phenomena exist. This fifth element was endowed with completely different properties to the earthly four elements of fire, water, earth and air.

 

For more than a hundred years, the concept of ether has been obsolete (since Einstein, who, however, in his mature years, described the existence of ether as indispensable). It was or still is impossible to imagine how solid particles could fly through a hard medium. In the meantime, however, we know that ultimately no solid matter exists, but that only motion remains. It would only take a small step to imagine that only movement patterns move in space, but this should not be a vacuum, but rather consist of something that moves. And this must not be many things, but only one thing – so it can only be a gapless plasma. We should not continue to smash atoms in order to gain knowledge from dead scrap. It would make far more sense to study the geometry of movement of living atoms in order to gain valuable and usable insights. 

 

If chemists and physicists were to take up this approach, they could soon develop the above examples of movement patterns into a completely new world view which, with its simple mechanics of movement, would make the diversity of all phenomena truly understandable. Unfortunately, science does not currently need a new approach as long as, for example, the pharmaceutical industry continues to come up with campaigns such as bird and swine flu or the nuclear lobby pushes CO2 as a climate killer. In this respect, an ether model of atomic construction will at best be developed by a new generation of scientists – although this would be desirable before another hundred years pass.

13 Ether – All from One 1]

Einstein's Reverse Conclusion 

The scientific idea of the existence of a light ether around 1900 failed due to the problem that solid matter could hardly pass through a medium of high density. Einstein was therefore extremely grateful when he eliminated the need for an ether. Towards the end of his career, however, Einstein doubted whether the relativistic view and his theories (the theory of relativity RT) could ultimately endure. He himself could only offer one correction. Unfortunately, this observation has not been realised by his protagonists to this day. Because this is so rare to read, I quote from his speech on 5 May 1920 at Leiden/Netherland University: 

 

To summarise, we can say: according to the general theory of relativity, space is endowed with physical qualities; thus, in this sense, an ether exists. According to the general theory of relativity, a space without an ether is unthinkable; for in such a space there would not only be no propagation of light, but also no possibility of the existence of scales and clocks, and thus also no spatio-temporal distances in the sense of physics. However, this ether must not be thought of as having the property, characteristic of ponterable media, of consisting of parts that can be tracked through time; the concept of motion must not be applied to it.

 

A 3D space and time are needed to describe physical processes, not only according to RT, but in general. However, these are only fictitious scales and calculation variables, where, for example, the geometric and temporal zero point can be set arbitrarily. If space consisted of a vacuum, there would still only be nothing in reality. This is why Einstein makes it clear that only the presence of ether gives (abstract) space its (real) physical quality. 

 

Secondly, he states that light naturally requires a medium because nothing can move in a void. 

 

Thirdly, he makes it clear that this medium cannot be made up of weighable particles like others (i.e. it must be a coherent plasma). In normal particle media (e.g. air), losses are unavoidable (i.e. there can be no energy constancy). 

 

His fourth observation is remarkable: the concept of motion cannot be applied to ether. No wonder, then, that contemporary physicists (and current ones) did not take note of these statements (especially since Einstein could no longer make these aspects generally understandable).

Free Ether cf]

Note: Here at this text often is used term ether-point and represents only one position within ether to describe movement processes. In no case this ether-point is a material particle, atom or molecule. 

 

Unlike our ancestors, today's science refers to the ether, i.e. the 95 per cent of matter unknown to us, as vacuum, black matter or dark energy. This ether is coherent, stationary, invisible, incompressible, inflexible, particle-, gap-, colour- and tasteless and cannot be weighed, which makes things so difficult for science in our actio = reactio (particle) world.

 

In principle, the entire universe consists of stationary ether, which is constantly oscillating within itself. Only a small part of it forms such patterns of movement that form the appearance of atoms or matter in the conventional sense. I call these patterns bounded ether BE. In contrast, I call the rest free ether FE, which only occurs in pure form far away from material accumulations.

 

At picture 13.01 schematic free ether FE is drawn as blue background and represents universe. This free ether consists of extremely fine vibrating vortices on small, narrow radii and represents everything subtle, i.e. the entire space between the celestial bodies.

Embedded in this finely vibrating free ether is so-called bounded ether BE, which vibrates on much larger radii than the free ether and represents all coarse matter. These are atoms, molecules, all elements, gases, objects, an asteroid or anything else. It is the 5 per cent of all matter known to us, of which science believes it can explain our entire physical world view. This bounded ether also does not consist of particles, but only of complex vortex structures of the ether within the ether. Everything consists only of this one ether with its infinitely diverse vortex structures – and this particle-less ether, with its various vibrations or trembling, is constantly in motion at large and tiny radii.

 

Balancing Movements cf]

From the coarse swinging of an object of bounded ether BE, there is a transitional area to the fine swinging of the free ether or the universe. These are ether balancing movements from the coarse swinging of the bounded ether to the fine swinging of the free ether. See the radially arranged lines of oscillation in Fig. 13.01 at S. An object is therefore not limited to its outer contour alone, but occupies far more space than that which we can perceive with our limited senses. Conversely, the balancing movements of the free ether also extend far into the respective object with its coarsely oscillating vortex patterns until their oscillations have aligned in the centre of the object. 

 

A good example of the space required for this is electrolysis, for example, where charged particles move from the anode to the cathode. However, if a coarse-meshed grid is placed between the poles, the current flow is interrupted. The atoms cannot even pass through millimetre-sized openings, which proves that the atoms and their balancing movements take up much more space than their actual size, which is entirely consistent with Heisenberg's uncertainty theory, in which it is not possible to determine the exact size of atoms.

This ether-oscillation can be compared to a multiple crank (analogous to the crankshaft of an engine), see the highly exaggerated schematic representation of a multiple crank in Fig. 13.02, where the curved black curve only represents the positions of ether-points (no particles) and the light grey area represents the range of motion of the oscillation on quantum small radii. 

 

The intensity of the equalising oscillations/movements depends on the material properties of the objects. The greater the difference and density of a substance to the free ether, the greater and more intense its oscillation on larger radii and the more space is required for it. 

 

You may wonder where this energy for these permanent movements is supposed to come from. But nobody questions the fact that temperature is always an expression of movement. A pebble heated by the Sun on the banks of a river is in reality a conglomerate of atoms and molecules whirling around wildly, consisting of ether-vortices. Only from a temperature of -273.15 degrees Celsius, absolute zero, do the atoms and molecules presumably stop moving.

Movement in Space 3]

So what really moves? All ether. As soon as a movement occurs, all the surrounding ether is directly affected. In this plasma, movement can no longer be stopped. However, there is neighbouring ether everywhere, so an ether-point can only move a minimal distance and it must always return to its original location. As a rule, therefore, movement occurs on minimally small circular paths. Due to superpositions, these are practically never exact circles, rather spiral sections of the path form a three-dimensional ball of movement. 

 

In a first simplified representation, one could imagine the inherent movement of the ether like a la-ola wave in a stadium, where the spectators stand up one after the other, but in principle remain in their seats. Many such la-ola waves stacked on top of each other result in a synchronised pattern of movement of the ether, which races or moves through space at the speed of light. cf]

 

A photon can move through the ether with virtually no resistance, because it only expands the radius of an already existing rotational movement slightly at the front and this immediately falls back to its normal oscillation, see Fig. 13.03. Some kind of radiation is constantly racing through space from all directions. Even far out in space, these overlap, so that the free ether is also constantly in oscillating motion in a confined space and short orbital sections.

Unlike a photon, an electron does not have to race through space, but can remain in its position. However, it can also be pushed forwards by an impulse. However, this electron ether volume does not then move forwards in space, but only its motion structure in the ether is shifted forwards. The motion pattern of the electron is temporarily imposed on the ether at the front, but at the back the overpowering free ether re-establishes the original state (and thus pushes the electron forwards in the ether). Temporary conversion to more complex pattern affects peripheral ether beyond actual electron-volume (and thus previous pushing of mass is necessary). When the electron is in motion (without resistance in this ideal medium), it exhibits inertia. When it collides with other bounded ether (local units of motion such as electrons or atoms), this becomes effective as kinetic energy.

 

In contrast to the simple electron, atoms have a much more complex vortex structure. It therefore requires much stronger impulses to set them in motion from a resting state. A lot more ether volume has to be forced into the new form of motion along the way. However, because real ether has properties of fictive ideal-gas, also these vortex-balls will move ahead without resistance within ether-space (which is expressed by correspondingly larger inertia resp. stronger kinetic energy). 

 

There is no water-substance, helium-substance, carbon-substance, acid-substance or iron-substance and no elementary and sub-elementary particle-substance. There is only one material substance, ether, which contains local units with specific movement patterns (comprising a maximum of 5% of all ether). The ether volume of an atom is not more important than the same volume of its ether environment. Everything consists of the same substance. No solid matter has to struggle through the dense ether, no portion of ether flies through space, only the structure of motion is passed on forwards. This is analogous to sound: in which no air particles fly forwards, rather this pattern of compression with subsequent decompression now travels forwards and behind it all particles are back in their old postion. 

 

This resolves the above light ether dilemma: the Earth is not a solid lump either, but only a huge collection of complex vortex units of ether in ether. The Earth flies through space by shifting all movement patterns to a different location. In the same way, we humans fly along in this spaceship.

Light and Ether 62]

Ether is transparent or invisible, at least the free ether, and we cannot see its movements. However, certain patterns of movement are called light, which is emitted by localised patterns of movement (to discharge stress). And there are lots of local movement patterns that reflect radiation in different ways (everything we can see as colours plus the frequencies invisible to our senses). 

 

In the past, an ether was assumed to be the medium of light propagation, but this could not be confirmed by experiments by Michelson and others. This is why today this light ether is considered non-existent. 

 

No medium was recognised as necessary for all other electromagnetic phenomena either. Instead, the idea of fields seems to be sufficient because their properties and effects are known and sufficiently accurate calculations are possible. However, we still do not know why and how physical fields deliver the respective results. It is absolutely correct: light ether does not exist – because this medium does not only transport light, but is the real basis of all phenomena. 

 

In addition to the above differentiation between the fictitious world of comparative scales and the real world of ether-plasma, a further distinction must be made between primary ether-movements and the secondary world of the resulting phenomena. This difference becomes clear in the comparison of sound and light.

Plasma and Particle Motion 62]

In Figure 13.04, black represents a quiet pitch-dark night. A car emits a beam of light and a sound signal at the same time (from the same energy source). The light can still be seen many kilometres away and is only slightly deflected or absorbed by particles in the air. The energy of the sound, however, fizzles out sooner or later, i.e. is lost in the form of heat. 

 

Sound is a phenomenon in the world of particles. A pressure wave is generated due to mechanical movement (the horn), the air particles transfer their momentum to subsequent particles. Due to chaotic molecular movement, this process does not proceed linearly, but in a zigzag. At a speed of around 0.45 km/sec, this results in a speed of sound of only around 0.3 km/sec. Parts of the initial impulse also act in lateral directions, resulting in this cone of sound and ultimately total attenuation. 

 

Light, on the other hand, is obviously only slightly hindered by the air and travels 100,000 times faster because it represents a movement directly in the ether. Of course, one could argue that light (quanta, photons, as particles or waves) flies through the void (as according to current theory) and is therefore that fast – wouldn't it there be strange phenomena.

Acceleration after Deceleration 62]

Figure 13.05 shows the well-known beer glass problem. Sound and light are sent through air in the direction of a glass, penetrate the glass, pass through the water inside, then through the glass wall again and then move forwards again through air. The speed of sound and light in the respective medium are roughly indicated per km/s. The black dots schematically represent individual impulses, the respective distances between the dots correspond to their paths per time unit (whereby the relation of sound to light is not to scale). In this representation, the scattering of the sound is not taken into account. 

 

The sound impulse only travels at around 0.3 km/s in air. In glass, the atoms are much closer together and practically in a row in its crystal lattice, so that the impulse travels much faster there, at around 5.3 km/s. Atoms are elastically suspended in this lattice, although some of the momentum is also dispersed in a lateral direction. 

 

In the following water, molecules are much looser, so that sound impulses are delayed again to about 1.5 km/s. Surprisingly, the propagation speed is accelerated again in the next glass wall. The residual sound energy then creeps onwards in the following air at its original 0.3 km/s. 

 

The forward movement of light behaves the other way round: in air (or vacuum in the sense of air emptiness) it is travelling at a maximum of around 300,000 km/s and is reduced to around 3/4 in glass and around 2/3 in water. It is now undeniable that light accelerates its speed when it subsequently continues to travel through glass and in air. 

 

This phenomenon of automatic re-acceleration contradicts all the rules of conventional physics, regardless of how one argues, whether considered as a wave or photon particle with or without mass. It remains a mystery to all physicists how an impulse that has been reduced in its propagation due to resistance should subsequently pick up speed again of its own accord. 

 

This fact of varying velocities has to be realised, by following the path of a sound impulse and a light impulse in this illustration. We are familiar with the world of particles and therefore the accelerated progress of sound in solid matter (glass) and decelerated speed in liquid (water) is obvious to us (except that here again the scattering losses are not taken into account). It is also obvious that the impulse arriving at the glass surface is transported onwards faster (because it is more direct) (and slower again in air via a zigzag path). We are familiar with energy or information transport via particles. 

 

Being well known, it is assumed that light propagates in a vacuum and therefore does not require a medium. The deceleration of light in denser masses would be somewhat understandable if the glass lattice were considered an obstacle. According to common understanding, however, this autonomous re-acceleration is never possible. Where is the additional energy that is essential for any acceleration supposed to come from?

 

Sound is the movement of particles; depending on the density of the particles, the impulse propagates more or less quickly. Light, however, is supposedly not bound to any medium, so that the relative density or emptiness of material particles cannot have any influence on it. Conversely, the question arises as to why light only propagates at a limited speed in the pure vacuum of space instead of self-accelerating to infinite speed.

 

Light Medium 62]

This phenomenon can only be explained if it is assumed that light can also only propagate in a medium, not like sound at the particle level, but within the light ether itself. Due to the enormous speed of light, it was assumed that (analogous to sound) this light medium must have an enormous density. However, it was then completely incomprehensible how massive matter could move through massive light ether. The fundamental misunderstanding is still that any hard matter (such as the Earth or even just electrons or photon particles) would fly through the ether like projectiles. The above zero-point plasma (Fig. 03.04) clearly shows that there is no hard matter anywhere. The atoms frozen there form plasma bubbles that can expand over millimetres – and there is nothing recognisable except movement (in this case, however, largely the movement patterns of the prison). There is not ether here and matter there, rather everything is just ether-substance and its motion-pattern. 

 

Everything is just vortices in the ether. Only vortex structures move through the ether. However, the forward movement of vortices requires that all surrounding ether moves accordingly (to a lesser extent towards the outside). This regrouping in front and beside and behind the vortex can not happen instantaneously. Nothing is pushed fast ahead or aside, but at constant speed only motion tracks are widened (and narrowed again after vortex has passed by). Therefore, there is no infinitely fast speed, and a light-vortex complex can only fly through the universe at a limited speed. Furthermore, nothing can fly forwards in a straight line. Light, for example, can only spiral forwards.

Radiation

Even far away from celestial bodies, empty space is full of movement, e.g. in that electromagnetic radiation is constantly racing through space from all directions – as this figure roughly illustrates. The photons are not particles, but a structure of movement travelling through the ether. In principle, this is like a corkscrew with only one gear, which spirals forwards through the ether. 

 

This radiation is produced when atoms collide rapidly, where the bending tolerance of the ether is maximised due to opposing motion. Before a kink in connecting lines can occur, a loop is catapulted out to the side, which flies away at the speed of light. One turn is enough to relax the situation. 

 

In Fig. 13.06 (and in Fig.13.07) a section with an ether-point (blue) of the free ether through which this wave runs is delimited on the right. The black dots mark neighbouring ether-points, whose movement is observed here. The green line in the centre marks a window, which is shown on the left of the cross-section (green). In the side view, each ether-point moves up and down. Within its window, as this photon passes through, it is deflected from its central resting position on an outward and inward spiral path. 

This representation is very schematic, e.g. this upward and downward movement also requires a circulating equalising movement, in each case at right angles to the direction of the radiation (which is called the magnetic component). It is important to note, however, that only this motion structure moves forwards (the electric component), while all ether remains relatively stationary within its window of motion. 

 

It is also important to note that when this photon passes through, the ether moves neither on perfect circular paths nor on beautiful sinusoidal curves. There are always beating movements with increasing and decreasing speed. One section of the path is travelled relatively quickly and one relatively slowly. During one half of the time, a relatively long path is travelled and during the other half a relatively short path (as described in the superposition of two circular paths swinging forwards and backwards in the later section Swinging with beat).

At picture 13.07 at A left side is sketched cross-sectional view through central window (green) and right side view. In B, the same movement sequence is shown again, only from a 90 degree rotated view. Analogue movements take place in neighbouring windows (green), only with a time delay. 

 

Wave Salad

In this picture below at C, previous waves are now sketched as arrows. Not only one radiation passes through each window, but an infinite number of rays of different frequency, amplitude and direction intersect at the same time. An observed ether-point therefore not only performs the above loop movement, but is also continuously pushed back and forward. The manifold overlays result a confused path, as schematically sketched at C left side of window (where in reality all movements are curved with smooth transition). 

 

Each motion of an ether-point into one direction is redirected by a second wave motion, is interrupted or pushed back. Every clean wave is practically deformed to infinity. It is actually highly astonishing that any radiation can still be detected as such from this deformed wave salad. 

 

However, with the help of radio technology, a receiver can very well filter out a specific programme from the confusion of the ether. And our eyes can also recognise the colour of light from the multitude of electromagnetic waves – even if its photons have already become very old on their journey through (ether) space. Depending on the focus of the respective aid, information can therefore be extracted from the general and fundamental confusion.

Like Icebergs in a Whirlpool

Icebergs are purely passive, they simply drift with the ocean current (see Fig. 13.08 at A, light blue the sea, dark blue the iceberg). Both the sea and the iceberg consist of H2O, whereby in liquid water only a few areas have a different structure and appear as the solid matter of ice. It is exactly the same in the solar system: everywhere nothing but ether, only in a few places do its movements have a specially ordered structure, which appear as atoms and locally form large accumulations in the form of celestial bodies. These drift around the Sun in the huge whirlpool of the ecliptic – and need as little pushing or pulling force as the iceberg above on its journey southwards. 

 

Thrust Through Impact

However, there is a significant difference in this comparison: ether is basically stationary and there is no real ether-flow. The ether is only ever oscillating on more or less ordered paths. Free ether moves chaotically on very short sections of track. At this picture at B, free ether is drawn light blue and its total neutral movements are symbolised by circles with arrows. At previous example of radiation, spiral of movement of photon is impressed onto ether temporarily, when this wave (red) races through ether. 

 

The whirlpool of the ecliptic also consists of free ether, but the movements take place with reversed roles. In C, the dark blue circle represents an atom that only vibrates within itself. It is neutral to the outside and hangs free-floating in space (analogue to the passive iceberg). The appearance of a flow only results from the fact that the ether is not neutral here, but has movements with a beat, as symbolised here by the circles with the thick red arrow.

This beating is directed in turning sense of ecliptic, everywhere the ether shows this movement and all material particles thus show this component of movement. This beating runs fast and far forwards during one half-time and slowly backwards in the other. With each beat, motion-structure of each atom is shifted some ahead, see further down Swinging with beat and following.

 

If the above ocean current can be compared to a conveyor belt, the whirlpool of the ecliptic can be compared to a vibrating belt. All planets are permanently pushed forward, always circling around, although all ether in principle remains stationary, only the structures of the material movement patterns wander through space. 

 

The planets therefore revolve around the Sun without the need for supposed gravitational forces. The entire solar system revolves around the galactic centre, drifting only in a marginal vortex of the Milky Way within stationary ether. All atoms are only ever pushed forwards in space by the special beating of the ether in the respective area. Even the entire galaxy is not held together by gravity. Therefore, the galactic centre does not have to have the mass (in the form of black holes) that arithmetically results from the universal gravitational constant. However, a locally effective gravitational force is required for an apple to fall from a tree. 

Bound Ether

An apple consists of atoms and these are bounded ether. In contrast to free ether with its small-scale, chaotic movements, these are areas with ordered and wider movements. All movements take place at the same absolute speed (at least at the speed of light), only on narrow or wider paths. At picture 13.09 upside at A is sketched such an inflated area (light blue). Left and right side are ether-points (blue) of free ether. Within light blue area for example are drawn two ether-points (black) and bended connecting line marks neighbouring points. 

 

At B again windows (light blue) are drawn as cross-sections, within which each motion schematic is sketched. Left and right side, ether is moving at these narrow spiral-cluster-tracks. At far right side is sketched, at all chaos, tracks of neighbouring ether-points, also of free ether, may show only gradual differences. 

 

Towards the centre, the movements become calmer on more elongated paths, represented here by circles with arrows. Or seen the other way round: Each wide-range movement demands balancing areas, where radius of movements are gradually reduced down to narrow movements of free ether. If the free ether momentarily moves in the same direction as the bounded ether, the latter's swinging is intensified. While its wide swinging continues, the free ether will move in the opposite direction again. This results the general ether-pressure onto everything roughly swinging. 

 

The double-crank sketched here at A, for example, is the movement pattern of an electron. Many similar oscillations can run parallel to each other, e.g. as a movement pattern of an electric charge layer or in the form of etheric walls. Several such double-cranks can also be positioned radially to each other, resulting in the movement patterns of the atoms.

At C schematic is sketched cross-sectional view through atom, where at this plane eight of previous double-cranks (dark blue) are arranged radial. Each black curve of neighbouring ether-points is drawn. Surrounding free ether affects pressure (see arrows) at all sides onto this wide swinging unit. The connecting lines are pushed inwards like springs. All the connecting lines meet in the centre, so that this push leads to an expansion of the oscillation amplitudes. However, space is limited in the sphere and the connecting lines can only be subjected to bending up to a maximum. An equilibrium is achieved with a volume that is almost the same for all atoms. This also means that only around one hundred movement patterns can form the stable chemical elements.

 

At D, this atom is shown once again with the connecting lines. These meet in the centre, where all movements must run synchronously in a confined space. Although only the same ether is present everywhere, this nucleus (red) appears hard – without an elementary or sub-elementary particle ever being present anywhere in reality. There is only this inner core area (red) with maximum tension under all neighbouring ether-points and towards the outside in all directions an aura of balancing movements towards the free ether (dark blue).

Free or in a Compound

In Fig. 13.10, various atoms (with red nucleus and green aura) are floating in the free ether (blue). These structures can be single-atomic (as in A) or two identical atoms can stick together with their surfaces to form H2, for example (in B). This phenomenon is relatively common because the atoms really do offer each other pressure shadows. Only the noble gases are so round that they do not have any surfaces to adhere to each other. The pressure shadow effect can also be measured with larger accumulations of atoms, e.g. between steel spheres using sensitive torsion balances or between flat plates as the Casimir force. However, it is still not an attractive force at all, but only the result of the general ether-pressure.

 

Atoms are not normally perfectly symmetrical, rather their aura surfaces form hills and valleys – and when these fit together, atoms are pressed together to form molecules, for example H2O (in the case of C). The stability of these bonds varies depending on how well they fit together. This allows us to gauge how strong this general ether-pressure actually is: for each atom according to the strong nuclear force, for the molecules according to their binding forces. 

 

Atoms and molecules can form further accumulations of varying strength, whereby the movement of the ether between the particles involved is important. At D for example, four atoms of same kind of movements are sketched, here strongly simplified represented by swinging in same direction (left-turning) at circled track. In the centre, this results in counter-rotating movements (clockwise), practically as if cogwheels were meshing.
 

However, the movement between the atoms is in opposite directions (see arrows of the two lower atoms). Such divergent movements require distance, which is given, for example, when the atoms are arranged at different levels. Then the central ether movement is clockwise like a spiral staircase – and this is the magnetic flux in iron or permanent magnets. This twisting movement is so stable and strong that it continues to act out into space at the North Pole of the magnet and already outside the South Pole it pulls the free ether into this form of movement (clockwise with a view to the South Pole). 

 

Above molecules or also all loose compounds build common aura, onto surface of which outer general ether-pressure affects and keeps compound together. The bond is particularly strong in crystals, where the ether can form a suitable pattern of movement between the particles. 

 

In this picture at E, four atoms are again schematically drawn, whose similar surface structure is again represented by arrows. Here, for example, they are arranged alternately (their poles offset by 180°) so that they appear to be alternately left- and right-turning. There are symmetrical movements both inside and outside, so that all movements support each other (area marked in light blue). This sketch only shows the rough principle of a common aura and adequately organised movements inside. In reality, many different arrangements are possible and this results in the special properties of crystals. 

Swinging with Beat 

In simplified terms, the ether can be imagined as a parallel oscillation of all neighbouring ether-points on circular paths. There are practically always superpositions, as shown in Fig. 13.11 at A. There is a rotation around the centre (light blue circle). At the radius R1 there is a second rotation with R2 (small red circle). Both circular movements are anti-clockwise with the same angular velocity. 

 

In the middle at B, twelve positions of observed black ether-point are drawn at centre. It passes through sections of different sizes per time unit (see black lines). As explained above, acceleration and deceleration are inevitable. 

The ether moves relatively quickly over a relatively long distance (marked in red), alternating with a short distance relatively slowly (marked in light red). Instead of original circled tracks, there is a dented section and an extended section. This pattern of motions I call tracks-with-beat (at C marked by arrows of different intensity). 

 

As all neighbouring ether must behave synchronous, this results one area of movement pattern swinging with beat. Within gapless connected ether, theoretically this area reaches infinite far into all directions. This pattern can only be limited to a local area if the beating is synchronised in a circle. The superposition of two oscillating movements inevitably results in a movement on a non-uniform path with phases of deceleration and acceleration. Bounded ether thus represents an area of relative wide swinging, where always a section of track with beat will occur. 

 

This is the characteristic of the ether-whirlpool around the Sun (and the whirlpool of the galaxy and around other celestial bodies functions in the same way). At the outer boundary of these vortex systems there is no superposition, towards the centre the radius R2 becomes larger (the beating component becomes stronger), towards the centre R2 decreases to zero (so that e.g. in the Sun only the uniform circular rotation R1 remains.

Propulsion through Deformation 

Each beating component within the solar-whirlpool pushes each atom (and thus the entire Earth) a little forwards. To put it more correctly, the motion structure of each unit of bounded ether is shifted slightly forwards with each beat. At picture 13.12 at A schematic is sketched an atom (light blue surface), marked only by a spiral connecting line to mark radial vortex-spindles (dark blue).

 

The atom is compressed from all sides by the constant shaking of the surrounding free ether (see arrows). Only about a hundred chemical elements can withstand this pressure because their internal motion structure is stable and well organised. 

All atoms have a smooth transition to the free ether. Including this aura, the atoms are probably much larger than is generally assumed. The outer areas of the atoms are elastic to a certain extent. Only in the centre do so many vortices converge in a small space that it appears hard and solid as a core. 

 

In B, the thick red arrows represent the fact that the surrounding ether currently has a beating, upward component. The atom is dented at the bottom. There, the spiral oscillation is compressed in the longitudinal direction (at E, comparable to a spiral spring) and continues transversely accordingly. Because the internal kinetic energy can never be stopped, the soft boundary of the atom is slightly expanded at the bottom (see arrows). At the top of the atom, the beating component causes the ether to run away from the atom. At F, the vortex spindle is stretched longer and the outer surface of the atom becomes slimmer. 

 

In the next moment at C, the faster beating changes to the deceleration phase, i.e. the surrounding ether now beats back much more slowly. Here the free ether can now push the atom back into its original shape, especially the expansions in the lower region (see arrows at H). Internally, the different tensions of the two spiral springs also balance each other out, causing the centre (G) to move slightly upwards.

Cranks and Spindles 

The neighbouring ether-points in the ecliptic plane can only show minimal deviations from neighbour to neighbour. In contrast, the oscillation in the ether above and below the ecliptic plane can be reduced over a relatively short distance. You can imagine this like a mobile hanging from the ceiling (see Fig. 13.14 at A and B): A (red) ball hangs from a thread and swings in a circle (with R2). Its (blue) suspension point hangs from a thread and also swings in a circle (with R1). The second thread is fixed at the top (grey dot) to the ceiling (which corresponds to the free ether at rest). The two threads represent vertically neighbouring ether-points. These connecting lines are moving along a cone-shaped mantle. Although the horizontal extent of the whirlpool can be huge, the vertical threads can be relatively short. This is why these structures are usually lens-shaped and flat. 

 

By the way: The connecting lines represent neighbouring ether-points. However, there is no straight line within ether, synchronous to each other e.g. all neighbours are swinging at spiral curves (see C). These oscillating connecting lines above and below the ecliptic plane (red dotted line) together form a huge crank. In principle, this oscillation is analogous to the tiny movements of a photon, in the electron or the vortex spindles (D) of atoms. 

Depending on the relation of the radii, rotational speeds and the sense of rotation of superimpositions, the ether-points move along very different paths. Although this gapless ether is an extremely viscous substance, practically infinite variations of movements are possible. Even within an atom, variations with double and multiple cranks are possible, resulting in the isotopes of iron, for example. Beyond the physical phenomena, the ether has an infinite bandwidth for vibrations of all kinds.

Air Potential Vortices

Each small wind rose represents a potential vortex of air particles (and dust). Their formation is shown schematically in Figure 13.15 above. Even if there is no general air movement, two small air streams can meet by chance (see arrows at A). They will curl up (at B) and a vortex (C) can develop with much more intensive movement than was originally given. More air flows diagonally inwards. The rotational speed increases inwards and only the eye (light blue) forms a rigid vortex with a constant angular velocity. 

 

This self-acceleration occurs because the atmospheric pressure of the wide surroundings is countered by a lower lateral pressure (in the radial direction) of the rotating movement. The diagonal inflow increasingly transforms static pressure into dynamic flow pressure. However, such material potential-vortexes can only exist as long as the corresponding axial air masses can flow upwards and spiral downwards again far outwards. In a material potential-vortex, particles therefore move far through space according to a certain pattern of movement. 

 

Ether Potential Vortices 

Analogue to this, potential vortices can develop within the ether, but they have a fundamentally different characteristic. The starting point of a local ether-vortex could be two disturbances in the general swinging of the ether (e.g. random monster waves from superimposed radiations).

These are sketched here again as circling swinging with beat (see arrow-circles D). Both beats point (also randomly) in opposite directions. Stronger than between separate air-particles, within gapless ether-movements are transferred to neighbouring ether-points. These opposite beats become common movements along circled connecting line (see dotted arrows E).

 

Below right side of picture, this swinging-with-beat-in-a-circle is sketched by many arrow-circles (see G). Also all neighbouring ether-points inside and outside must show analogue movements. Towards outside, generally this beating will be reduced (here represented by smaller arrow-circles F), until finally passing over into neutral swinging of free ether of environment. Analogue to material potential-vortex, intensity towards inside can not be increased unlimited, so at centre again exists rigid vortex (H, dark green). 

 

In contrast to the material potential-vortex, no long-range movement takes place in the ether-vortex. There is always only a small-scale swinging of all ethers, mostly parallel to each other. There is a common swinging within the ether, but each ether-point swings around its own centre of rotation. Never any ether-parts within gapless ether can rotate around common central axis or can move far ahead within space (like air particles above). Opposite to material vortices, within ether also exists no sideward inflow and axial outflow. However, everything always behaves congruent to each other – and therefore ether-vortices are turning incessantly. Small wind-rose above is only a short interaction between air-particles and ether is not involved there. The large accumulations of dust of the stars, however, represent long-term and uniformly rotating masses and these interact with all the ether of these spaces. Nevertheless, it is generally true that the material movements are only the visible expression of the invisible ether-vortex. 

Ether-Whirlpools 

In the potential vortex clouds of electrons and in the vortex complexes of atoms, all movements must be synchronised in a confined space and therefore these small objects are spherical. In contrast, the whirlpools of galaxies, stars and planets are gigantic. In these large spaces, the ether-movements have more degrees of freedom and do not have to be spherical. Spiral galaxies as well as the ecliptic of the solar system are relatively flat discs. The Earth's whirlpool could have a lens-shaped contour with a thickness of only one tenth of the diameter. The whirlpools of the other planets will also be similar. Figure 13.16 shows a schematic cross-section and a longitudinal section of a whirlpool. 

 

A common feature within the whirlpool is this beating in the rotational direction of the system. Various ether-movements are possible within the wide spaces. Close to the core, however, the movements must be more strictly coordinated. This e.g. means, momentary downward-movement left side in principle must be opposed by upward-movement right side. This generally results in the equatorial plane being curved in an S-shape (see blue curve). In the area of this bending, for example, the geostationary satellites oscillate slightly north and south of the Earth's equator every day. Mercury wobbles with its eccentric and oblique orbit in this bend of the ecliptic whirlpool. 

 

In principle, in the gapless ether (without elasticity and with constant density), the distance between all neighbouring ether-points must remain constant. If here horizontal plane (blue curve) is bended, connecting lines (black curves) above and below must show analogue shape in principle, up to system axis (red curve). As a result, the axis of the central celestial bodies is always slightly inclined in relation to the equatorial plane of its whirlpool (e.g. the Sun, Earth and other planets).

In principle, the intensity of movements towards outside becomes smaller, at horizontal level like at vertical direction (see arrow-circles A - B and C - D), each up to surrounding free ether. Along vertical axis of system, radius of swinging is reduced relative easy, like sketched here by red (curved) cone E. The beating component of motion gradually becomes weaker from level to level, so divergence to free ether is equalised without problems. It is somewhat more difficult to balance the beating in the horizontal plane F. This results in the more planar shape of the whirlpools. In any case, a star represents only the visible core (G, grey) of a much larger ether-vortex. This extends upwards and downwards far beyond the axis of rotation. In the equatorial plane, the whirlpool disc is even more expansive and partially visible in the form of planets. The primary of these celestial objects is always the ether-vortex, in which the material particles only drift passively.

Gravity in Gases 

Stars consist practically only of gases. In contrast to solids or liquids, the gas particles keep a thousand times greater distance from each other. In addition, the gas particles whizz non-stop in all directions through space from one collision to the next. The ether between these particles therefore has no reason to switch to a quieter movement. So there is no essential difference between the free ether outside a gas cloud and the ether inside the gas. At best, there could be a gradual differentiation in a narrow area at the edge of the clouds. 

 

As incredible as it may seem, the solar gravitational field is much weaker than terrestrial gravity. Figure 13.17 is unequivocal proof of this. This huge Sun is supposed to force the Earth into its orbit at a distance of 150,000,000 kilometres. Close to the surface of the Sun, its gravity should be millions of times stronger. These flares fly out (hundreds of) thousands of kilometres, but should immediately crash back into the Sun due to their thousand-fold mass. Instead, they float around out there for weeks and months. Of course, this bubbling of the Sun can be explained by electromagnetic storms etc. (see below) and gravity could thus be covered or compensated for in the vicinity of the Sun.

But how could this supposed force of attraction then be able to act undisturbed as far as the outer planets? Under no circumstances can earthly gravity be regarded as a universal constant and it is not even transferable to the Sun and its planets. However, all the masses of the celestial bodies were calculated on this basis, in mutual dependence (i.e. by circular reasoning). Therefore, the calculated data of atmospheric pressure, density and temperatures of the Sun and the gaseous planets are purely fictitious values.

Pressure, Volume, Heat 

Figure 13.18 schematically sketches the dependencies of thermodynamic processes. There is gas in a container (grey). More or less pressure is marked by different shades of green, more or less heat is marked by different shades of red. In each case, the pressure is shown on the left by a barometer (schematically sketched as a quicksilver column) and the heat is measured on the right by a thermometer (schematically sketched as a mercury thermometer). 

 

The initial situation under normal conditions is shown at the top left. The gas particles A press on the surface of the mercury B and lift this heavy liquid (blue) because the vacuum (white) at the upper end of the tube does not exert any counterpressure. At normal atmospheric pressure in this container, the quicksilver column would indicate a height of about 760 mm. The heat of a gas C is based on the velocity of its particles. This is transferred in the thermometer D to a medium (blue), whose heat-dependent expansion then indicates the temperature, e.g. 20 degrees Celsius. 

 

The bottom of the container is formed by a piston E at the top right of the picture. This is directed upwards so that only a smaller volume is available for the gas. The gas particles are correspondingly closer together (darker green). Therefore, more particles beat on the measuring surface of the barometer per unit of time, so that a correspondingly higher pressure is displayed (not drawn to scale here).

It is normally assumed that the temperature should also rise accordingly. The medium in the thermometer trembles at the same speed as the gas and thus indicates its temperature. It is irrelevant how many particles of the gas transfer their speed into the measuring device. Therefore, in principle, the temperature of the gas remains unchanged, regardless of whether the volume of the container is reduced or increased. At the bottom right, the piston F is moved downwards again. The temperature is still unchanged. However, fewer particles per time unit now hit the measuring surface of the barometer, so that a lower pressure is displayed again. 

 

Heat Loss and Efficiency 

This result is the normal case in the behaviour of gases (in an open system) – even if this is presented as an exceptional case in conventional thermodynamics (of closed systems). Steam engines and internal combustion engines, are addingexternal heat, as shown by the red arrows G at the bottom left. This increases the speed of the particles (darker red) and the temperature displayed on the thermometer rises accordingly. As a result, the particles now also beat with greater force (darker green) on the measuring surface of the barometer, so that a higher pressure is displayed on the barometer at the same time. 

 

The second difference concerns the speed of the changes. The temperature remains constant if the above pistons E and F are moved slowly or if the density of the gas changes only gradually due to static pressures (as in open systems). In internal combustion engines, the piston moves quickly and the volume is rapidly reduced in the compression beat. Whenever particles hit the piston, they are thrown back at an increased speed, which heats the gas (as can be felt in a bicycle pump). In the expansion phase, the reverse process takes place: All particles hitting the piston are thrown back from this receding surface at a reduced speed, making the gas cooler. 

 

However, the cooling is only gradual, so that only a fraction of the mechanical work invested (pushing the piston into the cylinder) and the thermal energy invested can be converted into usable torque. Conventional thermodynamics therefore only describes the results of inadequate technology and unfortunately it has become a maxim that machines can only be made with an efficiency of < 1. In contrast, the universe and the Sun must work without losses, otherwise there would have been no movement for a long time, everything would have frozen from cold.

Zero-Point Energy and Plasma 

Another misjudgement of the conditions in the ice-cold universe results from experiments on zero-point energy. Figure 13.19 on the left shows a purely schematic sketch of these processes. The previous container (grey) is optimally isolated from the ambient heat and heat is extracted from the system (see arrows A). The particles hit the wall, which does not return the vibrations in the same way. The speed of the particles is thus extremely slowed down, they only beat weakly against the medium (blue) of the thermometer, which therefore only shows a minimal temperature. The gas B in the container has cooled down (light red) to almost absolute zero. 

 

There are still the same number of particles in this container, so the density of the gas (normal green) is unchanged. However, the particles stand quite motionless in the room, so that they only hit the measuring surface of the barometer weakly and it therefore only shows low pressure. 

 

The physicists are amazed that even close to absolute zero there is still movement in the container. Helium, in particular, exhibits extreme properties in that at low temperatures, for example, the atoms in a beaker flow up the wall. At very low temperatures, the atoms expand to a much larger volume (in the millimetre range). Internal movements can be clearly recognised in this plasma.

People still shy away from using the term ether. Instead, dark matter or zero-point energy with undefined properties is discussed. Alternatively, it is also assumed that the universe is filled with a plasma, e.g. consisting of electromagnetic particles (of an undefined kind) and e.g. celestial bodies that interact via electromagnetic attraction and repulsion (again without a clear idea of the underlying process). 

 

From the point of view of the indivisible ether, the entire gapless substance is always in oscillating motion, even at the lowest temperatures. Within this universal, real medium, local vortex-complexes (of material atoms) are swimming, more or less many within one volume-unit (which corresponds to density). They move forwards in space, more or less far per unit of time (and only this speed corresponds to the temperature of a gas). In other words, without this travelling motion, there is almost the same amount of motion in an area of ether. 

 

Velocity and Density 

The concepts of volume and temperature, pressure and heat in thermodynamics are abstract concepts and their interdependence is only (conditionally) valid in closed systems. In real terms, only the properties of density and velocity are given in gases. As the previous example shows, these are independent of each other: the speed of the particles does not change their number per unit volume. Conversely, a higher density in no way causes a higher velocity of the particles. 

 

So if there are a lot of particles in a small space in a star, this does not automatically result in a high temperature (as is generally and naturally assumed). If a temperature of only a few degrees Kelvin should prevail in the vastness of space, then there may only be a tiny number of dust particles there, but their speed does not necessarily have to be as low as in the above zero-point experiments.

 

Motion in Space 

Figure 13.19 on the right shows an example of a constant speed despite different densities. A hydrogen atom E (black) is said to have been accidentally pushed upwards in the earthly atmosphere at a speed of e.g. 1,000 m/s (represented by the length of the arrow). Within the dense layers of air (dark green), the atom will soon collide and exchange speed and direction with another particle F (here simplified straight upwards). In higher layers, the density is lower (medium green) and it will take a little longer until another collision with particle G takes place at a slightly greater distance. In areas of even lower density (light green), collisions occur after a longer time and distance. Ultimately, however, particle H will continue to fly upwards, still at its original speed. This does not necessarily correspond to the mathematically required escape velocity and no supposed force of attraction of the Earth's mass will hold this particle back. Even far out in empty and cold space, particles fly through space at the speed that was given at the beginning of their journey. The particles do not fly straight ahead, but are deflected, for example, in the Earth's ether-whirlpool in its direction of rotation, and then for a long time in the direction of rotation of the solar-whirlpool. The particles also do not fly at a constant speed, but are decelerated or accelerated when they fly through areas of massive radiation (e.g. in electromagnetic, spiralling tubes of the solar wind to a planet, see later chapters). The reality in space is therefore completely different from the situation in previous zero-point experiments, both in terms of the movement of particles and, of course, in terms of the continuous movements of the omnipresent ether.

Clouds of Mists

The Earth loses some gas particles and the atmosphere of Mars largely flew away into space. However, the vast majority of particles are ejected by the explosion of stars. In the case of a supernova, pressure fronts can be seen racing away from the centre. On the other hand, dust floats in space like clouds of haze, such as the Horsehead Nebula 1,000 LY away or the Orion Nebula (see examples in Figure 13.20). 

 

The matter is not uniformly distributed in the universe, but forms a web of more or less dense threads and clouds. Remarkable here are the relatively sharp edges or membranes that are present even in delicate veils. In the case of pressure fronts, the condensation occurs because the foremost particles are held back by resistance, while the remaining particles can fly behind undisturbed. In the case of calm or stationary veils, however, the cause of the outer shell must be different. It cannot be mass attraction in the conventional sense of gravity. Otherwise the compression would not be at the edge, but in the centre.

There is a difference in the incoming radiation between the edge and the central areas of the swaths. Continued radiation pressure causes a thrust on the particles, even if the mass of a photon is much smaller than that of atoms. On the other hand, radiation can be absorbed by the particles. In any case, there is relatively little radiation within the cloud. However, the particles at the edge of the cloud are condensed into a membrane.

Radiation and Compression 

Figure 13.21 shows a schematic sketch of a section of such a cloud. The dark green area represents the edge, the medium and light green areas are further inwards and have a lower density. The arrow A represents radiation that pushes a particle (black) further into the cloud. 

 

Of course, the radiation does not always hit the edge perpendicularly, but from all directions. This scattering of the rays is therefore better represented by the arrows B, each with an inclination of 45 degrees. This results in a horizontal component of movement, i.e. the atoms are pushed back and forward and form a certain barrier layer. The example above shows that a hydrogen atom can leave the Earth and fly across through space and reach such a cloud. New particles can arrive from all directions and the old ones also fly around in a criss-cross pattern. Although the density in the cloud is very low, collisions occur, even between several particles at the same time. 

This situation is sketched in C: Two atoms fly diagonally into the cloud (analogue to the principle direction of previous radiation) and simultaneously hit a third atom. This third atom now flies into the cloud at an accelerated speed because it has absorbed a proportion of the kinetic energy from two atoms. The two energy-releasing atoms remain relatively motionless. At D it is sketched that this process can be repeated with already accelerated atoms, even at a steeper angle. 

 

Heat and Cold 

Atoms that are only moving slowly are left behind at the edge. They stand around in space and offer little resistance to incoming radiation. The radiation pressure can push these cold atoms together to form a higher density. Further inwards, the atoms fly at a higher speed, so these areas are warmer. This differentiation contradicts the usual laws of thermodynamics: there is no inevitable tendency from warm to cold. The universe does not die a cold death. Even every random accumulation of dust results in a differentiation of the speed of movements. Only the law of energy constancy applies indispensably: If there is more heat somewhere, there is more cold elsewhere.

Gas Spheres 

Material accumulations of gas or dust particles can form a tornado (as discussed above in Figure 13.15), but only as a transient pattern of motion. Dust clouds do not contract due to a mysterious mass-attraction force, otherwise there would not be so many extensive swathes of Swathes of haze and threads, for example. If material particles are densely gathered in space, then in form of rotating spheres and only because they are caught within an ether-vortex (like e.g. the Sun cf]). 

 

The origin and characteristics of the ether-whirlpools were described above. Towards free ether of environment, swinging is chaotic and small-scale, while towards inside, beating motion occurs at extended tracks (like discussed upside at picture 13.16). This results centripetal thrust onto coarse motion pattern of atoms (like discussed in later section General Ether-Pressure and at picture 16.01). The dust cloud drifts in this carousel. The particles are pushed together into a permanent spherical shape not only by external radiation pressure (as in previous Swathes of haze), but also by the centripetal thrust component of the ether potential vortex. 

 

In Figure 13.22 such a round gas cloud is sketched. The lower sector shows the previous multiple collisions. Of course, the gas particles continue to move chaotically in space. But the majority of the vectors of the multiple collisions are now directed inwards and from layer to layer there is accelerated movement towards the centre. According to conventional wisdom, the greatest density should be at the centre (based on the idea of mass attraction, which could at best result in a ring-shaped concentration). In fact, the density at the edge (A, dark green) is greater than within the sphere (B and C, medium and light green). In the centre (D, yellow), the density is even lower, if only because fast (hot) particles take up more space than slow (cold) particles. 

 

At the centre, the atoms collide with great energy – and throw each other back outwards. The pressure of inward-flying particles is therefore countered by an equivalent outward motion pressure, as marked here by arrows E. The particles are thus also compressed from the inside towards the edge. There, collisions occur after a shorter distance with a greater probability of multiple collisions. The rapid movement outwards from the centre is distributed over many particles with a correspondingly low speed, as indicated here by the path network F.

Mass Increase and Spin 

Figure 13.23 schematically sketches why hot gases take up more space than cold ones. A hydrogen atom is shown at the top left of A. Its nucleus consists of a double-crank (B, dark green). Its oscillating rotation is conventionally referred to as spin. The oscillation in the hydrogen atom is asymmetrical, on one side the crank oscillates widely, on the other only weakly (for a docking of other atoms there is only one relatively quiet pole, only one eye or hydrogen is univalent). This oscillation on more or less wide orbits must be reduced outwards towards the free ether. Thats why this nucleus is surrounded by an aura (C, medium green) of equalising vibrations (for details see chapter 12 Ether Model of Atoms). 

 

If this atom is pushed ahead within space (arrow D), ether in front successively must take motion pattern of atom. In front of and around the atom there is therefore more ether in motion than in the resting atom. The faster the movement through space, the wider the aura (E, light green). The acceleration of a material body requires energy input until these additional movements are imprinted on the ether. After that, the atom can continue to drift through space without friction or loss (but only in a particle- and gapless ether). When this atom encounters an oncoming atom F, both exchange their kinetic energy and direction of movement. 

Whirling Centre and Centripetal Ether-Pressure 

It was established above that dust clouds are formed into a sphere in the centre of an ether-whirlpool. A relatively dense edge area will form. Towards the centre, the density decreases and the particles fly around faster, whereby a hot centre can only develop at the expense of the cold edge. In Figure 13.24, these density and velocity differences are again represented by three shells on the right (A, B and C, dark, medium and light green). 

 

The particles there will float in the current of the whirlpool, as indicated by the arrows. This potential vortex should actually extend to the centre with a transition to a rigid vortex. On the one hand, in the central area (D, yellow) the speed of rotation is relatively slow. On the other hand, all ether there is forced practically all times (even only temporary) to take motion pattern of extremely fast flying atoms. All ether constantly executes movements of atoms whirling around (like schematic shown by confused lines). Opposite, atoms at outer regions move rather steady and ether between these gas-particles is swinging nearby normal, thus at narrow tracks, nearby like free ether. There is thus a large difference between this small-scale oscillation and the coarse, wide movements in the centre. As explained above, this results in a strong thrust component from the outside into this central area (see arrows E). Every outward movement of the atoms is damped and every inward movement is accelerated, especially towards the centre area.

Such collisions rarely take place directly head-on. It is much more common for the atoms to scrape past each other or collide sideways, as shown by the arrows on the atoms G, for example. Both atoms will then drift apart again, but with more spin. The entire sphere of motion now rotates, twists or tumbles through space. Part of the kinetic energy has been converted into a torque of its own rotation. This new component of movement (see arrows H) requires an even larger balancing aura (light green). 

 

Bodies in fast motion therefore do not experience an increase in mass or a Lorentz length contraction. The higher the forward speed and/or the stronger the self-rotation of the atoms, the more ether volumes are involved. The hotter a gas is, the more space the aura around the particles takes up. Therefore, gases expand when they heat up, or the space required shrinks depending on how cold a gas is.

Nuclear Fusion Chain 

If two hydrogen atoms (F, top right) collide very violently (and their spin and twist are compatible), their internal oscillations can merge, i.e. both can fuse to form a helium atom (G, bottom right). Naturally, the ether environment will also tremble for a short time or wisps of motion can fly away (normally called alpha radiation or positive charge units). 

 

Figure 13.25 above shows the well-known sequence of nuclear fusions according to current theory: Four hydrogen atoms result in one helium atom. Three of these nuclei can combine to form a carbon atom. This burns together with another helium atom to form oxygen. In large stars, continued fusion can lead to iron (and in red giants or a supernova to uranium). The red and blue spheres here symbolise protons and neutrons, which are supposed to form the nucleus of these elements. 

 

In the Ether Model of Atoms described in this site, there are no such particles; instead, atoms are formed from different numbers of vortex strands, as schematically sketched in the picture below. Hydrogen H oscillates asymmetrically, while helium He oscillates in the form of a symmetrical double-crank. When three such motion patterns come together so violently that they wedge into each other, they form a star of six vortices, a carbon atom C. If another double-crank is integrated, the result is the 8-valent or 8-beam oxygen 0. In principle, it is always the same double-cranks that form extensive vortex complexes in varying numbers, e.g. also an iron atom Fe. 

 

The connecting lines of synchronous oscillation are schematically sketched here only as plane stars, in reality they are uniformly aligned radially to the centre in the three-dimensional spherical shape. 

 

Energy Concentration 

A large force is required to press these movement patterns into each other. This raises the question of where this energy should come from. The law of energy constancy applies, so no additional energy can be gained – but it can be concentrated (in contradiction to the supposed law of entropy). The starting point should be a hydrogen atom travelling at 1,770 m/s on Earth at 25 degrees Celsius. Above it was assumed that it flies away at 1,000 m/s, crosses cold space and arrives at the Sun at the same speed. There it transfers its impulse into the large collection of hydrogen atoms there. 

 

As shown in Figure 13.22 above, a multiple collision will occur and then an atom will continue to fly inwards at a speed of 1,400 m/s, for example. In another multiple collision with a factor of 1.4, an atom is accelerated to 2,000 m/s. After every two such events, a doubling to 4, 8, 16, 32 etc. km/s will occur. There is a high probability of a long sequence of such acceleration processes, radially inwards through layers of hydrogen, several hundred thousand kilometres strong. At the centre of stars, therefore, atoms can whirl around at extreme speeds, i.e. temperatures of millions of degrees can prevail. 

 

This concentration of movement in the form of these racers is only possible because a correspondingly large number of atoms have released their kinetic energy in the outer regions. These standers are relatively motionless, require little space for movement and therefore form layers of relatively high density – with a correspondingly low temperature. The large mass of all hydrogen atoms in a star will therefore be very slow, so that the outer layers are very dense and cold. Towards the centre, the density will decrease and the speed of the atoms will increase. There, within a relatively small volume, relatively few atoms fly around at extreme speeds. 

 

Heat Capsules 

This process of concentrating energy may seem improbable at first, but it is almost inevitable. In principle, multiple collisions can take place in all directions. In this case, however, the outer spherical shell is subjected to radiation and thrust from outside. Therefore, the vectors in multiple collisions are preferentially directed inwards, so that the majority of atoms fly inwards at excessive speed. Their strong momentum is passed on and exchanged in collisions, but it remains in the heat bubble. 

 

The excessive speed or heat is only reduced if a strong impulse is again directed outwards into the outer layers of higher density. There is an increased probability that a fast atom coming from the inside will hit two atoms at the same time. The high kinetic energy is thus redistributed to several atoms in the outer, dense and cool layer (see Figure 13.22 again). 

 

A balanced state is achieved, whereby a central hot zone is encapsulated in a cold shell. However, these zones are susceptible to external disturbances and are therefore quite unstable. In a star there will not only be a large heat bubble in the centre. At least on the Sun, many such heat bubbles appear to alternately expand and collapse or explode (see later chapter 14 The Sun). 

 

Implosion 

At previous picture 13.22 downside this inward acceleration process is shown (there from A to D). The atoms in the centre repel each other, resulting in a corresponding outward counter-pressure (schematically marked E and F in the figure above). However, if hydrogen-helium fusion occurs in the centre or even the entire fusion chain takes place, a different situation arises. The volume of the atoms plays a decisive role here. In the previous Figure 13.25, the green circles represent the diameter of these atoms (not just the cores) to scale. 

 

One He atom results from two (or four according to the conventional view) H atoms. The fast H atoms must come together hard during fusion, i.e. they do not fly apart again at the same speed. Instead, they leave behind a He atom that remains relatively motionless in space. It is also slightly smaller than an H atom and therefore requires a smaller volume of movement. After the above fusion chain, twelve H atoms can shrink together to the volume of a C atom. Another He atom can be integrated into the even smaller volume of an O atom. Ultimately, instead of the original 56 blazingly fast H atoms, a single Fe atom can result, which takes up much less space. 

 

Each fusion act reduces the number of atoms and thus the previously occupied space. Fewer fast H atoms remain, so that the counterpressure to the outside is reduced (previous E and F in Figure 13.22). For the atoms in the outer layers, the collision partners pushing outwards are suddenly missing. All atoms that are pushed towards the centre purely by chance can fly relatively long distances inwards. The outer shells collapse inwards and an avalanche-like implosion takes place. The probability of multiple collisions with their acceleration effect is further increased by the atoms crashing inwards. 

 

In this situation, fusion up to iron Fe may well occur. The volume of the star will collapse to a fraction of its original size. Mind you, there is no centripetal gravity at work. The huge accumulation of hydrogen in stars also behaves like a completely normal gas: the atoms flow into areas of lower density on their own. Only if they are accidentally pushed in this direction by a recent collision can they travel longer distances without colliding again. This is the only way to create a flow in gases, in this case in a centripetal direction.

 

H-Bomb, Supernova, Cavitation 

With today's technology, H/He fusion is mastered. For example, 36 kg of hydrogen is enough to generate the explosive force equivalent to 1,000,000,000 kg of TNT. According to current theory, fusion results in a mass defect of 0.73% and these 263 grams of mass are transformed into energy according to the well-known formula E = m·c^2. 

 

The abstract term mass could be equated with the meaningless term energy, because both are ultimately real movement (on the one hand the vortex pattern of the atoms, on the other hand their forward movement in space, but always only movement of ether in ether). The correlation to the square of the speed of light, on the other hand, is pure fiction (and has never been concretely proven). It only conceals the ignorance of the true cause of these enormous forces (beyond all chemical reactions or electromagnetic processes). 

 

This explosive force can occur on a much larger scale in stars. When the above fusion chain has reached a critical state, large stars explode in the form of a supernova. Within a few hours, large parts of the mass are ejected. The collisions between particles are so violent that radiation is produced at many frequencies. Even from a distance of light years, a supernova can be seen with the naked eye for several days. An explanation of these phenomenal forces is only possible on the basis of a real ether. A previous implosion is followed by an explosion – to relax maximum diffraction. These processes primarily affect the ether itself and only secondarily do material particles fly through space. 

 

This process takes place on a small scale in cavitation: The curved surfaces of the suction side of propellers cut through the water so quickly that water particles cannot follow. A bubble (not an air bubble) is created as an ether-region that is temporarily free of material movement patterns. Water particles also continue to collide with each other and there is a high probability that many will be pushed into this void from the edge of the bubble at the same time. Luminescence indicates their subsequent collision by briefly flashing. 

 

In addition, too much (equalising) stress occurs in the ether-vortex complex of the propeller, so that it requires a sudden relaxation. In the process, material of the propeller is blown off and it then appears as if soft water can punch clear holes in hard metal. cf]

Elastic Impact 

Figure 13.26 shows a schematic sketch of these relationships. The green circles represent atoms. Their internal movement is shown here by black, S-shaped curves. According to conventional wisdom, the atomic nucleus should be vanishingly small in relation to the diameter of the atom as a whole. From this I conclude that the bending capacity of the ether is very small, e.g. a maximum of 1:10,000. If the eccentricity of this double-crank were one millimetre, it would have to be 20 m long in real terms. Ether obviously is harder than steel resp. all curvatures here are extremely exaggerated. 

 

At A, two atoms move towards each other. The neighbouring ether-points are also marked in between as a black line. Along this steel rod, these S-shaped curvatures move towards each other twisting. Already before the auras of both atoms touch each other, the ether between will take a curvature corresponding to the swinging motions of the atoms. 

 

As sketched at B, increasingly also the steel-springs within the atoms will be tense. The oscillation there becomes shorter and must become correspondingly wider, so that the previously symmetrical contour of the atoms is deformed. On the one hand, this lateral expansion is now countered by increased counterpressure from the surrounding ether. On the other hand, both movement patterns will internally resolve the unequal tension: they move in the direction of lower resistance (see C).

Light 

The same initial situation is sketched at the bottom left of D, but here the atoms move faster towards each other. In most cases, the direction of their oscillation will not be the same. As they approach each other, the contours of the atoms are more strongly deformed and their steel springs are more strongly bent. The bending ability of the ether is particularly stressed on the connecting line E between the atoms. 

 

Corresponding to the loop there, the ether to the left and right of it must also assume analogue movement. Relaxation within this area of ether can only occur if this spiral pattern of motion flies off to the side (see F). A (spring-)break can not occur within gapless ether. Therefore the equalising movement must be extremely fast. One turn is sufficient for relaxation. This movement pattern (marked in red), which flies away at the speed of light along a lateral connecting line, is normally called a photon. Depending on the circumstances of the collision, a wave of different length and amplitude (e.g. alpha, beta, gamma radiation) can be generated. 

 

After this flash of light, the movement patterns of both atoms can move back upwards or downwards along their vertical connecting line, analogous to the above collision at C. However, due to the asymmetrical deformations, they will tumble forwards more. The atoms will have less forward motion because there is absolute energy constancy in the ether. Part of their kinetic energy has been transferred into the generated spiral wave. The emission of light therefore also results in a cooling of the gas. 

 

Stress 

The atoms are therefore quite soft movement patterns, at least in the outer areas of their aura. The movements converge towards the centre, so that all oscillations must be largely synchronised. The more complex the vortex pattern is, the harder the core area of the atom appears. However, even there the bending capacity of the ether is not yet at its maximum, otherwise the above connecting lines could not function like steel springs in collisions. 

 

In this picture on the right, the situation in the centre of an implosion is schematically sketched. New atoms are pushed in from all directions, so that they are crowded together in the centre and collide continuously, usually in opposite spins. The connecting lines within the atoms are strongly bent and the ether between the atoms is also extremely tense. In this sketch, only one vertical connecting line G and one in the horizontal direction H are shown. In reality, there are neighbouring ether-points between all these atoms, and movements must be balanced everywhere. Only in crystals can atoms stand so close together when all movements are synchronised. Here in this witch's kitchen, however, all ether is twisted to the limit of its bending capacity. 

 

To equalise the tensions, spiralling waves of movement constantly race around between the atoms. Occasionally these spirals drill into the surface of neighbouring atoms – resulting in ions. Depending on the intensity of the spiral wave, they can also penetrate deep into a neighbouring atom and get stuck there as an additional vortex pigtail – which corresponds to a fusion. Ultimately, many simple atoms become a smaller number of complex atoms. These take up relatively little volume, which further exacerbates this implosive situation and the stress in the ether.

 

No Nuclear Fusion 

The transition of one chemical element into another is not nuclear fusion. A few additional protons or neutrons are not simply integrated (simply because such particles do not exist in reality). According to quantum theories, nucleons consist of various quarks (which in turn cannot be particles). At the beginning, only a few quarks were known, but now over a thousand have been catalogued according to strange properties. Quarks are extremely short-lived, one form changes into another in a flash, whereby a suitable third form must be present. Instead of Bohr electrons on orbits including Heisenberg's uncertainty, undefined electron clouds are favoured today. Physicists do not expect these hypotheses to be logically comprehensible. In any case, an atom cannot be reduced to its nucleus – a tiny fraction of its volume. The scientists have obviously succeeded in casting a beam of light into the interior of atoms. What they were able to recognise, however, were not particles, but still images of movements. The individual quarks are orbital sections of ether-movements – and it is self-evident that these constantly change their shape as they oscillate – just as these processes are described here as the diffraction of connecting lines. All the costly experiments on the inner structure of atoms left nothing but images of scraps of motion. 

 

Atoms consist exclusively of quite normal ether. They only exhibit radially orientated vortices in patterns of varying complexity. Additional vortices can be integrated in the violent way described above. The transformation of some chemical elements (which are important for living beings) takes place constantly in nature, under completely normal conditions, but in the presence of certain catalysers. Incidentally, it is absurd to want to generate usable energy through nuclear fusion. The result of nuclear fusion is merely the reduction of the volume required for atomic movements, i.e. the creation of an implosion. The result is always an explosion with destructive forces that no matter can withstand (see the effect of the tiny cavitation bubbles above). On a gigantic scale, the result can be seen as a supernova. 

 

Liberating Beat 

The real cause of a supernova (like an H-bomb or previous cavitation) is stress in the ether, which has been strained to the limit of its bending capacity. As soon as the bending threatens to exceed this limit or as soon as there is a weak spot somewhere (neighbouring area of less tension), spiral balancing movements race towards it. Neighbouring tensions are also released into this local relaxation. The result is an avalanche-like increase in the movement of all ethers in this area. 

 

In extreme cases, what should not actually happen in the gapless ether occurs: an area without movement. In a stress zone, two opposing movements could wedge in such a way that a momentary standstill occurs. All around, all ether is still in motion, everything is interdependent. This blockade can no longer be cancelled by the emission of electromagnetic waves; instead, whole bundles of atoms are catapulted away from the place of standstill at the speed of light. This process therefore has nothing to do with ordinary chemical reactions or electromagnetic forces. Rather, the released energy results from the volume of coherent movements of the entire stress area. 

 

Nevertheless, all ether is still stationary in principle and no ether-parts fly apart. A flow within ether consists only of a beating motion component. This liberation beat is extremely strong and directed outwards in the same direction from the centre of the tension. By this primary movement of ether, secondary naturally also material ether-vortices are pushed outward into direction of beating, with beat-like acceleration to unusual high speed. 

 

Only the material particles can fly apart in this explosion. The ether cannot even beat concentrically and simultaneously outwards, otherwise there would be too little ether in the centre at the moment. Within its oscillation, the beats of neighbouring ether-points must be staggered in time. This leads to two-dimensional wave patterns, whereby the surfaces are usually rolled up into tubes. This form of movement is called magnetic field lines. On the Sun, magnetic movement patterns can assume gigantic proportions. If luminous matter is present, these magnetic storms are quite visible. They return to the surface of the Sun in an arc, form wide-ranging flares or can fly out into space through the corona. To compensate for the internal tensions in the ether, the Sun thus exports various movement patterns: of some material particles, of photons and of magnetic flux tubes.

14 The Sun 1]

Who hasn't seen these fantastic images from the Solar and Heliospheric Observatory (SOHO) of our central star, as it shoots its so-called flares explosively 200,000 to 300,000 km into space with a multiple of the Earth's mass. See the tiny light blue dot in Fig. 14.01 at A. You can estimate these distances quite well with a solar diameter of 1,391,400 km (Earth 12,736 km). What these time-lapse images on television do not show, however, is that their ejecta hang around in space for days, often up to several weeks, and only then slowly sink back to the surface of the Sun. This huge Sun is supposed to force the Earth into its orbit at a distance of 150,000,000 kilometres. Its gravity should therefore be millions of times stronger close to the surface of the Sun. 

 

This observation alone suggests that the enormous gravitational pull attributed to it cannot be correct. Due to its size and calculated mass, a density of 1.408 g/cm^3 is attributed to the Sun by circular reasoning. By comparison, water has a density of 0.998 g/cm^3 at 20 degrees Celsius. Its main components in the photosphere are hydrogen 92.1 per cent, helium 7.8 per cent, oxygen 0.05 per cent, carbon 0.023 per cent, neon 0.01 per cent and nitrogen 0.007 per cent. 4] This huge, glowing ball of plasma is said to contain 99.86 per cent of the entire mass of the solar system.

Open Questions and Starting Points

Our image of the Sun as a warming and glowing sphere is an optical illusion. Viewed in a different light (frequency, temperature, magnetic flux), it shows a picture of raging storms and spraying radiation (see Fig. 14.02). A lot of data has been collected in the meantime – but practically all questions are still unanswered. The most important starting points for a better understanding are emphasised below. 

 

Low Mass

If you have no explanation for the long-distance effect of an attraction force, you must not transfer terrestrial gravity to the Sun. The mass of the Sun is calculated using the Earth's orbital speed and distance from the Sun as well as the gravitational constant, which is considered to be universal. Due to its gravitational pull, there should be many millions of degrees of heat and millions of bars of pressure inside. This gas cloud is said to be compressed to an average density of 1.4 g/cm^3 per cubic centimetre – while hydrogen and helium are 10,000 times lighter under standard conditions – and, like all gases, wants to occupy the largest possible volume. 

 

In reality, the Sun has a much lower density and mass than is generally assumed. In contrast to our calm, solid Earth, the Sun is a loose collection of gases, without a fixed outer boundary, but in constant, violent internal motion. Matter represents only a small part of all motion, the Sun is primarily a wildly raging sphere of ether. 

 

Energy Constancy

The total energy radiation from the Sun is around 1,300 W/m^2 (a good dozen 100 W bulbs per square metre) and a corresponding proportion reaches the Earth's surface. Like almost all planets, the Earth radiates somewhat more energy (because radiation from other directions is also ultimately reflected). In contrast to the above gravitation, the law of energy constancy applies absolutely and universe-wide: even the Sun does not produce energy, it can ultimately only radiate what was previously absorbed. All celestial bodies can only transform energy, in different ways depending on their material structure. Although energy is condensed or materialised in celestial bodies, the radiation that races through space in all directions represents a multiple of this. 

 

Granules of the Photosphere 

The incoming radiation in combination with the universal (ether-) space pressure pushes the hydrogen atoms together on the surface of the Sun. This results in the above-mentioned multiple collisions with the differentiation of fast and slow atoms. Heat bubbles occur not only at a depth of a few 100,000 km, but already after 1,000 km. There are periodic oscillations in the Sun, but obviously also spontaneous serious shocks. Both lead to density fluctuations and the implosion described above occurs at the respective boundaries of these cavitation bubbles. 

The subsequent explosion can escape to the outside through cracks. At temperatures of around 6,000 degrees Celsius, particles collide and emit the visible light of the photosphere. The particles lose speed and sink again around the eruption source, at around 4,000 degrees Celsius. Once the pressure in the bubble has been released, the channel becomes blocked again. These ready-made clouds of granules reach a diameter of 1,000 km and are replaced by neighbouring eruptions after a few minutes. 

 

Thermodynamics 

The limitations of the laws of thermodynamics are not relevant: There may well be a local acceleration of the particles and thus zones of heat and cold. The supposed law of entropy is refuted in nature: Not everything becomes more and more uniform, new and complex structures are formed without pause. The previous granules change their structure continuously, but they are a constant phenomenon overall. The eruptions of the corona are less regular, but all the more violent. They must therefore have deeper causes. 

 

The Sun will not end up as a supernova, but the concentration of extremely fast particles described above and hydrogen-helium fusion may occur. Obviously, the associated implosion does not only occur once in the centre, because corona eruptions occur irregularly at different locations with varying intensity. The extreme tension discharges in explosive processes. It can take hours or days until the pressure in these bubbles is reduced to such an extent that the channel closes again. 

 

These channels act like bottlenecks or nozzles, so that even greater speeds are generated. Fusion into even heavier elements could very well take place in this mixture of material particles and radiation. On the other hand, there are complex atoms also rubbed together. Despite all the chaotic movements, orderly flows will also occur in these channels. This order results, in the magnetic field lines above – here on a gigantic scale, e.g. many times larger than the Earth. 

So-called magnetic tubes are formed. A mixture of material particles, electrons and photons races through this etheric tube. The tubes are usually curved and form arcs back into the surface, see Fig. 14.03 below. The ejection can also form large flares, which only drift back to the surface after days or weeks. The Sun is generally an open system as far as the irradiation and radiation of energy is concerned, and the thermodynamic processes can only be evaluated under these restrictions. 

 

Smooth Transition 

These patterns of movement are called the solar wind, which extends far beyond the outer planets. This current is not uniform, but of varying strength, more comparable to squalls of air. The Sun does not work like a radio transmitter with a constant carrier frequency, but transmits a mixture of individual photons of different lengths and amplitudes. These oscillation patterns spiral through space at the speed of light with only one turn and without loss. However, the photons are far larger than is generally assumed because neighbouring space is always involved. 

 

These elements of motion therefore interact with each other and are referred to as high-energy radiation. In principle, an electron is also based on this spiral motion. A smooth transition is conceivable from the previous thick photon cluster to a highly energised electron – which is also referred to as a component of cosmic rays. These motion units naturally also have a larger aura, they have a bulky mass compared to other radiations. When they collide, they are slowed down so that the solar wind does not travel at the speed of light, but at a maximum of 1,000 km/s.

The Sun turns once on its axis in 600 hours and 38 minutes, which corresponds to a circumferential speed of approx. 2 km/s at the equator. Astronomers have no explanation for its axial tilt of 7.25 degrees to the entire solar system ecliptic. Its luminosity is 3,846E+26 W. The symbol for a solar mass is Mʘ. 

 

Hot Chromosphere

It is said that the Sun loses 1 million tonnes of mass every second through the solar wind. Several satellites continuously show images of the ejection of matter and chasing radiation. The visible light is produced in the photosphere, which has a temperature of 6,000 to 4,000 degrees Celsius. There is much less matter in the chromosphere above it – which is said to be one to two million degrees centigrade. So far there is no explanation for this rise in temperature. I suspect that people have simply forgotten that energy is constant: the Sun not only ejects matter and radiation, but also receives energy in roughly equal amounts. 

 

The flow of matter and photons from the Sun results from channels with a jet effect, or is ejected from pulsating valves at excessive speed. Currents are bundled in the magnetic tubes and the above highly energised particles and radiation are already formed there. This is countered by cosmic wind and radiation from all directions of the universe. These coarse movement patterns do not simply run through each other (like normal electromagnetic waves). Everything coarse and material is thrown back and forward in this cross sea – which is interpreted as a temperature of millions of degrees. Matter becomes visible in the Sun's corona, but not all these atoms leave the Sun. On the contrary, new electrons and hydrogen can even be created in this agitated ether, which sinks to the surface as new matter.

Sunspots and Rotational Divergence

Dark areas can be recognised on the visible surface of the Sun, as shown in Figure 14.04 above. These Sunspots appear sporadically and disappear again after a few days or weeks. These areas are associated with particularly strong magnetic phenomena. They are an indication of solar activity, which becomes stronger and weaker in periods of about eleven years. These spots occur north and south of the equator, between 40 and 5 degrees latitude. They move from east (where the Sun rotates towards the Earth) to west and slightly towards the equator. In this picture below, some Sunspots (SS, black dots) are marked and their directions are schematically sketched (see arrows).

 

Strangely enough, the Sunspots do not move forwards uniformly. The Sun does not rotate like a solid sphere. The differential rotation was derived from the movement of the Sunspots. Different data are cited in the literature; average values are shown here. According to this, the surface of the Sun at the equator performs one turn within 24 days (columnT/D), which corresponds to a speed of about 2 km/s (column KM/S). At 20 degrees latitude (column DL), the turn takes one day longer (which corresponds to about 1.8 km/s at this radius). At 40 degrees latitude, the surface turns one day slower (i.e. within 26 days or at a speed of about 1.5 km/s). At a latitude of 70 degrees, the rotation can take a full 31 days (and the surface there now moves in a circle at 0.5 km/s). 

 

In this picture 14.04, the longitude is marked in blue. If a solid sphere rotates by 90 degrees, this longitude would appear in the centre of the sphere. Due to the differential rotation (see blue arrow DR), this line on the surface of the Sun is shifted to the right at the equator (see blue curve). 

 

The appearance of Sunspots has been known for a few thousand years. Their frequency and migration have been precisely tracked for a few hundred years. To date, however, physics has been unable to provide an explanation for this rotational divergence. It is not possible to explain how a slowly rotating core could cause the outer areas to rotate faster. It is conceivable that an outer fast rotation could be slowed down by a core. But then the whole rotation would come to a standstill or the stars (or in any case the Sun) would have to experience an external drive. As long as the Sun is believed to be surrounded by nothing, no solution to this problem will be found. If you see the Sun at the centre of a substantial ether-whirlpool, the phenomenon is easy to explain.

Ether Potential Vortex of the Solar System

Figure 14.05 shows the differential rotation (DR, yellow) of the Sun as a graph at the top left: The respective rotational speeds (km/s) are plotted in the vertical line and the distance (Mio. km) in the horizontal line. The Sun has a radius of around 0.7 million kilometres at the equator and rotates there at a speed of around 2.0 km/s. The speed increases progressively from the inside to the outside. The speed increases progressively from the centre outwards. It is therefore to be expected that the ether outside has an even faster flow. For example, at a distance of 2 to 3 million kilometres, the whirlpool (WP, marked in green) could rotate at 40 or 50 km/s. 

 

The inner planets are shown at the bottom of this image. Mercury M rotates at a distance of about 58 million kilometres (Mio. km) from the Sun S. Venus V rotates at a radius of about 108 million kilometres and the Earth E has an average distance of about 150 million kilometres from the Sun. The Earth moves on its orbit at around 30 km/s, Venus at around 35 km/s and Mercury at an average of 48 km/s. The orbital period of the planets is shorter and shorter inwards, but not proportionally. Rather, the inner planets fly faster through space (see the area marked in red).

It is very likely that the whirlpool (WP, green) inside Mercury rotates even faster. The curve of these speeds and the above curve of the differential rotation of the Sun must show a smooth transition. This is the case when the speed of 40 to 50 km/s (i.e. similar to Mercury) is reached again at around 2 to 3 million kilometres. The trajectories of comets or probes could be used to determine which maximum is actually reached there. The speeds will presumably behave in a similar way to a hurricane: rising from the outside inwards, increasingly progressive with a maximum that only drops off rapidly shortly before the centre. 

 

Deflection of light and solar wind

Figure 14.05 shows the Sun (S, yellow) and the Earth (E, blue) at the top right. The left-turning, differential rotation of the Sun is indicated by arrow DR. The whirlpool of the ether outside the Sun shows a much faster rotation, as indicated by the longer arrow WP. 

 

The movement pattern of light or all electromagnetic radiation races through space at 300,000 kilometres per second. The 150 million kilometres from the Sun to the Earth are covered in 8 minutes and 20 seconds. In general, photons or electromagnetic radiation are displaced sideways by the beating component of the whirlpool (see curved line EM). We therefore generally see the Sun a little too far to the right. 

 

The coarser movement patterns of the solar wind are travelling at 300 to 1,000 km/s maximum. They only arrive on Earth after about 40 to 140 hours (i.e. about 1.7 to 5.7 days later). The energised particles fly spirally towards Earth in magnetic tubes. The solar wind is exposed to the fast flow of the whirlpool for much longer and is deflected much more strongly (see strong curvature of the curve SW).

Pure and Stormy Ether

Bounded ether represents ordered, wide-range swinging, where matter occurs only in the hundred or so variants of chemical elements. From individual atoms to molecules and loose compounds, matter can combine to form gigantic accumulations, e.g. planets, stars and galaxies. 

 

All matter consists of ether and, of course, the spaces in between. This free ether oscillates on narrow orbits that result from multiple superpositions. These spiral ball tracks are rather messy patterns of movement, but not equally chaotic everywhere. Fig. 14.06 lists some areas by which one could differentiate the predominant structure of the free ether. 

 

Far out in space, far away from galaxies, free ether will be present in pure form because the dust particles in the infinite expanses have filtered out a lot of radiation. In this intergalactic region (light red), relatively soft ether will be present.

 

The ether within our Milky Way, for example, is completely different. In this galaxy (medium red), many stars are gathered in the centre, which bombard each other with their radiation. Towards the outside there are quieter zones, interrupted by turbulent areas of the spiral arms. The oscillation of the free ether is therefore very different locally within a galaxy, in each case resulting from the superposition of all the radiation travelling through it. Everywhere, however, there is also this asymmetrical beat in the direction of rotation of the galaxy, again not uniformly, but rolled up, for example, in marginal vortices (and in one of them our solar system whirls forwards in a spiral). 

 

We are close to the Sun and are familiar with its raging surface. Radiation and even material particles race out of this witch's cauldron into the solar environment (dark red). This solar wind can be clearly seen, for example, in the deflection of some parts of a comet's tail. These solar wind radiations organise themselves into gigantic tubes, which are largely deflected around the Earth by the magnetic field, see Fig. 14.07. 

 

Protected Sphere

There are no boundaries in the seamlessly connected ether and all forces theoretically have an infinite effect. The Earth's magnetism, for example, is a rather weak field of special ether-motion, but nevertheless extends far out into space. These (also multi-layered) shells form a zone or inner world that is protected from external influences. 

Such an etheric membrane surrounds the Earth in the form of the magnetosphere. The Earth's magnetic field is compressed on the outside by the solar wind to form a massive front (magnetopause), see Fig. 14.07. The Earth generates this magnetic field, i.e. its aura extends at least as far as this protective shell. At this point, hard radiation is absorbed, reflected or deflected. The ionosphere also has a similar filter function further inwards. 

 

The ether of these layers of magnetic vortices or electric space charge is of course in very violent motion. But within these membranes the ether is free of hard radiation and thus a sphere (Fig. 14.06 light green) of much quieter ether exists. Shortly within this earthly outer border, the ether thus is almost as pure as the free ether far outside of galaxies. It is only through this etheric envelope that the Earth becomes a spaceship with an independent inner world – and as we know, life on the planet could only develop within this protected zone.

15 Structure of the Earth 1]

Increasingly Coarse Ether

From this protective shell inward, structure of free ether is determined by other factors. Normally all free ether dominates the (few) local areas of bounded ether: it presses atoms to sphere shape, pushes several of them together based on general pressure and by asymmetric beats it also pushes these motion-pattern through space. Conversely, the accumulation of material vortex complexes also influences the surrounding ether. 

 

There are more gas particles in the atmosphere and the density of the air increases towards the Earth. The particles keep their distance from each other, flying tirelessly criss-cross through space with many collisions with each other. Each atom has an aura extending far outwards, in whose equalising areas the movements are reduced to the oscillation of the free ether. However, the narrower the gaps become, the less the movements are completely reduced. Within that atmospheric area (previous picture 14.06 middle green), free ether between atoms thus will swing at some wider tracks, i.e. gradually will take coarser shape. As all movements within ether are coherent, this wider swinging within atmosphere gradually is transferred towards outside. 

 

Especially as it becomes much coarser towards the bottom: On the Earth's surface, the accumulation of matter becomes much denser, there are now atoms of various chemical elements, their accumulations are more varied, there are mountains and oceans, deserts and forests, heat and cold, storms – in other words, the world dominated by coarse matter. This means that the free ether will also take on much more of a material structure, especially towards the Earth's surface. All in all, the free ether will show increasingly coarser or more extensive patterns of movement from the spherical areas towards the Earth. 

 

The Earth's crust is a mixture of different rocks, consisting of material of different densities and grain sizes. The common aura around all molecules or particles resp. whole rocks is different and so also the free ether within these rocks will be very heterogeneous (previous picture 14.06 marked dark green). 

 

Compared to the free ether at and above the Earth's surface, however, the structure down there differs in one essential point: all radiation is soon filtered out. The narrow oscillation due to multiple overlapping radiation no longer exists. The structure of the ether between the rock particles can thus increasingly adapt to their movement patterns. The structure of the Earth is thus not only determined by the matter, rather the free ether in the spaces between the atoms has a significant influence. 

 

Increasing Harmonisation and Transformation

Now again, completely different criteria for movement pattern of free ether come up. Already in the Earth's crust, or at the latest in the regions known as the Earth's mantle, the material increasingly transforms into crystalline forms. As sketched upside at picture 13.10 at E, atoms resp. molecules now build structures so well ordered, ether within spaces between (and within common aura) builds also ordered pattern of movements. This ether area is labelled as crystalline (light blue) in the figure above. 

 

This results in a tendency towards self-organisation: the crystals form an ether structure in and around themselves, which in turn leads to the growth of the crystals, even if no corresponding chemical elements are present. The ether there is automatically transformed into such forms of movement so that it fits this pattern exactly and thus forms these SiO2 formations, for example. 

 

As unbelievable as it may seem to some, there is a transformation of chemical elements. For example, there are deposits of coal in igneous rock where organic material could never be present (and therefore there is serious discussion about how coal forms purely inorganically). For example, it is commonly believed that heavy atoms can only form when stars explode (but then these atoms would also have to be scattered as dust throughout the universe). Chemical transformation does not require high pressure or heat, but a suitable catalyser is often necessary. This catalyst is usually not directly involved in the chemical transformation, only its presence is required. Its aura forms an etheric environment within which the chemical elements react. 

 

It is therefore quite conceivable that heavy chemical elements are also formed in the Earth's interior. Depending on the prevailing structure of the ether there (in existing atoms and/or in the environment), many different elements can accumulate. It is undisputed, for example, that rock is degassed even at great depths and hydrogen is generated (which simply could not be present in such quantities in the original rock). Together with oxygen, new water is always formed (whereas old surface water could never sink so deep due to the pressure in the rock). On the other hand, hydrocarbons are formed down there (although so much C could never have got down there). 

 

Plasma in the Earth's Core

It is commonly believed that the Earth's core contains molten iron or is even in the aggregate state of a plasma (just as the core of a star is supposed to consist of helium plasma due to enormous pressure and extreme temperature). From the point of view of the gapless ether, however, neither high pressure nor heat can exist in the core of celestial bodies, but a plasma with a smooth transition between free ether and atoms can. 

 

Even in the Earth's crust, all radiation is filtered out and in the area of crystalline formations the free ether corresponds more and more to the movement pattern of the atoms there. This process continues further inwards and passes into an area of plasmatic ether (marked dark blue in the above figure). Boundaries between motion-pattern of atoms and surrounding ether become blurred, i.e. more and more motions occur like within a plasma as a continuous sloshing mass. 

 

The more the free ether corresponds to the movements in the aura of the atoms, the less pressure it exerts on them. I would like to remind you of the experiments on the Bose-Einstein condensate: extremely low temperatures reduce the movements of atoms as much as possible and thus reduce external influences. This results in plasma formations of large volume, thousands and even millions of times larger than the size of the atoms involved. This soup can be stirred by laser – so depending on the environmental conditions, new elements could also be formed (as experiments on cold fusion also prove). 

 

To summarise, it can be stated: The free ether outside the terrestrial sphere is an area full of hectic and non-stop changing directions of movement due to superimposed radiations. The hard radiation is filtered out by the protective membranes of the magneto- and ion-spheres. What remains is a much calmer free ether, which increasingly takes over the movement patterns of matter towards the Earth's surface. Further inwards, the free ether and material ether-vortices adapt more and more until a relatively undifferentiated plasma emerges in the core – without pressure and temperature of extreme proportions.

Pressure and Temperature of the Earth

However, it must be quite hot in the Earth, otherwise there could be no volcanoes or molten rock, as the basalt columns, quartz bands or granite in various forms impressively demonstrate (see Fig. 15.01). 

The following Fig. 15.02 shows a section through the main layers of the Earth. The outermost layer of the Earth's crust is assumed to be about 35 kilometres deep. However, it has so far only been possible to drill to a depth of 14 km, where high pressure and temperatures of 300 degrees have so far prevented further penetration. The upper mantle is estimated to be around 400 kilometres deep. The lithosphere, i.e. the area of normal rock, also extends to this depth. Temperatures of up to around 1,500 degrees (the melting point of quartz) must prevail there, at least locally, so that magma and effusive rock can still reach the Earth's surface at 700 to 1,200 degrees (although the melting point of rock varies greatly depending on the pressure and mixture). 

 

There is then a relatively sharply defined transition zone where the structure of the rock must be greatly altered (what was described above as the result of the crystalline ether). The lower mantle reaches a depth of 2900 kilometres and the temperature there is said to be 2000 degrees. In the outer core, everything would be liquid at 2,900 degrees up to a depth of 5,100 kilometres. The inner core is said to be as hot as 5,000 degrees at a pressure of several million bars. 

 

As I said, we only have precise knowledge down to a maximum depth of 14 kilometres. Beyond that, conclusions can be drawn based on the travel times and paths of pressure waves during earthquakes. However, everything else is based on the assumption of a universe-wide gravitational constant, where attractive and centrifugal forces must coincide due to the radii and orbital speeds, and ultimately the density of celestial bodies is also calculated via the volume – for which, for example, a weighty iron-nickel core in the centre of the Earth is needed as a purely fictitious conclusion (and analogously for all celestial bodies).

 

In fact, it is completely unclear how the temperature for the above rock melts could come about. Regardless of whether it is due to the conventionally assumed force of attraction or whether an external pressure force is assumed: Ultimately, both forces act statically. These result in pressure, but pressure does not result in an increase in temperature. A heavy hammer and a light spring are accelerated at the same rate during free fall. Only on the Earth's surface (or a solid base) do the two have different weights due to their different densities and masses (the bulkiness of their vortex patterns). Both are static on a beam balance, and the continued effect of gravity does not change the temperatures of these atoms at all.

Heat is an expression of the speed of molecular motion. When gas in a cylinder is compressed by a fast-moving piston, its kinetic energy is transferred to the speed of the gas particles, i.e. the particles move faster in space and the gas becomes warmer. However, if the volume is slowly reduced, the pressure increases accordingly, but the temperature of the gas remains unchanged (isothermal). Similarly, the speed of movement of particles, liquids and solids does not increase simply because they are exposed to static pressure. An answer to this problem is not to be found in the effect of gravity and the resulting weight forces, but rather by analogy with the statics of the old stone bridge in Fig. 15.02 below. 

Loose Material Accumulation

The following Fig. 15.03 sketches some stages of the Earth's development (not to scale, of course). Celestial bodies emerge from local dust clouds (A, grey), which (according to conventional wisdom) clump together due to gravitational attraction (arrow G). It will be more correct to say that the particles are pushed together due to radiation pressure (arrow S) by providing (pressure) shadows for each other. Universe-wide, also general ether-pressure affects onto all material vortex-complexes as thrust (arrow U). Atoms are held together by this force (thus it corresponds to the strong nuclear force). Where the motion structures of the atomic surfaces fit together, they are also clumped together to form molecules. Beyond this, however, bonds are much looser, grains of sand, for example, are only brought together to form brittle sandstone. 

 

The accumulations of gas or dust particles in a celestial body grow, but they are not pressed closer together. As the sphere grows, the ratio of volume to surface becomes ever greater or, conversely, ever lower external pressure acts on each particle. There is still free ether around the aura of all atoms or molecules in this sphere, which keeps the particles at a distance. Even as the celestial body grows, it remains (initially) a loose collection of material particles (see, for example, the giant gas planets and stars). 

 

Radiation Protection and Reorganisation

The radiation from all directions therefore pushes the material together to form a loose collection of a celestial body, but the radiation remains neutral overall. For example, the Moon absorbs the heat of solar radiation on one side and radiates it completely back into space on its shadow side (planets emit even more radiation than they receive). However, the temporary absorption and ultimately the reflection of all radiation has a decisive influence on the material structure of the celestial body. 

 

In its outer regions, the radiation is filtered out of the free ether or external influences do not reach far into the celestial bodies (see Fig. 15.03 arrows at B). Within the Earth's crust, the ether between the particles is increasingly less affected by the overlapping of diverse radiation, thus losing its nervous trembling on narrow orbits. In this heterogeneous area, the free ether gradually adapts to the more extensive oscillation of the atoms.

Further down, the ether becomes even calmer and transitions into crystalline movement patterns (C, light blue). There the atoms form a well-organised, common outer aura. They now arrange themselves into such structures that the ether between the atoms is also in an adequate, harmoniously vibrating state. Even further inwards in the plasmatic area (D, dark blue), the transitions between the movement patterns of the atoms and their surroundings can become fluid. The ether-movements can even reorganise themselves there into different chemical elements by calm-fusion (in a calm process, as in cold-fusion – without extreme temperature and/or pressure). 

 

Density and Pressure Differentiation

As a consequence of the greater order of material particles in this crystalline ether-region, higher density results. The rock mass of the lithosphere (up to 400 km depth) undergoes a phase transition in the transition zone (up to about 600 km depth) (which science is currently unable to explain). The previous loose accumulation of dust takes up less space there, not because the matter is compressed, but only because the ether there is cleared of hectic radiation. The ether between the atoms no longer trembles so violently, so that the particles can move closer together. Together with the ether, which vibrates in synchronisation with each other, they now form more compact units. 

 

In crystalline form (light blue), the matter now takes up less space than in the heterogeneous zones of the Earth's crust or the upper mantle (green). This results practically empty space (schematic shown as white ring) resp. within this area naturally still exists ether, only material vortex-complexes moved together. In this vortex-free space, the outer layers could now move in and the entire celestial body could shrink to a smaller circumference. 

 

This process is like removing the scaffolding after building the beautiful stone bridge above. All the stones move down a little, but they all prevent each other from moving. This is what gives the structure its stability. And as a side effect, this results in shear forces or an enormous pressure of these stones in a lateral direction to each other. Any weight on the bridge is no longer supported by a vertical counter-pressure, but rather this load now causes a multiple of lateral pressure on this arch. 

 

The same applies to the Earth (see section at the bottom of the image): the advancing layers of rock (B, green) form a huge vault (F, grey) above the relative void (H, marked red here), which is the result of the high density of the crystalline rock below (C, light blue). The vault practically forms a barrier layer, the radially inward forces (arrow KR) result in enormous pressure in the lateral direction (arrow KS), the flatter the curvature, the stronger the lateral pressure in the vault. Many researchers assume a (multi-)layered structure of the celestial bodies, here from the point of view of the ether there is even the need for a vault. In reality, of course, this barrier layer will not form a geometrically exact spherical sphere, but rather localised areas of different shapes, inclinations and thicknesses, thus forming various plates and fractures.

 

Static Pressure and Heat

The entire mass of tall towers rests on their foundations, but the material at the top or bottom has the same temperature. The same situation applies to the Earth: the trigger for the pressure on the vault is the dynamics of external radiation and the general ether-pressure applied from outside. But it is purely static pressure that loads the vault and keeps it stable. The high temperature up to the melting point of the rock below this stone bridge only results from other aspects, e.g. in analogy to the evaporation of water. 

 

At the water surface, the ether forms a common aura or membrane called surface tension (which in turn is explained on the basis of supposed attractive forces). Although water molecules form a compound, all particles still tremble permanently. They collide and exchange the direction and speed of their movements. It is not always just two particles that collide, but occasionally several at the same time (what I call multiple collisions). If the kinetic energy of those particles is transferred to one particle, this particle can be catapulted out of the water surface. This water vapour therefore has a high velocity or temperature, while the energy-releasing particles remain relatively energy-free (motionless) in the water (which results in the evaporation of cold). 

 

The rock particles also tremble despite the enormous pressure in the barrier layer. When previous multiple collisions occur at the lower interface, particles are catapulted out into the free space below. These particles are now missing in the rock as collision partners, i.e. a small area of relative emptiness now also occurs there. Neighbouring particles are shot into this space due to the high pressure. The previously stationary rock is now set in motion, i.e. the previously purely static pressure is transferred into kinetic energy, i.e. heat is generated in the rock. 

 

Heat always moves in the direction of the cold. Because the same relatively moderate temperature exists everywhere inwards, the heat in the rock rises upwards (at a depth of 14 kilometres, for example, this 300 degrees was measured). Therefore, the ground is warm at the surface and only therefore does the Earth radiate more heat than it receives from the Sun. Although this is a fact, it smells like a perpetual motion machine. But in addition to radiation, the general ether-pressure acting from outside also represents a constant energy input. Essentially, however, this energy export results from the leverage effect in this vault: the given external pressure is multiplied many times over in the form of shear forces and these are a practically inexhaustible source of energy. 

 

Gases, Heat and Bubbles

When a particle is blasted out of the rock, a gap is created into which neighbouring particles are pressed – from all sides at the same time. This process is identical to luminescence in water under strong pressure fluctuations. In rock, however, the tension cannot be dissipated by rushing radiation. Instead, the energy of the discharging compressive stress remains trapped in the area of this bubble. 

 

Under these localised conditions, a molecule may well be torn apart, releasing oxygen, for example (the most common element on Earth, mainly bound in rock). If an atom is strongly deformed, a new hydrogen atom may well be generated. H and O can combine to form H2O. In any case, H2 molecules will be formed. Under these extreme conditions, these double-cranks can collide crosswise so hard that they form a carbon atom. Hydrocarbons will form. The presence of these elements and molecules significantly lowers the melting point of the rock. 

 

Information, Resonance and Emergence 

Many readers will find the spontaneous formation of new chemical elements unbelievable, but there are special conditions down there. Many people treat the abstract term information casually, but here information becomes a real process: a C was generated by extreme conditions and extreme chance. The movement structure of this atom is the carrier of the information here is a C. The ether in its surroundings also exhibits analogue movement and represents the information here is the space of/for C. When new vortex fragments are squeezed out of the rock, they fit in and complement each other in this negative form of the C atom. 

 

It is a fact that, for example, the information oxygen can be imprinted on a sample and if this sample is placed in a dead pond, after a while this water actually contains more real oxygen. This is reminiscent of the potentisation of homeopathy or the growth of crystals in druses. There is a very real tendency towards self-organisation in nature – and this emergence is based on real patterns of movement of the real ether between real atomic ether-vortices, which could also be described as real information, if you like. 

 

The term resonance is often used to explain phenomena, usually in a very abstract sense. However, resonance requires a real medium – and the gapless ether in particular is predestined for this (because all movements must be largely synchronised with each other anyway). On and above the Earth's surface, the ether is full of vibrations of natural radiation and the artificial smog of technical progress. In comparison, the lithosphere is totally quiet. If down there previous C-atom came up by chance, its swinging fills resp. dominates surrounding ether. As soon as any similar vibrations occur, they will resonate – incomparably stronger than would be possible up here in the noise-stressed ether. From this point of view, it is also quite realistic that large quantities of chemical elements are generated down there, especially the beautiful or clear movement patterns of H, C and O. 

 

As mentioned above, three H2 could collide so hard that they wedge together to form a C. However, brute forces do not always have to prevail: If the ether environment is right, the vortices join together to form new atoms or even molecules in a gentle process. In a suitable environment, calm fusion takes place, as I called these transformations above. These are the results of a (real) ether background, which is usually attributed to the presence of (abstract) information, resonance or emergence. Down there, these processes practically take place in pure culture, furthermore in analogue way or in figurative sense also in many other subject areas, just like it corresponds to universal meaning of ether.

Valve, Melting and Collapses 

So there is crackling in the vault of this transition zone, but there will be no continuous boundary surface. Instead, the processes will form more or less large chambers of fast-flying particles, i.e. gas bubbles of great heat, at different locations. At the edges of these chambers, the rock will also be at least partially molten or form a viscous substance. In these glowing chambers, all the molecules move very quickly, so there is heat and high pressure, which naturally pushes outwards. 

 

The result is well-known and impressive, with volcanoes hurling out glowing chunks of rock and streams of lava flowing down the slopes. What is less well known is that far more matter is ejected in the form of methane and other gases as well as water vapour, see Fig. 15.04 left, the Icelandic volcano Eyjafjallajökull in April 2010. These enormous quantities cannot come from the Earth's surface, but must have originated down there, so that the processes described above are quite realistic. 

When a volcano erupts, the gases flow through narrow fissures, where they are accelerated by the jet effect. In the narrow gaps there is an accumulation of multiple collisions with their differentiation of molecular velocities and the flows are accelerated to supersonic speed by the Laval jet effect. The release of kinetic energy causes the melting point of the rock (or this mixture of gases and solids) to be exceeded and liquefied into lava. 

 

As a result, matter flows out of the Earth's interior and the accumulated pressure is suddenly relieved, at least in the vicinity of the volcano. This means that the previous vault could actually collapse or at least partially collapse. In such a process, however, the massive plate of the Pacific Ocean could also have Sunk as a whole and the South American plate could have tilted at the same time. The Andes were suddenly piled up by kilometres, causing the Amazon to flow backwards. Conversely, the floor of the Atlantic, for example, could have ruptured along its entire length, causing magma to continuously escape and the continents to drift apart, see the black smokers on the right of the image. 

 

Centrifugal Force and Hollow Earth

Of course, these can only be speculative assumptions, because no precise data can be known about the Earth's history or its interior. However, even with a conventional understanding of gravity as a force of attraction between masses, there is a problem and there are some arguments in favour of a hollow Earth. Many researchers assume that all celestial bodies are built up in layers – for good reason. The mass at the centre of the Earth was pulled outwards in all directions by (conventional) gravity and would therefore have no weight or only a low density. The highest density would have to occur in a ring or a shell (at a depth of about 2,000 km), because the masses are drawn there from the outside and from the inside, or the greatest attraction would exist within this ring in a tangential direction. 

 

According to considerations above concerning nature and effect of free ether, this barrier layer already exists within transition zone at depth of about 600 km. All external influences, both radiation and universal ether-pressure (as well as gravity, see below), end there at the latest. The masses below this boundary are no longer pushed inwards, but push outwards, based on the normal centrifugal force. 

 

Each ether-vortex wants to move straight ahead within space and this inertia is universal. Only a beating movement of the free ether can move it away from this path, like e.g. the planets drift within the ether of the ecliptic. All atoms inside the Earth are also subject to this movement around the Sun, but they also rotate around the centre of the Earth (driven forward by the Earth's ether-vortex, see next chapter). They push outwards – and instead of a heavy Earth core, there is most probably a void, i.e. no matter at all. 

 

Centrifugal force also exists at the Earth's surface, but it is much less than the pressure acting from outside. Inwards, these forces become smaller and smaller, yet the centrifugal force of the inner masses is largely compensated. However, this gentle pressure from the Earth's interior could very well be the cause of a gradual increase in the Earth's circumference (as has now been reliably established). In contrast to other hypotheses, no new formation of matter is required, e.g. via neutrinos, only the central void expands. 

Area of Gravitation

Since no gravitational forces were involved in any of the previous considerations, the question arises as to how and where gravity actually works. Answer: in the green area or only in the spheres marked green in Figure 15.05. 

 

Gravitational effects begin at the magnetopause, which reaches a height of up to 600,000 km, but is pushed down to 60,000 km on the solar side (or even lower for a short time during extreme solar storms). Gravitation occurs in the ionosphere (where the height of the greatest charge density is also subject to fluctuations). There is also downward thrust in the atmosphere (with its increasing density of gas particles towards the Earth). This external influence also exists in the Earth's crust in the area of the heterogeneous ether. However, the effect of gravity ends at a depth of 600 kilometres in the transition zone at the latest. 

 

Outside the magnetosphere (red areas) the ether is very restless, especially due to the solar wind. Due to the superposition of all radiations, the ether moves chaotically on narrow orbits. Below the lithosphere, the movement patterns within the atoms and in their interspaces are so equalised that there is no longer any radially inward gravitational thrust. Between these two boundaries, in the narrow band of a few thousand kilometres, the structure of the free ether changes continuously. Due to the filter function of the magnetosphere and ionosphere, the ether becomes quieter (because it is freed from hard radiation). In the atmosphere, the free ether already becomes coarser-grained because it gradually takes on the wide oscillation of material particles. 

 

This continues in the Earth's crust and the free ether loses more and more of its fineness in the massive accumulations of coarse matter. This adaptation now even works in the opposite direction: The wide swinging of the ether in deeper layers of rock is also transferred to the free ether on the Earth's surface and even into the atmosphere, so that the ether there swings on larger orbits than the loose accumulation of gas particles could cause.

16 The Nature of Gravity 1]

No Attraction

It is generally accepted that there is an attractive force between unlike charges. However, lightning wanders around in the clouds and does not race straight down to Earth as an attraction would require. 

 

With gases and liquids, suction and pressure play an important role. But again, there is no flow just because there is an area of relatively low density. The suction does not suck in any particles, rather they are only pushed into the relatively free space by pressure from the neighbouring area of higher density. 

 

When stirring, the coarse particles in the teacup collect in the centre – but nobody would think that the particles floating further out would be drawn inwards. In every galaxy there is a large collection of stars in the centre, and astronomers calculate the gigantic masses that would have to be gathered there to keep the stars of the outer spiral arms in their orbit, but it doesn't work, despite black holes.

 

Shadow Casting

Outside of mainstream physics, it is pretty much agreed that gravity can never, ever be an attractive force. It is then also clear that gravity can only come about through some kind of pressure. However, there are many approaches to explaining it. 

 

For a long time, the idea of a pressure shadow was (and still is) favoured. According to this, radiation is absorbed or shielded by a celestial body so that less radiation pressure falls on the neighbouring celestial body from this direction. Due to this difference, the planets, for example, would be pushed towards the Sun. 

 

However, Mercury, for example, has an extremely eccentric orbit. When Mercury moves away from the Sun, the shadow sector becomes smaller – and at its greatest distance, of all places, the planet is supposed to swing back in towards the Sun? The Earth's dented magnetic field shows how strong the radiation pressure from the Sun is, which reduces the shadowing accordingly. Jupiter is a giant among the planets, but how minimal is its Sun protection shade? In addition, light is diffracted in the Sun's sphere of influence and of course all pressure waves would then also be deflected around the Sun, so that there is no real shadowing. Seen in this light, the hypothesis of a radiation shadow is more than questionable. 

 

Gravitational Waves

Special gravitational waves are currently favoured to explain gravity. Somewhere in the universe a star always explodes and the images clearly show how matter flies off in all directions. There must be enormous pressure waves racing through the universe, which also arrive on Earth from all directions practically non-stop. 

 

What is questionable about these theories, however, is through which medium the pressure wave should travel such long distances. In most cases, the necessary clarification of this prerequisite is ignored or it is even assumed that forces could also propagate through absolutely empty space. Many theories assume a somehow elastic or particulate medium, because only there can there be a compressed pressure front and subsequently an area of lower density. 

 

I would like to consider what would result from the many intersecting pressure waves under these conditions. The pressure waves intersect not only in one plane, as the arrows in Fig. 16.01 right at C, but from all directions in space. In all gases (i.e. a particulate medium), density equalisation takes place instantaneously. Frictional losses are also inevitable in an elastic medium (of whatever kind). The signal (or in this case every pressure wave) would smear after a short distance, e.g. because the pressure front will fall laterally into the lower density that happens to exist there and thus fizzle out. 

 

Standing waves are also repeatedly discussed. They do exist, but only if they are exactly mirrored. In three-dimensional, open space, permanent standing waves are simply not possible. It is precisely from these points of view that it is imperative that ether must be a single gapless substance – because only then can not a single signal be lost despite all the confusion of superpositions.

General Ether-Pressure 

It is well known that an electromagnetic wave of high frequency can transport more energy than a low-frequency wave. The forward beating results in the radiation pressure, which is primarily dependent on the number of beats per unit time. At the top of Figure 16.01, two waves are travelling towards each other, on the left with a low frequency (A, blue) and on the right with a high frequency (C, red). A measuring device (B, grey) will register a higher radiation pressure on the right than on the left. 

 

Electromagnetic waves are circular swinging of ether, onto which a forward motion is impressed (resulting in an overall spiral motion pattern). At middle line only stationary swinging of ether is sketched. Track left side results of overlay of two circled motions, resulting swinging with beat. This could, for example, be the tangential movement of a whirlpool, the beat of which is directed upwards here. Two ether-points (D, black) are drawn, swinging parallel to each other. All neighbouring ether-points in between (black straight line) swing synchronously (and analogue all other neighbours). 

 

Right side are drawn two ether-points (E) and their connecting line (black). These ether-points move ahead by same distances each time unit, however at more narrow tracks. A measuring device (B, grey) between both ether-movements again will show higher pressure right side, because ether there will push onto that wall more often each time unit. Like at electromagnetic waves, higher frequency also results higher swinging pressure at stationary swinging.

In the bottom line of this figure 16.01, this law of universal ether-pressure is shown graphically once again: In the ether, there is always a pressure gradient (arrow H) from the region of a narrow oscillation (F, light blue) to the region of a wide oscillation (G, dark blue). Fine swinging at narrow tracks of free ether affects pressure onto coarse swinging at longer tracks of bounded ether. Equivalent is statement, chaotic motions (with small and sharp bended track sections) of free ether affect general ether-pressure onto larger vortex-systems (with their synchronous subordinated motions at longer tracks). 

 

Local units of small volumes have a relatively large surface on which this pressure acts. Electrons are therefore long-lived objects. Atoms are pressed into spheres by this enormous pressure and are therefore so stable. However, the external pressure cannot eliminate the wide oscillation within the unit. The compression only goes so far until equilibrium is reached. There is always an aura of balancing movements around the atoms and the internal oscillation pattern is preserved within it by the surrounding ether-pressure. 

 

The general, constant pressure of chaotic or narrow-spatial motion on local areas of ordered and wide-spatial oscillation results in the cohesion of the local units of motion – from the size of an electron to the galaxy according to the same law. These whirlpools are potential vortices, which show increasingly stronger inward beats on more spacious orbits. The resulting pressure gradient is minimal, but continues to act on material particles as a gentle centripetal thrust. Large quantities of dust are also pushed together to form planets or Suns.

Pressure Gradient 3]

At picture 16.02 left side, once more simplified characteristic of free ether by different swinging is shown more schematic. Far outside at A, hot ether trembles in nervous motion at short track sections. Further down at B, calm ether swings at wider tracks. Speed of movements everywhere will be same size (above speed of light), only tracks downside will be further stretched (corresponding to movement pattern of bounded ether). At atoms (light blue) within atmosphere, restless ether shakes from upside and affects pressure onto its surface (dark green arrows). Below this atom, the ether behaves somewhat more conform to its internal movements, i.e. the pressure (light green arrows) from below is gradually weaker than that from above. 

 

The difference results in the radial thrust of gravity. The structure of the free ether changes only marginally, but increasingly towards the Earth. This results in the relatively weak force of gravity, which is maximum at the Earth's surface, becomes weaker with increasing altitude and is barely perceptible above the magnetosphere. The gradual changes in the ether-structure continue into the Earth's crust, but become less pronounced with increasing depth until they reach the transition zone. However, this gradient is no longer present in the area with exclusively crystalline rock or plasmatic mixtures. 

 

This process is the cause and effect of gravity, which is only effective in the vicinity of the Earth and, analogously, in other celestial bodies. However, gravity is not a universe-wide force and it is by no means a constant force. It acts here on Earth with less strength with increasing altitude, but it ends at the limit of its aura. Gravity is not dependent on the mass of a celestial body, but on the structure in its immediate surroundings (presence of a magnetic field, an ion or atmosphere) and its inner structure (e.g. solid or only gaseous layers).

 

Like at previous ether with beating component, atoms are deformed and internal spiral springs (see curved connecting lines at C) are tensioned different strong. As a result, all material particles are pushed or pressed towards the Earth's surface.

In the later photomontage, I put the explanation of gravity based on pressure gradients between high and low frequency into Einstein's mouth. He had recognised very well that the conventional concept of motion could not be applied to the ether. However, he was no longer able to elaborate on its differentiated oscillation.

 

Gravitational Waves or Gravitons

This general ether-pressure is not identical to the gravitational waves of some gravitational hypotheses. There it is assumed that a supernova is taking place practically non-stop somewhere in the universe and therefore pressure waves (in whatever medium) are travelling through space from all directions. Neighbouring celestial bodies are said to offer each other pressure shadows and are thus pushed towards each other. 

 

I think that these hypotheses are not tenable because even the Earth would only draw a tiny shadow spot on the surface of the Sun. This shadow cast by the outer planets is practically zero. In addition, it is not taken into account that every pressure wave was naturally bent around celestial bodies, i.e. the Sun could not offer its planets any shadow at all. The idea of gravitons, which, like the Higgs particle, are supposed to perform some kind of sticking function, remains completely incomprehensible.

Differentiated Gravity 

The Earth's gravity is not uniform either; there are areas with lower or stronger gravitational forces. Complex procedures, highly sensitive devices and a great deal of computing effort result in a geoid, as shown in Fig. 16.03 (source wikipedia), for example. This shows various elevations (red) and depressions (blue) of up to around 120 metres compared to the normal shape of the Earth's surface. 

 

It is assumed that the strength of gravity is related to the distance from the centre of the Earth. The measured differences are converted into the corresponding height relative to normal zero or the ideal ellipsoid. Essentially, these deviations of up to 0.02 per mille are attributed to different mass accumulations in the Earth's structure. Other influencing factors are also known, but many questions remain unanswered. Of course, attempts are being made to clarify these with improved technology, but there is no doubt about the general definition of gravity and its dependence on mass and radius. 

 

Variable Gravity 

If this were really the case, then there should be no fluctuation in gravity at one location during the course of a day that is hundreds of times greater, i.e. in the range of whole per thousand. Fig.16.04 shows a diagram by Dr Dietrich Schuster, an outstanding natural scientist. Being a chemist, he had experience in handling highly sensitive balances and, of course, doing experiments. 

 

He built several cylinders from layers of crystalline rock and copper grids, mounted on a balance as a freely rotating rotor. The whole thing was hermetically sealed and all measured values were recorded and analysed electronically. After some time, the rotor begins to turn automatically (anti-clockwise) and its weight (of approx. 20 kg, depending on the material used) decreases by about 7 g (see starting phase on the left in the picture). During the night, the rotor becomes another 2 g lighter (area marked in dark blue). One hour before Sunrise (SR), the observed mass very quickly becomes heavier again (marked in orange) and increases in weight again in the middle of the day (light yellow).

The following day, this aberration of gravity is repeated in the same way. Schuster experimented with rotors of different materials, and this basic process was observed (always with deviations in the gram range, i.e. far outside the error tolerance). Even greater deviations were observed during a solar eclipse. The measured values even reacted to thunderstorms or the current atmosphere (e.g. because the rotors responded to orgone). Schuster also showed very simple experiments at events, where, for example, completely normal glass measuring beakers showed clear deviations in their weight due to an electrostatically charged ring (without direct contact). 

 

The above diagram can also be easily explained by electrostatic influence or its real ether-background: During the night, the Earth is shielded from the hard radiation of the Sun. The long-range oscillation of the atoms or the ether between the atoms can extend further into the atmosphere and ionosphere. Close to the Earth's surface, the gradients are therefore smaller, i.e. the mass becomes lighter (in Fig. 16.02 above, a smaller difference above and below the atom there). Shortly before Sunrise, the solar radiation already hits the ionosphere, the ether there becomes more hectic, i.e. the oscillation difference is pushed down and the increased gradient results in measurably higher weight. When the Sun is higher, the unrest in the ether is pushed further down. Only when the Sun's radiation falls at an angle does calming occur again and the transition from the wide to the narrow oscillation of the ether shifts further outwards. 

 

Certainly the different accumulation of rock masses has an influence on the above geoid. But it is not the mass itself, but the rest or unrest in the background that is important – nevertheless, the current environment of the Earth has a greater influence. Even more serious is the difference depending on whether a celestial body consists of solid or gaseous matter, has an atmosphere and/or a magnetic field. Gravity is therefore individual for each celestial body. 

Individual Gravitation 

Fig. 16.05 shows the principle variants of gravitation for different celestial bodies. A shows the conventional view of gravity (G). The mass of the celestial body should be decisive here and its effect decreases in inverse proportion to the radius (see curve above the red area). Theoretically, this gravity extends infinitely far and in fact this universal constant is calculated up to the Big Bang or the end of the universe (an absurdity in itself). The mass is thought to be point-like, but even with this view of gravitational force, the matter in the centre is weightless, i.e. the gravitational force towards the centre is zero. 

 

At B, the cause of the gravitational effect discussed above is outlined. The free ether between atoms gradually takes on the wide swinging of the bounded ether, i.e. the material vortex complexes. From the Earth's crust inwards, all movements increasingly coincide, so that there is no gravity at all within the transition zone (red ring). Towards outside, wide ether-swinging spreads, however by reduced scale (represented by arrow-rings). Within really neutral free ether (left side), such aura could reach out ten million km (to oppose previous infinity, where e.g. between Earth and neighbouring planets would be enough space). The Earth's vortex system will almost certainly reach out one million kilometres. An accumulation of matter should therefore be able to be smelled at least 100,000 km away – on the basis of somewhat extended vibrations in the neutral ether. 

 

Naked Moon 

This influence emanates from the surface, no matter how flat or round it is and thus no matter what mass is behind it, so this radiation is the same for the Earth and the Moon, for example. However, the Moon has no magnetic field and no atmosphere, so that hard radiation with its hectic motion pushes the wide oscillation far back. This situation is represented in C by the arrows, so that the gravitational effect (light grey) is reduced to a narrow environment (see flat curve, which only rises shortly before the surface). 

 

The main gravitational force probably only sets in at 10,000 km. For example, lunar satellites are first slowed down to an elliptical orbit with a maximum of 3,000 km. Most satellites later fly on orbits at an altitude of 200 km and orbit the Moon in around two hours at around 6,000 km/h. A Japanese satellite is currently orbiting the Moon at an altitude of 50 kilometres. During Apollo 10, the Moon landing was rehearsed: the command module flew at an altitude of around 100 km and a lunar module was lowered to the point of no return at 14 km. Only at such a low altitude does the Moon's gravitational pull reach greater strength.

 

However, the expansion of the material oscillation is pushed back so much by radiation that even on the lunar surface the gravity only reaches a fraction of the earthly gravity. Based on these considerations, I maintain that the Moon's gravity decreases more strongly towards the outside than inversely proportional to the distance. The same applies to other solid celestial bodies that are exposed to radiation without a protective shell. No matter how large or small they are, gravity will only occur in close proximity and have less force than our earthly gravity. 

 

Heavyless Stars and Gaseous Planets 

Contrary to common belief, large gaseous planets and stars have even lower gravitational forces. In solid planets, the atoms sit close together, water is five times less dense, but the spaces between gas particles are a thousand times wider. These are individual atoms or molecules with only a few atoms and they do not form large clusters. The ether in the gas therefore has no reason to adopt the structure of motion of these atoms or particles. As a result, the ether further outside will hardly exhibit a significantly extended oscillation. Where there is no gradient between narrow and wide swinging, there is also no gravity. 

 

At this picture at D, long-distance effect (light green) e.g. is marked with maximum 50,000 km height above gas surface, however gravity could become effective only starting from 5,000 km (e.g. at Jupiter like at Sun). Only if the celestial body has an ordered magnetic field or an atmosphere, the external radiation is filtered out and gravitational effect could then be given there outside, e.g. at 25,000 km as noted at E (see curve above the green area). 

 

I am of course aware that this statement is provocative to the point of being completely implausible. Everyone is free to continue to believe in the gravitational pull of the masses and that this is the only way to keep the planets and moons in their orbits. In reality, they only swim with the whirlpool of the ecliptic around the Sun or, for example, in the whirlpool of the Earth-ether-vortex. There is a clear alternative of orbit-holding forces that bind e.g. the Moon and satellites to the Earth (see next chapter). 

 

Earthly Gravity 

In this Fig. 16.05, the increasing force of earthly gravity is shown again at the bottom at F. The magnetic field is stretched up to 600,000 km on the night side, but in this long tail there are no clean gradients in terms of wide and narrow ether-oscillations. On the solar side, the magnetopause is compressed to 60,000 kilometres and it is only at this altitude that terrestrial gravity essentially sets in. 

 

However, there is no continuous increase in the forces, as would result according to the usual formula corresponding to the radius. Rather, the gradients move inwards and outwards with the changes in the ionosphere (light green) and also in the atmosphere (dark green), see also the above example of aberration in Fig. 16.04. It would be a worthwhile task for research institutions to determine the respective strength of gravity at different altitudes above a location over time in order to recognise the true nature of gravity and confirm these claims. 

 

The force of gravity will decrease towards the centre of the Earth (dark green) and will no longer have any effect from a depth of 600 km. These phenomena, which deviate from current doctrine, have already been partially proven. For example, fall experiments have shown that mass is neither accelerated uniformly nor does it fall vertically (but on a spiral path, like all movements in the ether). 

Change of Opinion and Einstein Episode 

As difficult as it may be to accept, there is no doubt that gravity is only a phenomenon in the immediate vicinity of celestial bodies. Each has its own individual gravitational force with a specific range and gradual gradation. Earthly gravity cannot be transferred beyond its sphere of influence. Gravity is not a universal and constant force. All calculations with the gravitational constant beyond this narrow space are absolutely misleading. 

 

Many readers know that gravity cannot be identical with the attraction attributed to it. Astronomy has major problems with its calculations based on constant gravity. The planets do not move according to the given laws, the Milky Way cannot function in this way and there is a lack of mass in the universe or anti-gravity must be included. I am convinced there must be something generally wrong with the current understanding of gravity. But I fear that many readers are not willing to follow these unconventional ideas because the common dogma is too resistant. It is therefore a pity that the Einstein photomontage on the right is not true. He would have been followed even if he had oversimplified: 

The ether in space is high-frequency. The hardest radiation is absorbed in the Earth's spheres and the Earth only emits low-frequency radiation anyway. Every atom A on or above the Earth's surface is therefore exposed to a gradient of vibrational pressure. The gravitation G corresponds to the difference between the high frequency HF and the low frequency LF of the ether around the Earth ..., see Fig. 16.06.

 

To prove this experimentally, he would have stretched a steel cable across the lecture theatre on which a ball could slide back and forward. Students were allowed to shake both ends and everyone could easily find out when and why the ball was moved to one side. 

 

Nobody would have had to believe Einstein, but would have recognised the nature of gravity as a matter of course. Unfortunately, Einstein did not realise the above reverse conclusion in time and left behind an audience that is confused until today. Otherwise the history of physics and technology, and possibly humanity, would have taken a different course. So we have lost a century.

17 Ether-Whirlpool Earth 3]

Analogous to the solar system, the Earth system is constructed in the form of an ether-whirlpool that also rotates to the left. The Earth appears massive to us, but is only an accumulation of many atoms, thus a conglomerate of local vortex bundles of ether within ether. In Fig. 17.01, known data are noted at A above. The radius of the Earth in (E, blue) is about 6,378 km and at the equator the surface rotates with about 0.5 km/s. At an altitude of 35,786 km, satellites (GS) must move at around 3 km/s in order to maintain a geostationary position. Up to this point, the angular velocity is therefore constant, as with rigid vortices (VR).

 

At an average altitude of 384,400 km, the Moon (M) drifts around the Earth at only 1 km/s, about 1 turn every month. Towards the outside, the absolute and angular velocity decreases, as with every potential vortex (VP). From this it can be concluded that the limit of the whirlpool (WL) is given at a radius of about one million kilometres (about as far as the influence of gravity has been assumed so far).

In the second line of the image at B, the position of the Sun (S, yellow) is far to the left and the ecliptic is indicated as a dashed yellow line (SW). On the night side of the Earth, the beating of the Sun and Earth-whirlpools add up, which is relatively smooth. On the day side, the beating is in the opposite direction, see Fig. 17.02. When two currents flow against each other, the water does not simply stand still, rather both currents move away from each other. Similarly, the Earth's whirlpool (EW, green curve in Fig. 17.01) does not move in the ecliptic plane, but swerves upwards.

 

The Earth's whirlpool does not oscillate in a flat plane, it is shaped more like a floppy hat. One sign of this is the strange wobble of the Moon (oscillating between 18 and 28 degrees in relation to the equatorial plane). The Moon rotates on its own axis once every month and it will have its own whirlpool (probably the cause of the Spring delay, where the highest tide always occurs a few days after the New and Full Moon). The Earth's whirlpool is also slightly tilted or twisted at right angles to the Earth-Sun direction (presumably by 15 degrees).

The north-south deviation of the satellites is less than that of the Moon. Obviously, the Earth's whirlpool only swings into the equatorial plane AE in the last few kilometres, see the curved green curve for EW in Fig. 17.01 at B. At the bottom at C, the Earth's whirlpool is drawn as a light blue area. Like most galaxies, this ether-vortex will also be lens-shaped. In the centre, the rigid Earth rotates uniformly. Up to the geostationary satellites, an equalisation of 27 km/s must take place on the Sun side and 33 km/s on the night side. 

 

On the one hand, this leads to an inclination of the Earth's axis, just like the solar axis (and the other planets), where even the equator rotates faster than the regions at higher latitudes. On the other hand, this results in constant turbulence around the Earth (TW, light red). This results in long, drawn-out vortex filaments (called magnetic field lines). Or spherical curls are created, which form the free electrons of the ionosphere or generate the negative charge on the Earth's surface. 

 

Under no circumstances is the gravitational pull of the Moon the cause of the 23° inclination of the Earth's axis of rotation, as described in conventional physics. Otherwise the Earth's axis would have to wobble, as the Earth rotates on its own axis once a day and the Moon takes about 28 days to turn round the Earth. 

Material Potential-Vortex 

The Earth is surrounded by ether, which is constantly vibrating and in motion. This chapter describes the movement pattern of this ether-whirlpool and what moves in it, how and why, e.g. the Moon and artificial satellites, the tides and the Earth's magnetic field. Firstly, however, we should remember the characteristics of potential vortices. Well-known examples of this form of motion are water vortices and hurricanes. Figure 17.03 shows their characteristics. 

 

A shows arrows in a tangential direction, which indicate the speed of particles. From the outside inwards, the particles move in the direction of rotation (here always anti-clockwise) with increasing angular and absolute velocity. At B, this increasing speed is illustrated by the curve.

The centrifugal force becomes stronger with increasing speed and shorter radius. A boundary is formed at which the potential vortex turns into a rigid vortex. In the inner area (dark blue), everything rotates at a constant angular velocity. Towards the centre, the absolute velocity of the particles decreases, as marked at C. 

 

At D some particles are marked from inside to outside. In the vortex core, the particles (grey) rotate as a rigid vortex (practically like a wheel). Towards the outside, the particles move forwards more and more slowly (marked in different colours of red). The outer particles remain further and further behind during the rotation (see position E and then F). 

 

In Figure 17.04, this movement pattern is sketched as a swarm of fish, whereby the outer fish swim slowly and are overtaken by faster fish on the inside. Every natural water vortex rotates in the form of this movement pattern. During the constant overtaking processes, the particles glide past each other, which leads to friction or, instead of laminar interfaces, results in tighter vortex braids in the vortex. 

 

In gases, the particles are not constantly in contact with each other, but they do collide permanently. The vortices of a tornado or of small whirlwinds are self-accelerating because the static air pressure of the environment is converted into the dynamic pressure of the rotating movement, resulting in two-dimensional patterns. Here, however, their radial arrangement in the form of discs will be discussed (as actually existing as the Milky Way, as the ecliptic and as the whirlpool of the Earth system).

 

Similar motion sequences also take place in the ecliptic, whereby the outer planets are overtaken by the faster planets on narrower orbits. However, these particles are not in direct contact with each other, but fly around in circles in empty space. The necessary pressure for the cohesion (or even the acceleration) of the vortex must therefore have another cause. Since a force of attraction through nothing cannot be seriously assumed (but is nevertheless common scientific opinion), only the characteristics of an etheric vortex can be responsible.

Swinging Ether-Disc 

The ether itself is stationary in principle and therefore can not perform a wide-range rotating movement. The ether can only oscillate at minimal radii. It does not consist of particles that could slide past each other. Neighbouring ether-points must therefore move largely parallel to each other. However, asymmetrical ether-oscillation is also possible and it is only from this that the long-range flows of material particles arise. 

 

At picture 17.05 at A is sketched, how neighbouring ether-points (marked by red curve) move at likely circled tracks parallel to each other within space. Radius of these swinging motions well can become wider, like sketched at B. There, an ether-point C (black) at the moment is at its downside position. 

 

If somewhere ether has moved downwards, somewhere ether must have moved upwards for equalisation. As ether is gapless and inelastic, there must always be equalisation (here marked by dotted arrows E). Also right side, ether turns same sense, however shifted by 180 degrees. In this case, the ether-point D is currently in its upper position and so are its neighbours on the blue curve.

As soon as a movement takes place somewhere in the ether on extended orbits, this movement pattern of a double-crank (here the red and blue curve) necessarily results. This corresponds to the axis of an electron, for example. In atoms, such movement patterns are arranged radially to each other in a spherical shape. Here, however, their radial arrangement in the form of discs will be discussed (as actually existing as the Milky Way, the ecliptic and the whirlpool of the Earth system). 

 

The light blue area at the top of the image represents a longitudinal section through a vortex disc. Many of these double-crank vortices are arranged radially around its centre, resulting in a round vortex surface. The light blue areas at the bottom of the image represent cross-sections through this vortex disc or a view of it. 

 

One of the double-cranks is emphasised by the red and blue curves. An ether-point F (black) is currently located below the 9 o'clock position. All cranks turn synchronously around their longitudinal axes, each pointing in a radial direction. The picture below right shows the situation after a crank rotation of 180 degrees. The previous ether-point is now at G, i.e. above the 9 o'clock position. All points oscillate in the same way. The disc as a whole thus moves in phases slightly to the left and then back to the right (see double arrow H). 

 

All distances between ether-points remain constant – like necessary within gapless ether. Even this ether is an absolutely solid substance (comparable to a solid body), ether locally moves within such swinging patterns. Precisely because neighbouring ether-points must behave adequately, such areas of ordered movement automatically result.

Swinging With Beat 

In reality, the free ether moves along ball-shaped orbits. In these two-dimensional images, the orbits are shown as circular paths in a highly simplified form. For example, an ether-point A (black) moves 30 degrees around its centre of rotation per time unit, top left in Figure 17.06. This movement with radius R1 (light blue circular areas) is usually superimposed by a rotation with radius R2 (red circular areas). Upside right this is shown at twelve positions of an observed ether-point (black). 

 

If both turnings are same sense and same speed, previous ether-point A at 3 o'clock is outside of light blue circle area, however inside at 9 o'clock-position at B. The previously round light blue circular path is thereby deformed into an apple-shaped path, as sketched again at the bottom left by the blue path section C and the red path section D. 

 

The two different sections are shown again at the bottom right of the image. In the light red sector E, the ether-point only travels a short distance relatively slowly for six time units. Also during six time units, the ether-point in the red sector F moves much faster and further in the direction of rotation. Such overlays result a non-uniform motion sequence. This inevitably results a beating component of movement.

Swinging Forwards and Backwards 

Opposite to previous material potential-vortex (picture 17.03 and 17.04), here no wide rotation occurs. In principle, the ether remains stationary and only swings within a small frame of motion. Fig. 17.07 shows another view of a vortex disc, but now with the characteristics of an ether potential vortex. 

 

Cross to radial direction, previous circled tracks are arranged with radius increasing from outside towards inside (at A). Decisive is the radius R2 of the superimposed movement, because this determines the circumference of the beat. The longer and faster sector is again marked in red, the shorter and slower section of the path is marked in blue. 

 

At B are drawn connecting lines of neighbouring ether-points from centre to border of vortex-disc. These curves thus result of their parallel swinging at each radius: outside at narrow tracks, towards inside at increasing wider tracks-with-beat, towards centre again at very small radius. Left side at B schematic is sketched movement within slow segment (blue), where ether-points take much time for swinging back (clockwise). 

 

Right side at C, opposite is sketched movement within fast sector (red), where ether-points cover same distances within shorter time while swinging left-turning ahead. Below at D, difference of these beats is marked as curve (above dark red area): at border of vortex-disc practically zero (neutral free ether), towards inside increasing (like at potential vortex), finally decreasing towards centre (like at rigid vortex).

Illusion 

It is clear that our seven senses (including gut feeling and intuition) can only recognise a very limited section of reality. The greatest illusion, however, is that we believe we live in a world of material particles. For example, we drive a car assembled from solid parts or observe the rapid movement of gigantic celestial bodies. In fact, however, nothing moves forward in the only existing substance of the ether, which is only ever vibrating in its place. 

 

The previous diagrams are extremely exaggerated: The Earth's vortex disc has a radius of about one million kilometres. The radius R1 of a circular motion sketched above will be billionths of a nanometre small (just to name one figure). The eccentric overlay with the above radius R2 will be millions of times smaller. The respective beat will therefore be minimal. However, all ether will swing at least at speed of light, so this almost imperceptible beating will occur at high frequency. In reality, there are no far-reaching ether-currents. An ether-whirlpool really consists only of tiny, non-uniform movements of stationary ether. Nevertheless, this minimal beating does cause material effects on a macroscopic scale.

Thrust on Atoms 

Atoms consist of completely normal ether, which merely oscillates in a special pattern. Many movements can overlap in the ether, e.g. radiation of different kinds and directions. However, this can hardly penetrate atoms and the movements of the atoms cannot overlap at all. On the other hand, the atoms do react to movement patterns in the surrounding ether. 

 

At picture 17.08 at A schematic is sketched an atom. It consists of radially arranged vortices, whereby only one of these double-cranks is shown here.

All the vortices meet in the core and all movements must be synchronised in a small space. The bending capacity of the ether is maximised there – and only therefore atoms and especially their nuclei appear as hard particles. In reality, however, there are no particles at all, everything is only made of the one ether. These special movement patterns are compressed into vortex balls by the general ether-pressure (see arrows B) of the environment. 

 

At previous chapters was described in details, how motion-pattern are pushed ahead within space. Therefore, here the basic process is only briefly described. At C, the beating discussed above is marked by red arrows. The lower vortex D of the atom is compressed to a shorter length and must therefore be pushed further to the side. This beating occurs practically simultaneously everywhere, so that the upper vortex E is stretched. The entire vortex complex of the atom is deformed into an egg shape, pressed flat and wide at the bottom and pulled narrower and more pointed at the top (see light blue area). 

 

As soon as the beating of the surrounding ether weakens and ends, the general ether-pressure pushes back the lower bulges (see arrows F) and the atom returns to its original spherical shape. However, this vortex complex G is now displaced by a small distance in space, i.e. the atom has trembled forwards slightly in the direction of the beat, i.e. it has moved slightly upwards. 

 

Once more, the difference between apparent motion of material particles and real ether-motions is clearly expressed: only the motion pattern of atoms was shifted some ahead. All ether, however, generally remains at the place of its frame of motion. Ether within large whirlpool swings quite normal within space, only overlaid by previous beating motion-component. From time to time, the movement pattern of an atom is pushed through a localised area. The ether there therefore only temporarily and transiently takes on the movement pattern of an atom. 

 

Nothing more happens in the ether – even if it looks to us as if gigantic planets are hurtling through space. Planets consist only of atoms. Atoms are not particles, they are just differently complex vortices and are therefore differently bulky to changes (which is called mass). Ultimately, everything is just the movement of ether within ether, albeit with different local oscillations and changes over time.

Asteroid on a Counter-Course 

Whenever an object enters the gravitational field of the Sun or the Earth, the orbital data is recorded and the further course is predicted according to Newton and Kepler. However, a comet or asteroid usually behaves somewhat differently. However, this is not due to any disruptive factors, rather the common modelling does not correspond to reality, because this far-reaching gravity does not exist, but only this beating of the movements in the whirlpools. 

 

At picture 17.09, blue surfaces represent space resp. free ether and light blue surfaces are left-turning discs of ether-whirlpools. When objects (black dots) enter this area from outside, their paths (black curves) are influenced by the beating of the ether. In each case, the section and side from which the thrust acts on the atoms is marked in red.

At A, an object flies radially towards the centre of the vortex, but its flight is deflected to the right (always as seen in the direction of flight). This path is therefore different from that which would result from normal gravity. At B, the object flies in at a flatter angle, against the direction of rotation of the vortex. The path is steered to the right towards the centre by the lateral thrust (area marked in red) (as would also correspond to the supposed gravity). However, due to the headwind from the front left, the object slows down (i.e. against a supposed gravitational acceleration). 

 

The Earth is left-turning around the Sun and its ether environment also shows left-turning beats. The previous orbits will show objects approaching the Earth from the front (clockwise to the Sun). From the edge of the Earth's whirlpool to the magnetopause (where the Earth's local gravitational field begins at the earliest), an asteroid, for example, will approach on orbits like A or B. 

 

Comet Flyby 

If a comet also approaches from this direction and passes the Earth on the night side (the side facing away from the Sun), its path will be similar to that of C or D. Initially, it will be pushed slightly towards the Earth by the headwind from the front left side. Later, this push will come from the other side (see sectors marked in red) and the orbit will be pushed outwards. On this S-shaped orbit, the comet is slightly decelerated. 

 

In this image on the right, the previous objects fly into the Earth's sphere of influence at the same angle, but now from the other direction: from behind at high speed (faster than the Earth orbits the Sun). The previous comets now come from positions G and H and enter the whirlpool (in the same direction as its rotation). Both will again fly on S-shaped orbits and pass the Earth, for example, at a distance of half a kilometre to a million kilometres (this is how far the Earth's whirlpool extends). 

 

At E it is sketched that an asteroid can, for example, approach the Earth at a small angle against the direction of rotation of the Earth and finally fall down to Earth in a radial direction (while on the left the comparable asteroid A first approaches radially from the outside and finally falls down at an angle). 

 

No Parabolic Flight 

F now shows the situation where a space vagabond approaches the Sun so that its orbit is redirected in the whirlpool of the ecliptic. Similarly, the Earth and neighbouring planets are used to send satellites on their journey to outer planets by gravitational slingshot. In both cases, the laws of astrophysics result in very beautiful, parabolic orbits. 

 

The starting position at F corresponds to the previous position at B, only now the object flies into the whirlpool in its direction of rotation. The path F is initially pushed to the right (due to the thrust on the left, marked in red). The object is pushed into a circular path in the direction of rotation of the beat. If the speed of the object is too high there, it moves outwards due to inertia. On this opening spiral path (or even tangentially straight path), the beating movement now comes from the right, i.e. the thrust acts laterally from behind (see second red section). This deflects the trajectory to the left until the object finally leaves the whirlpool. 

 

In principle, this again results in an S-shaped trajectory, which, however, is deflected further around the centre of the vortex. In reality, the parabolic orbits calculated by formula never occur. The orbit of each comet must be determined anew each time. In the case of the gravitational slingshot mentioned above, it was recognised beyond doubt that, for inexplicable reasons, the take-off speed is faster (and in some constellations slower) than calculated. Presumably the direction will also not be correct (because course corrections have to be made afterwards). Surprisingly, when satellites leave the solar system, they fly faster or slower than expected, which is inexplicable in outer space. 

 

I am making far-reaching claims without being yet able to substantiate them. I can only recommend not to understand the flight of the objects as rigid celestial mechanics, but to follow it from the perspective of an ether-whirlpool. There is sufficient opportunity, data and computing capacity available for experts. If the trajectories were planned according to these new criteria, there would be a higher hit rate for Mars probes, for example.

In the Carousel of the Ecliptic 

Not all objects cross an ether-whirlpool, but remain trapped in it. This situation is schematically sketched in Figure 17.10: Here an object A (black) flies at a flat angle into an ether-disc beating to the left. As explained above, the trajectory is first deflected to the right (see red area of the lateral thrust). 

 

The object then flies in a tangential direction for a certain time until the lateral thrust from the outside pushes the trajectory back into the direction of rotation of the system. This sequence of relatively straight, outwardly orientated path sections and more inwardly curved sections can be repeated (sketched four times here, for example). 

 

Every object wants to move forwards in space in a straight line due to inertia. If the path of the object is curved, centrifugal force arises or centripetal counterforce is required for the path curvature. 

In this case, the object was relatively close to the centre of the vortex, but then moved further and further into the circle. The paths out there are less strongly curved and the centrifugal force is correspondingly lower. The object will eventually swing into a circular path where the lateral thrust of the beat is sufficient to compensate for the centrifugal force. 

 

Object B is shown on the right-hand side of this image. Its path moves around the centre of the vortex, but not in an exactly circular path. Again and again, the object flies slightly outwards due to its inertia. The greater the angle to the tangential direction of the beat, the more violently the lateral thrust pushes the trajectory inwards again. 

 

The speed of the object can vary due to various influences. The curvature of the path is variable and so are the centrifugal forces that occur. The beating in the direction of rotation of the system will not be completely continuous. In principle, its force decreases towards the edge of the vortex system. Only when these factors result in an overall equilibrium does the orbit approach a circular shape with an adequate radius. 

 

This explains why planets never fly in exact circles around the Sun. The orbits are also not exact ellipses, they are not even symmetrical ovals, because there are too many influencing factors. The planets fly on eccentric orbits, but these do not always have to be self-contained. They can form rosette patterns or outward and inward spiralling orbits. For example, the distance between the Moon and the Earth changes regularly within a month, but it also flies further and further along its orbit for eight years before coming closer to the Earth again. 

 

The mathematically formulated laws of celestial mechanics cannot do justice to these facts. The formulae do not even correspond to the effective principle: in the previous images, no central mass (of the Sun or Earth) was deliberately drawn in; the orbits of these objects do not require any attractive forces, but are based exclusively on beating in the sense of rotation of an ether-whirlpool.

Worlds in Collision 

is the title of a book by Dr Immanuel Velikovsky and several other authors (Sitchin, Lutze and others), describing unbelievable scenarios. Figure 17.11 schematically sketches the situation when two celestial bodies approach each other, from which the dramatic events can be derived. In A, a normal road A (grey) is drawn, on which two vehicles (green and red dots) pass each other. Apart from a few air turbulences, nothing happens. When celestial bodies meet, the central strip (B, light grey) between these vehicles would have to be comparatively more than half a kilometre wide – otherwise a catastrophe would occur. 

 

This situation arose when the Earth was overtaken by the faster Venus at too close a distance. The blue dot E represents the Earth, which is moving upwards here. Only one sector of its ether-whirlpool is marked in light blue with its left-turning beat (see dashed arrow). The red dot V on the left represents Venus and the light red sector marks the area of its surrounding whirlpool. At overlapping area C (here only sketched as coarse light-blue-red pattern) the ether was in extreme turmoil.

All ether moves at approximately the speed of light. When opposing motions intersect at acute angles, the intersections race through space at many times the speed of light, here to the right towards Earth and equally to the left towards Venus (like the steep waves of a cross sea). Electromagnetic storms rage throughout the space between the objects. The internal mobility or bending tolerance of the gapless ether is maximally strained. The excessive tension can only be relieved by rapidly flying vibrations. 

 

Myths and legends, holy books and ancient writings from all over the world tell of celestial battles involving gods in the form of comets, planets and stars. For example, a comet (lshtar, Phaethon, Quetzalcohuatl) is said to have encountered the Earth several times, only to be born as a morning and evening star. This comet therefore entered a narrow orbit, where it is still orbiting the Sun as the planet Venus. These encounters had catastrophic consequences for the Earth – and for humans – a few thousand years ago.

 

Disaster Reports 

Thunderstorms of unprecedented intensity rained down, water stormed up the mountains, the night lasted for days and on the other side the Sun did not set, the Earth cracked open and volcanoes ejected fire and ash, whole parts of the Earth rose or fell, it rained in streams for weeks, everything was devastated and many people died, especially in the settlements along rivers and coasts, the remaining people could only survive because manna fell from the sky, all culture and civilisation was largely destroyed, mankind had to start again practically from zero. 

 

The stories are like this and even more confusing and could be dismissed as the result of exuberant imagination if they didn't match in many details all over the world. Some survived this catastrophe and their children and grandchildren grew up in a world that was quite normal for them. What would the ancestors have told their descendants: fantastic tall tales or truthful accounts of their extreme experiences? Due to a lack of personal experience, subsequent generations would have distorted the reports to suit the prevailing culture. Two hundred generations later, a new civilisation – today's civilisation – has achieved so much scientifically established knowledge that most people hardly pay any attention to such fairy tales any more. 

 

Physical Reality 

One of these fixations is that geology assumes long evolutionary processes and generally excludes short-term, catastrophic events. Geological evidence is simply not taken into account. For example, the deposits in the north of the Alps could never have originated from normal erosion. The Mediterranean must have swept over the mountains and piled up huge layers of rubble in a very short time. Boulders lie practically everywhere – in places where a glacier could never have transported them. 

 

There were extensive freshwater lakes in the Sahara that must have abruptly drained into the oceans. Everywhere there are sedimentary rocks in thick layers that could never have formed so uniformly over millions of years. However, a slurry of water and sand is incredibly fluid and can solidify to a concrete-like consistency within a short period of time due to heat. The stone witnesses are obvious – only mainstream science ignores them, because otherwise there would be too much to revise in terms of conventional ideas. 

 

Another fixed idea is that of gravity and heaviness: that mass is mutually attractive and that all atoms are heavy. Atoms have no weight, they are made of ether just like all their surroundings. These special movement patterns float in the ether, or tremble and race around at incredible speeds. Each air particle flies from one collision to the next at 550 m/s or 2,000 km/h and we don't notice a thing. Everything is only pushed towards the Earth's surface due to gradual differences in the local ether-movements (see previous chapters) – and we hardly notice it. At the same time, we move with the ecliptic and rotate through space with the Earth's whirlpool and don't feel it. 

 

During the encounter with Venus there were extreme ether-movements. The Earth beat a volte face and was displaced two million kilometres (about the diameter of the Earth's whirlpool) outwards in the ecliptic. Instead of 360 days, one orbit now takes about five days longer. How were people able to survive this procedure, why were they not hurled high into the air or pushed to the ground with great force? 

 

Ether-Vortices in Swirling Ether 

They felt as little of these extremely violent movements as we did of our constant journey through space. The astronomers were able to observe their instruments in peace and quiet and in the Orient they were able to determine to the exact day and hour that the Sun did not set in the west, but rose again in the sky. In distant Asia, they observed and documented how fixed stars wobbled in the firmament. 

 

All atoms are only vortex-complexes of ether within ether. If the surrounding ether is not only neutrally swinging, but has a beating component of motion in a favoured direction, the atomic motion patterns in space are pushed forward somewhat (as shown above). At this catastrophe, all ether was in strong motion, and in direction of prevailing, strong beating, motion-pattern of all atoms within space were pushed ahead, all atoms of one human being like all atoms (at least) of his near neighbourhood. All ether behaved equally, there was no relative movement between humans and the ground below them. 

 

Birth of New Vortex Systems 

All ether at that time was in much more violent movements than at present normal conditions. During this encounter between Earth and Venus and for a long time afterwards, disorganised fragments of motion rushed towards Earth. Even the outer layers of the atmosphere were ionised because an electron forms the smallest, locally ordered vortex structure. If such double-cranks are asymmetrical, they require a slightly wider equalisation range, which then results in an H atom. If several such vortices come together radially, the result is atoms of C or O, for example. 

 

All atoms have a special aura that extends far into their surroundings. If previous fragments of movement penetrate into areas where such patterns already exist, they will join together accordingly. When unusually many and diverse movements were buzzing through the ether in those times, many fragments were able to form themselves into movement patterns analogue to those already present. There was an inflationary generation of the above elements H, C and O, for example. These atoms were created anew, but not out of nothing, but from the huge quantity of ether movement fragments by organising themselves according to existing patterns. 

 

H and O were able to burn to H2O and it rained cats and dogs of new water for weeks. This may sound unbelievable, but even today, under certain conditions, more water is falling from the sky than it could have been stored as water vapour or ice crystals in the existing clouds. Even more incredible is the claim that manna fell from the sky, but hydrocarbons, nutritious organic substances, could also emerge from new H and new C under these circumstances. 

 

As I said, enlightened people don't need to believe such legends. I only want to show the background of possible processes, because without a gapless ether as the basis of all phenomena, these stories could never have happened in reality. 

 

On the other hand, it is astonishing that thousands of scientists are currently rejoicing because millions of new particles have been produced at CERN. They hope to finally find the Higgs particle, because without this glue the whole edifice of quantum theories cannot stand. They also want to gain a better understanding of the Big Bang. But these destructive experiments represent the reverse of the above process: Intact vortex complexes are shattered and junk is produced in the form of unstable scraps of motion – with no chance of gaining new insights.

Orbit of the Earth-Moon System 

In Figure 17.12, the Sun (S, yellow) is marked in the centre, around which the Earth (E, light blue) turns. The distance to the Sun varies between about 152.1 and 147.1 million kilometres. The Earth therefore tumbles counterclockwise around the centre in a rather irregular orbit. 

 

Its speed also varies (between 29.29 and 30.29 km/s). On average, the Earth moves forward by about 75.8 million km each month (see sectors A marked in grey) respectively about 37.9 million km between new moon and full moon (see grey sector B). 

 

When the crescent moon is waxing, the Moon (M black-white dot) is behind the Earth (light blue dot), after about two weeks the decreasing crescent moon is in front (white-black dot). During this phase, the Moon overtakes the Earth around the outside and covers a distance that is about 0.8 million kilometres longer. In the second half of the month, the Moon falls back on the inner side by about 0.8 million kilometres (full and new moon are also shown here). 

 

This means that during the full moon demi-month the Moon travels the long distance of about 38.7 million kilometres in space (see the wide light red sector C). The new moon demi-month lasts the same length of time, but the Moon only moves forwards in space by about 37.1 million kilometres (see narrow light blue sector D). 

 

The Moon therefore does not turn constantly around the Earth, but wobbles forwards in space around the Sun. On the one hand, it moves faster on a wide orbit (sector E) and on the other hand, it moves slower and closer to the Sun (sector F). These phases alternate, with the Earth moving forwards faster and slower in an uneven orbit. 

 

It is truly unbelievable that this celestial mechanics could work on the basis of common ideas about imaginary forces of attraction. The Moon would either have to fly away outwards (see arrow G, at its highest speed and furthest distance) or fall towards the Sun (see arrow H, at its lowest centrifugal force and smallest distance). Every mechanic knows the result of rotating systems with minimum eccentric values.

For example, on 21 January 2019 a distance of 357,342 km was measured between the Earth and the Moon and on 5 February 406,555 km. A difference of 49,794 km, or 12.25 per cent, see Fig. 17.13. The red dashed line represents the average distance of the Moon of 384,400 km.cf] 

 

But even alternative ideas of gravity as pressure forces or even gravitational waves hurtling through space cannot explain this motion sequence. The variously variable or flowing movements can only be understood as vortex systems: on the one hand the whole galaxy, in which the ecliptic rotates as a marginal vortex and in this in turn the whirlpools of the planets rotate. All ether moves like a liquid with vortices embedded in each other. But just as ocean waves rushing over a wide area are in reality only a localised beating of water, there is in reality no wide-area movement in space either, but only the localised beating of minimally small ether-movements in the same direction. 

Ether-Vortex-Wind of Earth 

If the Earth were surrounded by dust over a wide area, the ether-movements could be recognised as a whirlwind (and only in this sense are the terms wind and flow used below). In reality, there are only a few dust grains from whose movements the characteristics of the Earth's whirlpool can be deduced. Some data are schematically sketched or listed in Figure 17.14. 

 

The Earth (blue) is a massive grain of dust with a radius of 6,378 km (from the Earth's centre EC to the Earth's surface ES at the equator). The Earth completes one turn within about 24 hours, a place at the equator moves in a circle at around 1,670 km/h, i.e. almost half a kilometre per second. 

 

Another massive speck of dust is the grey Moon M, which orbits the Earth at an average altitude of around 384,400 km. The Moon flies forwards at an average speed of 3,681 km/h or around one kilometre per second. A full turn around the Earth takes 27.3 days, i.e. around 655 hours (and because the system has travelled further in space in the meantime, the Moon has to turn a little further to reach the same position in relation to the Sun after a month of around 29.5 days). The Moon therefore has a much lower rotational speed than the rapidly rotating Earth at the centre of the vortex. 

 

The S satellites in geostationary orbit (GS) represent artificial dust grains with exactly the same rotational speed as the Earth. At an altitude of around 35,800 kilometres above the equator, they rotate synchronously with the Earth. They must be installed there at a speed of over 11,000 km/h or 3.07 km/s. They then drift without propulsion in the ether-wind there, just like the Moon further out. 

 

The different speeds are shown graphically on the left (but not to scale): From the centre of the Earth to the height of the geostationary satellites, the speed increases linearly, so the ether movement forms a rigid vortex (VR, marked in grey). Outside this area, the beating of the ether becomes weaker and the ether-wind corresponds to a potential vortex (PV, marked in red). 

Somewhat outside the geostationary altitude, the wind strength could well increase somewhat (e.g. up to the magnetopause at an altitude of around 60,000 km), only to drop off towards the outside. Of the approximately 3 km/s at an altitude of 35,800 km, only around 1 km/s remains at an altitude of 384,400 km above the Moon. With a linear reduction, the vortex limit VL would soon be reached. However, the beating of the ether is hyperbolic, so that the radius of the entire Earth-vortex complex will be around one million kilometres. This enormous disc of ordered ether-motion represents the mass or kinetic energy of the Earth's vortex pool – i.e. infinitely more than the few dust grains drifting in it.

Vortex within a Vortex 

Figure 17.15 shows a sector of the ecliptic which represents the rotating solar vortex wind (SV, yellow). This is a potential vortex with decreasing speed from the inside to the outside, e.g. at Venus about 35 km/s, at Mars about 24 km/s and in between in the area of the Earth (E, blue) with about 30 km/s (see arrows). Embedded in this solar vortex is the likewise left-turning Earth vortex wind (EV, light blue). This is also a potential vortex, but its speed in the area of the Moon (M, grey/black) is only about 1 km/s. The Moon thus moves forwards in space on the Sunny side at only about 29 km/s, but on its outer orbital section it moves at speeds of up to 31 km/s. 

 

Both currents add up on the outer side, while these winds meet on the Sunny side. The beating movements overlap in the ether, but because they are not completely in phase everywhere, the weaker wind takes an evasive path. Therefore, the plane of the Moon's orbit is inclined by about five degrees to the plane of the ecliptic. This is schematically sketched in cross-section at the bottom of this image: The plane of the solar vortex (SV, yellow) is drawn horizontally, the plane of the Earth's vortex (EV, light blue) is drawn at a slight angle to it. 

 

Because the Earth's axis is inclined, the Sun is more or less high in the sky depending on the time of year. Due to the additional inclination of the Moon's orbit, the Moon is even higher or lower in the sky, in monthly phases. 

Non-Uniform Lunar Orbit 

If the Earth were stationary in space, the Moon could drift in this vortex on a round orbit around the Earth. However, its movement is exposed to the solar vortex wind and its orbit is deformed. Figure 17.16 top left shows this in four phases. The blue curve represents a circular orbit around the Earth, the black arrows show the deviating sections of the orbit. 

 

At new moon NM, the vector of the Earth's vortex EV points in the opposite direction to the (here upward) flow of the solar vortex SW. The Moon's orbit is pushed inwards (towards the Earth), as indicated by arrow A. 

 

With the waxing moon WM, the Moon initially flies transverse to the general current, but is then accelerated in its direction. During this phase, the Moon moves relatively far forwards in space, as indicated by arrow B. The orbit is also propelled forwards from the position of the full moon FM. Arrow C therefore ends outside the circular path drawn for comparison. The decreasing moon WM initially flies at right angles to the general flow again. Its orbit is stretched beyond the blue circular path, as indicated by arrow D.

The wobbling path of the Moon shown in Figure 17.12 above is made up of these non-uniform phases. This means that the Moon does not move in a circular or elliptical orbit relative to the Earth. And the speeds also vary greatly, as shown in the bottom left of this image: 

 

The speed of the Earth (and thus of the flow of the solar vortex SV) is given as a minimum of 29.29, an average of 29.78 and a maximum of 30.29 km/s. The Moon (and thus the Earth's vortex EV at this radius) is said to be travelling at a minimum of 0.96, an average of 1.02 and a maximum of 1.08 km/s. The Moon therefore drifts through space at speeds between 28.33 and 31.37 km/s. Its speed therefore varies by plus/minus six per cent. 

 

Unbalanced Vortex 

At the top right of this image at E, 28 positions of the Moon are shown, which schematically sketch its uneven orbit around the Earth. Not only the Moon's orbit, but also the entire Earth vortex is deformed by these superimposed winds, as indicated by this uneven disc. There are no mechanically exact movements, the process is more comparable to air currents: In the northern hemisphere, the air generally moves from west to east. Embedded in this are also left-turning low-pressure areas, which, however, never form perfectly circular vortices. In general, these air movements also represent potential vortices, but the cold and warm fronts move at different speeds within them. 

 

In contrast to the air, the ether cannot exhibit density differences and, due to its homogeneity, its beating motion components must also run synchronously throughout the entire Earth-whirlpool (but to an increasingly weaker extent towards the outside). Even within the vortex disc, the beating can vary locally in strength (analogous to previous weather fronts). 

 

This ether-vortex only becomes visible through the movements of the Moon, which in principle drifts in this current. The Moon provides a surface for the flow to attack, while the ether-movements are influenced by the inertia of this collection of atoms. The Moon initially resists the acceleration in the above phase of the waxing moon until the full moon has reached its maximum forward speed. On the other hand, the decreasing moon brings overshooting speed and due to this inertia the subsequent deceleration sets in a little later. 

 

The Moon practically behaves like a piece of wood in water. On the one hand it drifts purely passively with the current, on the other hand it also influences the water movements when the speed or direction changes. The ether-movements have the same effect on the Moon and, on the other hand, its inertia delays or amplifies the ether-currents. This picture below right shows schematically how bow waves are formed in front of, behind and to the side of the Moon. As in the above example of weather fronts, the Moon thus indicates particularly turbulent areas. The entire Earth-ether-whirlpool does not turn uniformly, but rather particularly intense ether-movements oscillate around the Earth, each in the direction of the Moon and each with a slight delay. 

 

In general, the Moon rotates most slowly on the Sunny side (new Moon), relative to the Earth as well as relative to the Sun, so it has the lowest speed in space there. On its outer orbital segment, the Moon turns fastest around the Earth as well as around the Sun, i.e. it moves at maximum speed in space (see arrows F and G).

Velocity Differences 

Figure 17.17 above shows the relevant dust grains in different positions: the Moon on the left as new moon NM and on the right as full moon FM, in the centre the Earth with its day and night sides ED and EN respectively, with two geostationary satellites GS in between. Listed below are the average speeds of the Moon at 1.02 km/s, the satellites at 3.07 km/s and the 0.46 km/s rotational speed at the equator.

 

In the second line, the minimum and maximum speeds of the Moon are given as 0.96 km/s and 1.08 km/s respectively. If this differentiation of plus/minus 6 per cent is applied to the movement of the satellites, they fly at a slow 2.89 km/s on the Sunny side and a fast 3.25 km/s on the night side. 

 

Apart from these extreme values, the Moon will rotate at around 0.99 km/s in its slow phase (at new Moon) and at around 1.05 km/s in its fast phase (at full Moon). Corresponding average values would result in a speed of 2.98 km/s and 3.16 km/s for the satellites (see third line). 

 

Because the geostationary satellites rotate at the same speed as the Earth's surface, the ether between them must behave like a rigid vortex. The velocities of the satellites can therefore be calculated linearly down to the Earth's radius. This results in 0.430 to 0.445 km/s for the ether on the Earth's surface during the day and 0.475 to 0.490 km/s on the night side (as extreme and average values respectively). These velocities are shown graphically at the bottom of this image.

In each case from the geostationary orbit outwards, the ether-movements form a potential vortex with a hyperbolically descending ether-wind (areas marked in red). From this satellite height inwards, a rigid vortex (grey areas) is given with continuously decreasing velocities. The Earth is a rigid body and always turns at a constant speed of 0.46 km/s at the equator. This results in a mathematical difference of 15 to 30 m/s to the surrounding ether. On the side facing the Sun, the Earth rotates too fast and on the side facing away from the Sun, the Earth is too slow compared to the neighbouring ether. Theoretically, a current of about 15 to 30 m/s, i.e. about 50 to 100 km/h, should be felt there. Is this the ether-wind that Michelson/Morley wanted to measure? 

 

Michelson / Morley 

Before Einstein denied the existence of the ether shortly after 1900, the properties of a light ether were hotly debated among physicists. There was no consensus on its consistency, whether it was only located within matter, whether it was pulled along by celestial bodies or whether it was stationary and therefore the Earth would race through this resting fluid. It was also discussed at the time whether the speed of light was constant. 

 

Michelson and Morley carried out the well-known experiments in 1881/1887: They reflected rays of light transversely and longitudinally, with and against the movement of the Earth. As the Earth travelled around the Sun at around 30 km/s, they expected differences of 60 km/s. However, the calculated value was only 8.8 km/s, which was far too low. Even up to 1926, results of only 7.5 to 10 km/s were obtained. These experiments are therefore generally considered to have produced zero results and to be proof against the existence of an ether. 

 

In 1978, Brillet and Hall experimented with lasers on rotating measuring devices. They determined much smaller values of 16 m/s +/- 20 m/s, which would match the above difference of around 15 to 30 m/s surprisingly accurately. On the other hand, there were also speed differences of 190 m/s, which could be related to the 960 m/s of the Earth's rotation around the Sun and the 460 m/s of the Earth's own rotation – and galactic winds? Interestingly, two maxima and two minima were found at right angles to each other (see paragraph Gone with the wind further down). 

 

There is no doubt that light travels at different speeds or is refracted or bent in different media. Wherever the ether is not completely neutral, e.g. in the wide whirlpools around the planets, the light is influenced by the beating that dominates there. Much further out than the atmosphere and the local gravitation of a celestial body, the light is influenced in their vicinity. This is particularly evident, for example, in the droplet formation during the transit of Venus. The outlines blur when Venus comes to the edge of the solar disc or leaves it again. In this respect, the light will certainly also have a variable speed in the area of the Earth-ether-vortex. 

 

Overall, however, the above experiments are based on completely false assumptions: They assume that there is matter on the one hand and an ether on the other, i.e. that solid particles (Earth or photons) would move through the ether. In reality, there is no matter, only the gapless ether with the patterns of individual movements travelling through space. There is much more concrete evidence of this ether, e.g. the movements of water or air and the ultimate proof through the unauthorised movement of satellites, which should actually be stationary.

Tides 

There is a rising tide and a falling tide approximately every twelve hours. The tidal range varies at roughly weekly intervals, it is relatively low when the Moon is waxing and waning, swelling at new moon and particularly high at full moon. It is therefore generally assumed that the gravitational pull of the Moon is the cause of the tides. This phenomenon exists worldwide, albeit to varying degrees. For example, the Gulf Stream pushes through the Channel into the North Sea with a tidal range of over ten metres. Conversely, in the vast Pacific, for example, the tides are very constant with a moderate tidal range of only around 1.5 metres.

In Figure 17.18 above, a graph shows these fluctuations above the chart level (the absolute lowest water level, see light blue line CL). The phases of the Moon in June 1955 are shown at the top with new moon NM, waxing moon WM, full moon FM and decreasing moon DM. Every day there are two tides, the lowest water level of the tide taking place at night is marked by a red curve. 

 

If you observe the highest water level, you can clearly see that the maximum oscillation does not take place at new Moon, but only shortly before half Moon. The high tide is also delayed by three to four days compared to the full Moon. This spring delay (SD, see green arrows) occurs worldwide – and cannot be explained by the supposed gravitational pull of the Moon or the Sun or other deviations in gravity due to different mass distributions. 

 

Accumulated and Driven 

The phenomenon of tides can never be based on gravity, no matter how often this is publicised. Rather, it results from the interaction of the ether-whirlpools around the Sun and the Earth, as schematically sketched in the picture below. 

The calendar symbols for the phases of the Moon (NM, WM, FM and DM) are again shown. The Sun is positioned far above the picture, the solar vortex SV (yellow) pushes the Earth E (blue) from left to right (here simplified marked as a straight blue path). The ether-vortex EV around the Earth is left-turning (here marked only once as light blue circle). The Moon swings around the Earth and is once close to the Sun (above, at new moon NM above the Earth) and once on its outer orbital section (below, at full Moon). 

 

At new Moon, the vectors of the solar vortex SV and the Earth vortex EV are in opposite directions, so that the Moon only moves slowly. As explained above, the process is delayed by the Moon's inertia and a bow wave is formed (marked in dark blue). This wave of intense delay only arrives on the Earth's surface at waxing crescent WM, resulting in this spring delay SD. 

 

In the subsequent phase, the vectors of the solar vortex SV and the Earth vortex EV point in the same direction, so that the full moon FM flies forwards at an accelerated speed. But here, too, the Moon only reaches its maximum speed somewhat later, so that its intensive bow wave only reaches the Earth's surface three to four days after the full moon (whereby the wave propagates sideways at around 1 km/s). After this spring delay SD, the oscillation of the water level reaches its maximum. 

 

So the Moon does have an influence, not through gravitational pull, but by influencing the intensity of the ether-beating in the Earth's whirlpool. Due to its inertia in deceleration (on the Sunny side) and acceleration (on the night side), the uneven oscillation in the entire Earth's vortex disc is rocked up (month after month, for hundreds, thousands or millions of years). The position of the Moon thus indicates where there is particularly intense movement at the moment (what was described above as the bow wave). The Earth rotates daily through these two areas of varying speed and intensity of ether movement. These fluctuations affect the Earth as a whole and its most mobile mass, the water in the oceans, follows these changes.

Too Slow and Too Fast 

Figure 17.19 shows why the characteristics of the tides are so different. The Earth E moves upwards, driven by the solar vortex SV. The day side D of the Earth is therefore on the left, the night side N on the right. The Earth's ether-vortex is counterclockwise rotating and, as explained above in Figure 17.17, it is much stronger on the night side with a maximum of 0.49 km/s than on the day side with a minimum of 0.43 km/s (see arrows). 

 

The Earth rotates below it at a constant 0.46 km/s (at the equator). It is therefore too slow on the right, i.e. an ether-wind whips up high waves there. Conversely, the Earth is too fast on the left compared to the speed of the ether-wind there. This holds back the water or the Earth runs under the water. There is therefore a relatively gentle rise in the water level there, which also only reaches its maximum with a time delay (and leads to a greater jump delay).

 

Gravity has an effect insofar as these accumulations of water are flattened again by the Earth's gravity until they fall below the mean water level. This results in the tidal currents. The water therefore oscillates both vertically and horizontally. The above difference of 15 to 30 m/s are theoretical values, the real ether-wind near the Earth's surface can blow stronger or weaker. In general, however, this process is the true cause of the appearance of the tides, both in terms of their temporal course and the different characteristics of the high and low tides that occur twice a day.

Eccentric Conditions 

In Figure 17.20, the Earth E (light blue) is shown again at the top of A, turning on its axis at the equator at a speed of around 0.46 km/s (see blue arrows). The Sun is positioned far to the left of it. The solar wind SW is again directed upwards here, so that the ether-wind on the right sweeps along the Earth's surface at up to 0.49 km/s (see green arrow). On the solar side (left), this relative flow is reduced to about 0.43 km/s (see red arrow). 

 

As explained above, this results in tidal currents in the oceans. This intermittent pushing and delaying naturally also has an effect on the Earth's surface itself, leading to bumps and dents (without the supposed gravitational pull of the Moon). The brittle rock of the Earth's crust is stretched and compressed. Everyone knows that no hairline crack can be completely closed again – and this alone explains the much-discussed growth of the Earth.

Although the solar wind in the area of the Earth drives the Earth forwards quite constantly, the wind pressure on the night side is always somewhat stronger than on the day side. This alone causes the Earth to be pushed around the curve, i.e. it flies in a circle around the Sun without the Sun having to exert any supposed gravitational pull. 

 

Another consequence is shown in the picture above left: The wind differences are equalised when the centre of the Earth (black dot EC) moves slightly to the left in relation to the centre of the ether-vortex (black dot VC). Then the relative speeds to the left and right are the same (at about 0.46 km/s, see blue arrows in the green and red segments). So Earth inevitably will move some aside within its ether-whirlpool. Its centre is therefore always somewhat eccentrically offset, always towards the Sun, and by no means somewhat further away from the Moon, as is supposedly assumed as the common gravitational centre of the Earth plus the Moon. 

 

This difference of plus/minus 30 m/s is about 1/15 of the average speed. The Earth's centre should therefore be offset by 1/15 of the Earth's radius, i.e. around 400 km. However, this difference represents the maximum at the equator and this eccentricity would be far too great for the conditions at other latitudes. I therefore assume that the Earth is only offset from the centre of its whirlpool towards the Sun by a maximum of 200 km (see B above). 

 

Eccentric Orbits 

The beat of the ether represents a rigid vortex, at least up to the orbit of the geostationary satellites. However, it does not move like a rigid wheel with a radius of 40,000 km and the same angular velocity everywhere. Rather, this whirlpool moves like a water vortex or tornado with a tumbling trunk around the centre. It is therefore highly probable that this vortex centre VC will oscillate within a surface (dark grey). The centre of the Earth EC will always be positioned to the left of it, the current vortex centre VC about 50 to 300 km to the right. 

 

This vortex-centre again won't describe an exact circled track, but will be extended towards right side resp. will be blown off into direction of Sun-wind (like e.g. shown by black arrows at previous picture 17.16 at Moon). The range of motion sketched here thus results when the solar wind in this picture is directed upwards or diagonally upwards (see yellow arrows SW at B). 

 

The orbits of the satellites are a clear indication of this. The near-Earth observation satellites have to be constantly steered in order to keep them at a constant altitude of, for example, 50 km (and therefore they can only be used for a relatively short time). On an eccentric orbit, satellites fly with much less control effort, e.g. on orbits between 100 and 300 km altitude. Satellites can be used for even longer on even higher orbits of 200 and 600 km. They then simply drift in the whirlpool of the ether, although their looping orbits will of course also tumbles around the Earth. I don't know this, but I now claim that these satellites on eccentric orbits (EO, ring marked in grey) are predominantly closest to the Earth in each case towards the Sun. Their most distant positions will be towards the night side or their orbits will be deflected in the direction of the solar wind (see yellow arrows SW at B).

Space Debris 

A further indication of the above claims about the Earth's ether-whirlpool is the life expectancy of space debris. Tens of thousands of fragments orbit the Earth, more than a thousand dangerous pieces are constantly observed. In this image 17.21, the red curve shows how long these pieces are likely to remain at what altitude. 

 

Everything that flies below 200 km will fall down in a few days (0.01 years) (because the Earth's gravity is actually still effective there). But everything from 200 to 300 km altitude will also be wiped off within a month or a year (because the above eccentricity of the vortex core could reach that far). 

Between 400 and 600 km the parts sail in a steady ether-wind. However, they are at the mercy of the Sun's radiation and will sooner or later be slowed down. Above 800 km we can hardly get rid of the space debris, it stays there for hundreds or even tens of thousands of years. 

 

This illustration shows how quickly these objects fall down at low altitudes due to gravity and how the objects above are captured by the eccentrically oscillating vortex core. Although, according to current theory, there is a very unstable balance between gravitational and centrifugal forces, the scrap does not fly off into space from greater heights, nor does it fall back to Earth – because it remains trapped in the Earth's etheric whirlpool.

Geostationary Satellites 

A perfect balance between centrifugal and gravitational forces exists with geostationary satellites, which also rotate in synchronisation with the Earth. The parabolic antennas are permanently aligned with their position, so we are always up to date with everything the communications media have to offer. The physical principles for installing a geostationary satellite are simple, as schematically sketched in Figure 17.22 on the left. 

 

Situated vertically above the equator, exactly 42,164 km from the centre of the Earth E (blue), the satellite GS (dark blue dot) must be brought to the desired position at exactly 3,073 km/s. Due to its momentum (arrow MF), the satellite wants to fly away tangentially. At this radius, the gravitational pull (arrow GP) is strong enough to keep the satellite on a circular orbit. 

 

Without further propulsion, the satellite then orbits the centre of the Earth just as fast as the Earth rotates. From a location on the Earth's surface, the satellite can therefore always be seen at the same angle above the horizon and to the respective longitude. The satellite thus appears to stand geostationary, i.e. motionless above the Earth's surface.

 

Unfortunately, once again, practice is completely contrary to the well-known and clear theory: without any steering intervention, the satellite dances daily on an S-shaped orbit or wobbles once from north to south and back to north (see centre of image). This constant deviation from the predetermined position above the equator (black line) is only a few hundred kilometres or a maximum of only ten degrees. What is even worse is that only in four positions above the equator do geostationary (or at least geosynchronous) satellites maintain reasonably stable positions. 

 

This blatant violation of strict laws of mechanics is explained away with various interference factors that cannot apply: The additional influence of gravitational forces of the Sun or the Moon should result in seasonal or monthly variations (which do not exist). Irregular distribution of mass in the Earth's crust and thus different Earth gravity cannot play a role because the satellites are in principle above the same location. Of course, the satellites are at the mercy of the Sun's radiation and particle flux, but even this cannot explain the daily and regularly occurring deviations. The behaviour of geostationary satellites simply refutes the current theories of celestial mechanics. 

 

Analemma Curve 

There is an analogue phenomenon in the sky in the form of the analemma curve: if the position of the Sun is recorded in one place every day at the same universal time, their positions result in an 8-shaped curve (see photo on the right). The ups and downs result from the inclination of the Earth's axis to the ecliptic. The forwards and backwards result from the elliptical orbit of the Earth and its varying speed (according to Kepler's law). In addition, the Sun is eccentric in this orbit (supposedly at the centre of the ellipse, if this could be defined for a non-uniform orbit). The Earth is closest to the Sun in winter (but not until 2 January, whereas the winter solstice is on 21 December). The Earth moves relatively quickly in winter and so the winter half-year is one week shorter than summer. In turn, the Earth is only at its furthest position from the Sun a few days after the summer solstice. 

 

This asymmetrical analemma curve results from all these oblique conditions, in different forms at every place and at every time, and is easy to calculate using exact formulae. Strangely enough, there is little photographic evidence of this theoretical accuracy. With geostationary satellites, on the other hand, there is daily proof – that celestial objects do not adhere to the mathematical specifications. However, if these satellites draw a track comparable to that of the Sun relative to the Earth, there must also be additional, very real conditions for the satellites.

Gone With the Wind 

Figure 17.23 shows some schematic sketches that make it easy to explain the supposed problem. At the top left, geostationary satellites (GS, blue dots) are shown in various positions. According to conventional wisdom, they should turn around the Earth E (blue) at a constant angular velocity, i.e. cover equal distances per unit of time. However, the satellites are not firmly connected to the Earth via spokes; they do not rotate like a rigid wheel (and its mechanical laws). On the other hand, the satellites do not move in a vacuum. 

 

All movements of celestial bodies are determined by the asymmetrical beating of the ether in the wider environment. These movements are called here (only in figurative sense resp. simplifying) whirlpool resp. wind of ether. All material particles drift within these currents. Upside right is an area representing flow of Sun-whirlpool (see yellow arrows SW). The Sun is located far above the image. At a radius of around 150 million kilometres, it has a speed of around 30 km/s, at which the Earth E (shown with day and night sides, light and dark blue respectively) drifts through space. 

 

Embedded in this solar-whirlpool is the Earth's ether-whirlpool. Only the area up to a radius of around 40,000 kilometres is shown here as the light green circular area EW. 

This flow has a speed of around 3 km/s at this height of the geostationary satellites (see arrows). It exerts a tangential thrust on material particles, e.g. the satellites there (see dark green lines). Depending on vector, speed of Sun-whirlpool thus is reduced, e.g. at A marked by red lines pointing left, so there (at Sun-side) forward-flow partly is reduced down to about 27 km/s. Conversely, both currents add up at the bottom (on the night side), as indicated by the green lines at B, so that the forward motion can be up to about 33 km/s. 

 

The Earth is always pushed forwards in space at this average speed of 30 km/s. If a satellite is currently located between the Earth and the Sun, it moves forward much more slowly in space, and correspondingly faster on the night side. Of course, the proportions in this image are extremely exaggerated. The Earth, for example, travels around 2,600,000 kilometres per day. The satellite lags behind the Earth by 40,000 kilometres at times or runs ahead of it. Within twelve hours, it therefore moves 1,340,000 km or only 1,260,000 km forwards in space. The relative movement at the bottom left of the picture is therefore also greatly exaggerated.

 

Pushing Forwards and Holding Back

When the satellite lags behind in the general flow, it is (in this picture) to the left of the Earth (or is standing there in the evening). It then enters the area of the faster current, i.e. it is accelerated and propelled forwards, as shown at the bottom left of B. This acceleration lasts until it is at right angles to the Earth (i.e. at midnight). The satellite overtakes the Earth drifting evenly forwards on the right in the direction of travel. Compared to its uniform rotation, the satellite appears to move forwards towards the east. This sector C of accelerated movement of the satellite is marked in light green. 

 

Then the vectors of the Earth-whirlpool increasingly point transversely to the flow of the solar-whirlpool. The satellite drifts in this flow, whereby the previous thrust becomes smaller and smaller. The satellite now moves forwards more slowly. Compared to its previous advance, this appears to be a delay, as if the satellite were travelling back to the west. This area of return to average conditions is marked here in light red as sector D. 

 

The satellite then moves towards the Sun, where its forward motion is delayed by the slower flow, as shown in A, for example. The Earth continues to move forwards at a constant speed. Now the Earth overtakes the satellite (again to the right in the direction of travel). Compared to its uniform rotation, the satellite remains behind in space. When the Sun is at its zenith from the Earth, the satellite is already further to the left. This gives the apparent impression that the satellite in this light green sector E is running ahead of the Earth's rotation (just as you have to turn your head when watching the car you are overtaking on the right). 

 

In the subsequent light red sector F, the satellite swings back into the average flow. In contrast to the previous apparent (in the direction of rotation) advance (which in reality was a lagging behind in space), this return to normal gives the impression of a renewed delay. The satellite is therefore not guided around the Earth as if on a rigid spoke, but simply drifts in the flow resulting from the overlay of the two whirlpools. 

 

Only the inclusion of the different speeds of the forward movements results in this relative advance and retardation. Relative to constant turning of Earth results acceleration (see arrows C and E downside centre of picture) and deceleration (see arrows D and F there), alternating and twice a day, which exclusively is to explain by real existence of these real ether-winds. 

 

Round and Flat Eight 

This results in these movements in west-east direction. The north-south movements are easy to explain, as sketched in this picture below right. The ecliptic is marked here as the yellow line of the solar-whirlpool SW. The Earth's axis EA is inclined by about 23 degrees to this plane. The Earth's whirlpool EW is shown here as a blue line, which is inclined to the ecliptic by about five degrees. A geostationary satellite does not move along the equatorial plane (as required by current theory), but largely in the plane of the Earth's whirlpool (like the Moon, but to a limited extent, see below). 

 

Once a day the satellite is therefore below or above the equator. This results in the two vertical movements G and H. Overlaying the previous horizontal movements (C, D, E and F) results in the satellite's orbit in the form of a figure of eight (see bottom centre of the image). 

 

However, a symmetrical figure of eight only results if the satellite is exactly in the radial direction of the Sun at the intersection point of the figure of eight (i.e. positioned above longitude 0 or 180). A flat figure of eight results when the satellite is positioned exactly at right angles to it. These longitudes at 90 degrees west and east are inclined in space (parallel to the inclined Earth axis). The above horizontal movement can then run along these longitudes, so that the satellite moves back and forward almost only in a vertical direction (as in the centre of the previous Figure 17.22). 

 

In the above explanations of the tides and their spring delay, it was noted that the Moon only reacts to the changing ether-currents with a slight delay. The satellites follow changing winds much faster due to their low inertia. However, there is still a delay of one hour: The stable positions are therefore at 15 and 105 degrees west and 75 and 165 degrees east. Only there are the satellites reasonably geostable, while everywhere else the orbits are irregularly blurred. 

 

Fidelity to the Law 

The analemma curve of the Sun results from the same cause: in the etheric-whirlpool of the galaxy, the solar-whirlpool is embedded as an oblique marginal vortex (this wind does not necessarily blow tangentially to the galactic centre). There too, both winds overlap vectorially, so that the Earth drifts faster and then slower in phases (but at slightly different times than is always theoretically assumed by the supposedly universally valid Kepler's law). As with geostationary satellites, the Earth overtakes the Sun and, conversely, is overtaken by the Sun as it travels through space. 

 

Certainly, the Earth's movement around the Sun is influenced by a variety of factors (e.g. neighbouring planets, solar radiation, the tumbles of the axes of the Sun and Earth, etc.) and therefore many disturbing factors can be found for the deviation between theory and reality. In contrast, practically ideal laboratory conditions are given with the geostationary satellites in close proximity to the Earth. 

 

However, if their movements can clearly not be explained (or explained away) with the known laws and the current understanding of gravity, then the current theoretical models simply cannot be correct.

Inclined Planes and Curved Disc 

At picture 17.24 upside left once more is drawn Earth E (light blue) with view onto north pole N. As the ether-winds of the Sun and the Earth overlap, it is pushed forwards with different pressures (see red arrows SW + EW). Like any gyroscope, the Earth's axis deflects at right angles to it, as sketched in the picture next to it. The angle between the planes of the ecliptic (red line SW) and the equator is around 23 degrees (red sectors). The Earth's axis is relatively fixed in space, partly because of the Earth's inertia, and partly because its position is determined by the overpowering galactic ether-wind (although this is not relevant here). 

 

The plane of the Earth's vortex (green line EV) is again at an angle to the ecliptic, resulting in angles of around 28 or even just 18 degrees depending on the constellation (green sectors). In the centre line of the image, the plane of the ecliptic is drawn horizontally (dashed yellow line SW, the Sun S is far to the left). There is an angle of around 23 degrees to the equatorial plane EP (blue dashed line). The Moon M (grey) is shown here in a position of 18 degrees to the equator (see grey dashed line, which also forms an angle of 28 degrees at other times). The Moon is in the plane of the Earth's vortex EV (green thick line). 

 

The Earth reacts like a gyroscope to this unequal pressure, but this imbalance also causes the inner area of the Earth-ether-vortex to tilt. 

On the other hand, the Earth's surface pulls the surrounding ether along with it, just as a wooden ball rotating in water forces the layers of water on its surface in the direction of its movement. 

 

Close to the Earth, the beating of the ether will therefore run parallel to the equator. The disc of the Earth's vortex EW will therefore no longer be flat from the Moon inwards, but will form a curve until it runs parallel to the equator in the centre (see curved green curve). 

 

In this image, the disc outside the Moon has an angle of 18 degrees to the equatorial plane. At an altitude of around 40,000 kilometres, the inclination is reduced to around 10 degrees (even if the Moon's angle is 28 degrees). The geostationary satellites GS (dark blue) drift in this curved area of the Earth's vortex. Therefore, their position fluctuates during the day between about 10 degrees north and 10 degrees south (see dark blue dashed line). 

 

These satellites can only be kept in a truly geostationary position by steering against this constant wind. This costs energy and the fuel supply is used up after ten to fifteen years. Finally, they are parked about 300 kilometres higher in a graveyard orbit. But even there they are not immobilised, but continue to oscillate between north and south in an S-shaped orbit, more or less flat or usually unevenly deformed. 

 

S-Shaped Earth Vortex Disc 

The bottom line of this image shows a cross-section of the entire Earth's vortex disc. Instead of the straight line drawn so far, the result is now an S-shaped curve (see thick green curve EV). Naturally, this Earth-vortex won't spread only flat (like sketched up to now), but ether must show analogue beats above and below. This area is marked light blue. 

 

At outer border of vortex (about one million kilometres away from Earth) is transition to free ether, i.e. there disc must show only small thickness. At the radius of about 384,400 km, the Moon drifts at about 1 km/s and this beating motion must also be balanced upwards and downwards towards the free ether. At a radius of around 40,000 km, the drift of the geostationary satellites is considerably faster at around 3 km/s, while at the centre the speed is theoretically zero. At the same distance, it should also be possible to reduce the ether drift to zero in the vertical direction. In the area of the geostationary satellites, the Earth's vortex disc could therefore be around 80,000 km thick. 

 

Seen from Earth, the Moon tumbles in the sky on this strange orbit. From an external view of the Earth's vortex, the Moon moves along relatively smoothly. In the centre, however, the Earth turns at a much higher speed around its inclined axis, which also fluctuates over the course of the year (relative to the plane of the vortex). There is therefore a relatively turbulent vortex directly around the Earth, which is marked here as the red ring TV. The equalising areas at the poles of the Earth's vortex must be correspondingly high (with a ratio of diameter to thickness of around 10:1). Overall, the Earth's vortex complex has a lens-shaped contour, which is not a flat disc, but is deformed like a floppy hat. The real expansion in horizontal and vertical direction could be determined, for example, using the orbital data of celestial objects that diagonally cross the Earth's ether-vortex. 

 

This S-shape again corresponds to a double-crank, as already shown above in Figure 17.05 as the basic shape of all ether-vortices. In fact, this movement pattern is a consistent phenomenon, from the smallest vortex of an electron and atoms to the whirlpools of stars and planets or even galaxies.

18 Cosmic Radiation

In spiral galaxies with their countless potential vortices and vortex braids, all ether-movements are concentrated in their centres. Since 1992, the orbits of 28 stars have been observed in the centre of our galaxy, 22 of which are shown as simulations in Fig. 18.01. This is the black hole Sagittarius A* with its alleged almost 4 million solar masses (see chapter 10 Black Holes, section Calculation of the Mass of Sgr A*). In this jumble of stellar orbits with diameters of several light years and orbital planes that run criss-cross in an almost common intersection point, extreme ether-movements take place, which are intensified by the general pressure of space and the centripetal pressure of the galaxy.

Imagine there is no wind. Above you, a swarm of starlings is performing its fantastic formation flight, see Fig. 18.02 above. In this comparison, the calm represents the stationary ether and the starlings its internal, quantum small invisible movements (described in the previous chapter 13 Ether – All from One). However, millions of such swarms would have to participate in this performance at the same time in order to get even an approximate impression of this hidden ether-reality. 

 

Opposing and overlapping ether-beats potentiate to huge waves and lead to great internal stress. The ether can no longer equalise these tensions because its bending tolerance is far exceeded. Consequently, the ether relieves itself of this stress by catapulting individual vortex shreds out of the critical zones at the speed of light. This is described in more detail in chapter 13 Ether – All from One, sections Radiation and Stress. These processes are even more extreme in the case of explosions of stars, pulsars and supernovas, which take place or have taken place at any time and anywhere in the universe. 

 

These ether-vortex wisps are the radiation that space telescopes perceive with their detectors, e.g. as alpha, beta, gamma or X-rays, even through celestial objects and dust clouds. This is because a clear view of the centre of our galaxy is not possible. Countless of these universe-wide conglomerates of star orbits with their ether-movements, which have existed for millions of years, are therefore constantly generating electromagnetic radiation somewhere – from all directions and with a wide range of intensities.

 

The Double-Slit Experiment* 

is one of the key experiments in classical physics. 65] It was first carried out with light by Thomas Young in 1802 and led to the wave theory of light being recognised over the then prevailing corpuscle theory. In quantum physics, the double-slit experiment serves to demonstrate wave-particle duality. It was carried out not only with light, but also with elementary particles, atoms and molecules. The fact that interference patterns also appear here is proof of the fact that material bodies also have wave properties.

In this experiment, for example, light or matter waves hit two narrow, parallel slits and are projected onto an observation screen whose distance to the double slit is much greater than the distance between the two slits, see Fig. 18.02 below. An interference pattern appears, which is caused by diffraction of the wave propagation at the double slit. In the case of waves with a uniform wavelength, e.g. monochromatic light from a laser, this pattern on the screen consists of alternating light and dark stripes if the distance between the two slits is not smaller than the wavelength. 

* translated from German Wiki: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Doppelspaltexperiment#cite_ref-1

X-Rays**

are electromagnetic waves with quantum energies above about 100 eV (electron volts), corresponding to wavelengths of about less than 10 nm. X-rays lie in the electromagnetic spectrum in the energy range above ultraviolet light and are used for medical purposes, see Fig. 18.03 at A. It differs from gamma radiation in the kind of origin: gamma radiation is photons produced by nuclear reactions or radioactive decay, while X-rays are caused by the change in speed of charged particles. X-rays are ionising radiation. 

 

They are produced by two different processes: 

1. by strong acceleration of charged particles, mostly deceleration or deflection of electrons. The radiation emitted in this process is brake radiation and its spectrum is continuous. Fig.18.03 centre shows schematically the generation of brake radiation (time from left to right): an electron is scattered in the vicinity of an atomic nucleus, loses energy and generates an X-ray quantum. The proximity of a nucleus is necessary to absorb an impulse. 

 

2. through high-energy transitions in the electron shells (or shells) of atoms or molecules. The radiation emitted in this process is the characteristic X-ray radiation, which always has a line spectrum. Fig. 18.03 below shows the formation: an electron has been removed from the K-shell (e.g. by electron impact), an electron from the L-shell falls into the hole in the K-shell; the energy difference is emitted as X-rays. 

 

Both effects are utilised in the X-ray tube, in which electrons are first accelerated from a filament (cathode), whereby they do not emit any X-rays because the acceleration is not great enough, and then hit the anode, which is designed as a metal block, in which they are strongly decelerated. This produces X-rays as brake radiation with a total of around 1 % of the irradiated energy and heat of around 99 %, which is dissipated by cooling devices at the anode. Electrons are also knocked out of the shells of the metal atoms by electron collisions. The holes in the shells are filled by other electrons, producing characteristic X-rays. 

 

Today, the anodes are usually made of ceramic, with the points where the electrons hit being made of metals such as molybdenum, copper or tungsten. 

 

Cyclic particle accelerators are another source of X-rays, especially for accelerating electrons. Here, when the particle beam is deflected in a strong magnetic field and thus accelerated at right angles to its direction of propagation, synchrotron radiation, a kind of brake radiation , is produced. Up to a maximum energy, the synchrotron radiation of a deflection magnet contains a broad electromagnetic spectrum. With suitably selected parameters (strength of the magnetic field and particle energy), X-rays are also present. In addition, monoenergetic X-rays can also be generated at synchrotron facilities with the help of undulators, which consist of periodic arrangements of strong magnets. 

 

X-ray brake radiation is generated in various technical devices such as electron microscopes, electron beam welders and in the power stages of large radar systems, where electron tubes such as the magnetron or amplitron are used to generate large amounts of non-ionising radiation and also emit X-rays during operation. Other technical sources with only historical significance were the first colour television receivers from the 1960s onwards with cathode ray tubes, as the colour picture tubes require higher anode voltages than monochrome cathode ray tubes.

** translated from: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Röntgenstrahlung

Rutherford Scattering Experiment***

In these experiments from 1909 to 1913, the scattering of alpha particles on gold atomic nuclei was investigated, see Fig. 18.04 above. The resulting particle paths are hyperbolas. The distribution of the scattered particles allows conclusions to be drawn about the structure of an atom. This led to the realisation that the positive charge in the atoms is concentrated in a small space in the centre of the atom. Until then, the model of J. J. Thomson was used, in which the positive charge of the atom is homogeneously distributed in a sphere (Thomson's atomic model). 

 

The measurement results indicated that the entire mass of an atom is concentrated in a small nucleus. Ernest Rutherford is reported to have said: "This is as improbable as shooting cotton wool with a pistol and having the ball bounce back." 66]

 

Fig. 18.04 below shows a simplified version of the experimental setup from above: A radioactive radium is placed in a lead block with an opening to one side, which emits alpha, beta and gamma radiation. The rays emerging from the opening are guided through an electric field to separate them from each other. Alpha particles are doubly positively charged helium nuclei without shell electrons. 

 

The alpha radiation is directed vertically onto a gold foil only 0.5 μm thick (approx. 1,000 atoms in a row). The radiation emerging from the foil can be visualised using a fluorescent screen or a film attached to it. Gold was used because even then it could be processed into very thin layers using simple mechanical means and has a high atomic mass. This is where the term gold foil experiment comes from. 

 

The result: 

  • Almost all alpha particles can pass through the gold foil unhindered 
  • Approximately every 100,000th alpha particle is deflected by 90 degrees or more 67]
  • The larger the scattering angle, the less frequently this deflection occurs 
  • Some alpha particles are scattered back 
  • The gold foil remained completely undamaged, without holes or openings. 

 

This result led to the Rutherford atomic model. The extremely rare deflection of the alpha particles and their angular distribution can be understood by the fact that there is only a very small centre of mass in the atoms, which is positively charged. This centre of mass is called the atomic nucleus. Since most particles pass through the gold foil unhindered, there must be a large free space between the nuclei.

Conclusions

  • Almost the entire mass of the atom is combined in a very small, positively charged atomic nucleus 
  • The atomic shell is much larger and consists largely of nothing 
  • The electrons in the atomic shell shield the positive charge of the nucleus from the outside. 

 

Limits of Rutherford's Atomic Model 

The experiment explained the basic structure of an atom according to conventional wisdom, which has not been seriously questioned since. However, Rutherford already wrote in his publication: The question of the stability of the atom must be examined more closely; it obviously depends on the internal structure of the atom and the movement of the charges building up the atom. 

 

However, this atomic model does not explain how the electrons behave in the atomic shell and why, for example, the electrons are not simply attracted by the positive atomic nucleus and its large mass and thus crash into the nucleus. 

 

The widespread idea of why electrons orbit the nucleus fails due to fundamental physical laws: In order for electrons to orbit the nucleus, they must experience an electrostatic force directed towards the nucleus. The circular motion of the electrons would therefore be an accelerated motion (permanent change in the direction of motion). According to Maxwell, however, accelerated charges radiate electromagnetic energy. The electrons would therefore crash into the atomic nucleus. The same happens, for example, with a satellite that orbits too close to the Earth and crashes due to its strong gravitational pull. 

 

However, shell electrons crashing into the nucleus mean the instability of an atom. However, this contradicts our everyday experience of stable atoms. 

*** translated from: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rutherford-Streuung

Neutrinos and the Opera Experiment 

Neutrinos are the most penetrating particles imaginable. Every second, a hundred trillion neutrinos stream through the human body without interacting in any way. Over a person's entire lifetime, only a few neutrinos react with the atoms in their body. To stop a neutrino with a probability of 50 per cent, you would need a block of iron with a length of 1,000 light years.68] 

 

On 18 November 2011, researchers from the European Particle Research Centre CERN near Geneva shot so-called neutrinos underground to Grand Sasso in Italy for the second time, see Fig. 18.05 and this time with significantly more precise measurement technology than the first attempt.

According to the measurements, the particles also arrived at their destination 0.025 per mille faster than light, the scientists announced. Neutrinos can easily penetrate matter and therefore no tunnel is necessary. However, since the speed of light is considered the fundamental speed limit in the universe according to Einstein's theory of relativity, this measurement result could overturn the basic assumptions of our physical world view. 

 

The 732 km long flight path of the particles through solid rock has been measured to an accuracy of 20 centimetres, as Opera physicist Dario Autiero explained. The flight time of around 2.4 thousandths of a second (2.4 milliseconds) can be determined to an accuracy of 10 billionths of a second (nanoseconds). 

 

In 2011, scientists from Cornell University published the following article entitled 

Interpreting supraluminous neutrinos through a theory of the ether.

 

"Between the years 2000 to 2011, we presented a very general theory of the ether that provides an interpretation of all the main experiments related to special and general relativity and cosmology. This theory of the ether was mostly not even considered because it contradicted special relativity. But a French team of physicists (led by Dario Autiero) recently conducted an experiment whose result contradicted special relativity because it implied that a particle could be faster than light. We could assume that this experiment was not good and was due to an experimental error, but another solution is that special relativity is not good. And if this is the case, the modern theory of ether becomes very interesting, as it is the only complete alternative theory to special relativity. In this article we will give the interpretation of Dario Autiero's experiment through the modern theory of the ether." 

 

The papers are available as a PDF file at https://arxiv.org/pdf/1109.4897.pdf and an update can be downloaded at https://arxiv.org/pdf/1110.2020.pdf. 

 

Miraculous Transformations 68] 

In the quantum world, a distinction is made between three kinds of neutrinos – just as there are three siblings with different masses of all known elementary particles. In the case of charged light particles, there is the electron with its heavy siblings muon and tauon. However, the latter two are unstable and decay back into electrons within fractions of a second. This also releases neutrinos, which are called electron neutrinos or muon or tau neutrinos. As with all other elementary particles, there is an antiparticle for every neutrino, such as an antielectron neutrino. 

 

If around ten electron neutrinos fly a few kilometres, some of them transform into muon or tau neutrinos – and back again. This oscillation intensifies when neutrinos whizz through matter. This can be seen in neutrinos that come to us from the Sun or those that have travelled through the Earth before they hit a detector. This strange oscillation behaviour is a typical quantum property: according to the strange rules of quantum physics, particles can be in mixed states. 

 

With this Nobel Prize-winning (2015) discovery of oscillation, the researchers Takaaki Kajita (Japan) and Arthur B. McDonald (Canada) also proved that neutrinos must have a mass. This is because, according to Einstein's theory of relativity, massless particles move at the speed of light. No time passes for them, so they cannot oscillate. According to the standard model, neutrinos do not actually have any mass. This discovery therefore already goes beyond the standard model. 

 

No Particles – Only Ether-Vortices 

I have included here the descriptions from conventional physics about the double-slit experiment, X-rays and Rutherford's scattering experiment, because they basically confirm the ether described in this book. 

 

The above light and elementary particle-wave experiment, the so-called Bremsstrahlung and the X-rays generated by it, solid material such as gold foil, electrons, protons, neutrons and even the atom and its hard nucleus are all nothing other than ether-vortex complexes. The atomic nucleus only appears to be impenetrable and hard because all ether-vortices converge there in the centre in a quantum-small way. See previous chapter 13 Ether – All from One. 

 

If there really were a solid nucleus with its strong nuclear force, which CERN has been searching for in vain for decades, X-ray images (see previous Fig. 18.03 above) would only show a white image without contours and the gold foil would certainly have been damaged after the bombardment. 

 

My Conclusion 

Radiation of any kind is therefore nothing more than movements of different (ether) vortex complexes, whether in a galaxy centre or in the generation of X-rays in medical technology. The cause of radiation of any kind is stress in the ether, in which ether-vortices are catapulted away for relaxation, such as the gamma radiation of X-ray technology referred to in mainstream physics. 

 

All ether-vortices are in constant motion. From the smallest quantum to the atom to the molecule to material phenomena. Just as a light pulse moves helically through the ether, neutrinos race at (faster than) the speed of light even through hard rock, which also consists only of complex atoms or ether-vortices. 

 

Previous X-rays take much longer to penetrate dense material. Lead waistcoats or specially shielded rooms are installed to protect personnel from harmful radiation. But even these are sooner or later penetrated by X-rays or gamma rays. In this heavy metal, the atoms are much closer together and, depending on the spin of the ether-vortices that collide, the rays are slowed down and deflected. However, this is not due to the supposed repulsion of negative or positive charges, such as the alpha rays in Rutherford's gold foil experiment, as is commonly believed. It is due to the clash of different spins of the vortex structures in the ether.

19 The Concequences

It is clear that we will never be able to experience the whole reality of this world due to our limited senses. Our mind is primarily focussed on keeping our physical body undamaged or viable in its environment. It reduces the diversity of impressions to a few categories, e.g. two elementary ones: useful or/and harmful. Beyond this, however, the mind wants to know what is actually going on. Humans have developed a certain logic of thought for this purpose, although the brain works extremely slowly and incorrectly. Nevertheless, we were able to recognise that colour, for example, is a self-produced illusion, while the physical processes are of a completely different kind. 1] 

 

'Cause' of the Black Holes 

In the search for the invisible gravity monsters, stars in orbit in the centres of galaxies are examined with radio telescopes according to certain criteria. It is assumed that strong radiation is generated by large masses, just as stars or other celestial bodies emit electromagnetic radiation or waves. In analogy to the athlet throwing his hammer or the planets of our solar system, gravity is then calculated according to a (non-existent) mass in the centre. However, as already described in the previous chapters, all celestial bodies drift only purely passively and completely force-free in this ether-whirlpool universe, as for example, contrary to all prophecies and calculations of science, the gas cloud G2 of the black hole Sagittarius A* in the centre of the Milky Way, see Fig. 19.01 above (repetition of Fig.10.06). According to the predictions, the gas cloud was supposed to be literally torn apart as it orbited Sgr A*, but remained completely undamaged. 

 

In another scientific concept, so-called stellar black holes are created when a star of a certain size has used up all its nuclear fuel and collapses or explodes. During this process, its outer shells are ejected to form a supernova and its core supposedly collapses under its own gravitational pressure to form an extremely compact body, a neutron star or pulsar, see Fig. 19.01 below (false colour image of the Crab Nebula, remains of a supernova from the year 1054. The colours correspond to different ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum from infrared to X-rays**). 

 

I am not negating the process of transformation into a supernova or that of the Crab Nebula, but the formation of the alleged black hole. Because from this event onwards, hypothetical increases in mass, of whatever kind, are added until mathematics has calculated the critical limit range, the result of which corresponds to the desired black hole.

** https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Supernova

The cause of this creation has its origins probably in this metaphor: Why the apple fell on Newton's head. He recognised the law of gravitational acceleration of falling towards the Earth, but never wanted this force to be understood as a result of attraction. Unfortunately, this process of motion was transferred to the falling of the planets around the Sun and the effective force was naturally assumed to be attraction. It would have been more appropriate to consider why icebergs fall or are pulled southwards between Greenland and Canada. 1] 

 

Mass Without Weight 

Mass in-and-of-itself has no weight at all. Celestial bodies only drift passively in the universe. They were not pushed by something at some point in order to orbit around a central star. The whole universe is in motion and all material phenomena are only of a secondary kind. The primary phenomenon is the beating of the invisible ether. No solid particles fly through the universe, but only their movement patterns are passed on forwards in order to then return to their original state. Just as, for example, in the quantum world some electron neutrinos transform into muon or tau neutrinos and back again on their way. 

 

No Mass Attraction 1] 

There is no mass attraction, there can be no attractive forces at all, this idea is truly fabulous. There are plenty of planetary paths on which the wanderer can ponder for kilometres why spheres the size of footballs, oranges or pinheads are held by the distant solar balloon on whatever pull rope. In reality, there can only ever be a pressure effect, but again never through a void. 

 

As an alternative to the conventional view of gravitation, for example, the general radiation pressure or the pressure of gravitational waves is mentioned (or some also invent graviton particles), whereby the celestial bodies offer each other pressure shadows. This could be significant for nearby celestial bodies (e.g. between the moon and a planet), but for distant celestial bodies this shadow cast is practically zero. 

 

As explained above, such radiation pressure (in addition to the general space pressure) certainly acts as a centripetal force on local vortex systems. Both together certainly also act to agglomerate small vortex units into larger clusters. This pressure of free ether in the universe certainly has the effect which otherwise is attributed to the weak nuclear force. 

 

No Nuclear Force 1] 

The strong nuclear force is supposed to cause the concentration of mass in the atomic nucleus (necessary to attract the electrons) – whereby, strangely enough, a charge of the same name is not supposed to be disturbing (and more recent explanations of quantum theories are by no means more plausible). In reality however, the whole atom consists only of normal ether (see previous chapters). The entire atomic motion complex is also only held together as a local unit by pressure of the universe. 

 

An accumulation of atoms naturally also offers mutual shadows with regard to radiation or pressure of the universe and of course the Earth's surface as a whole is also exposed to this centripetal pressure. However, pressure of the universe is not to be equated with gravity, but is only one component of this phenomenon. There is no such thing as the gravitational force; this effect is caused by different factors. 

 

Previous pressure of the universe is one of them, polluted ether is another and spiral pressure is yet another component. The centring force effect is different in the micro range (of electrons, atoms and atomic accumulations), in the close range of celestial bodies (e.g. the Earth, but different for gas planets) and in the range of solar systems or galaxies. There is therefore no uniform gravity. This force is different everywhere. Using the standardised value of the Earth's gravity to calculate through light years into space and derive world views from this ... is pure fantasy.

Definition of Gravity 1] 

Gravity is a force directed radially towards a celestial body. It is the effect of the transition from the fine oscillations of the free ether (FE) to the coarse movements of the bounded ether (BE) or between collections of atoms (see Fig. 19.02 above, green arrows). Expansion from fine to coarse swinging (S) results beating motion component. When this hits material particles (M), their gravity results. 

 

Gravity only acts in the immediate vicinity of a celestial body. Its density and material structure have a significant influence and therefore the gravity of each celestial body is of a specific kind. The strength of gravity is influenced by many factors, such as an atmosphere (A) or a magnetic field, so that it is never constant but varies constantly. 

 

Gravitational Constant G 

However, there is also a weak, horizontally acting component of gravity. The generally weak radiation pressure (RP) and the (ether) space pressure (SP) act from all directions, see green arrows in Fig.19.02 below. All forces together result in the force of attraction of two iron spheres measured by Henry Cavendish in 1798 of 

 

G = 0.000000000066743 m^3/(kg·s^2), 

 

the weakest of all natural forces. Presumably, mutual shadowing (grey bar) of the two test bodies also plays a role in the measurement. 

 

Since Cavendish, this earthly measurement of the gravitational constant has been used in astrophysics for the entire universe, even though all forces add up to zero outside the sphere of influence of a celestial body. It is therefore completely absurd to assume that mass alone could exert any forces on other bodies. All celestial bodies, planets and stars therefore drift purely passively in the infinite whirlpool universe. 

 

And another thing: no one has ever been able to grasp a single solid particle. Only movements or motion debris were ever recognisable, as the zero-point experiments and crash experiments at CERN prove. It is therefore reasonable to assume that there can be no particles, only motion. But this requires the assumption of something in motion, because abstract motion can be handled mathematically (e.g. electromagnetic fields), but cannot exist in reality.

Definition of Ether 1]

The only substance that really exists in the universe is an indivisible, coherent whole, i.e. a truly gapless continuum or a homogeneous plasma, which is called ether.

 

This ether is permanently oscillating within itself, whereby special patterns of movement result in the diversity of phenomena. These can be of a physical kind, but can also represent mental-spiritual content.

 

Ether is invisible, particle-, gap-, colour- and tasteless. It is also indivisible and cannot be weighed. There is no portion of ether here or there. Ether is incompressible and stationary. All internal movements in the ether take place without loss and this is the only reason why there is energy constancy in the universe. Otherwise the universe would have died a cold death long ago. 

 

All visible and invisible phenomena are grossly oscillating vortex complexes of various kinds of bounded ether. From the electron to the atom. In contrast, the matter-free space of the universe, i.e. the space between the celestial bodies, consists of finely vibrating ether-vortices of the unbound ether. There are balancing movements between the coarse and fine vibrating ether. 

 

All phenomena take place in the ether and are only an expression of its internal movements. From electromagnetism, the effect of cavitation in ship propellers to stellar explosions – everything is made of one. 

 

Balance of Forces 

A fundamental property of nature is to create a balance of forces. This applies to high and low pressure areas, cold and heat, an osmotic power station that utilises the difference in concentration of salt content between fresh and sea water, for example, or even just the drawing of a tea bag in a cup of hot water. For this reason alone, there can be no sucking monsters called black holes somewhere out there in infinity. And where there are no black holes, of course none can merge with each other. A further indication of the fantastic idea of black holes in science is the fact that the term inactive black holes has recently been used in the media! 

 

Misleading Maths 

All calculations based on gravity are obsolete. What is real is the measurable acceleration due to gravity of 9.81 m/s^2 However, trying to deduce the mass of the Earth from this in a circular argument is absolutely wrong. The gravitational constant determined by Henry Cavendish in 1798 is based on completely different physical causes than were assumed and are still assuming today (see chapter 05 The Solar System). In science, everything can supposedly be proven with maths, which gives the impression that it actually corresponds to reality. Perhaps this is precisely why the unsolved three-body problem is proof that our physical world view does not correspond to reality.

The Speed of Light Squared 

Fig. 19.03 shows once again the mathematical graph of the gravitation of a black hole, whose event horizon (Schwarzschild metric) is supposed to have a diameter of 11 million kilometres. I have often wondered what these computer-generated grids are supposed to represent. Do black holes have the shape of a funnel or do their gravitational forces only act in one direction? What is below or behind the so-called singularity or above the grid? 

 

The event horizon or radius of a black hole is calculated using the Schwarzschild metric formula

This is used to fictitiously calculate falling speeds down to less than 300,000 km/s on the basis of alleged masses in order to then be able to mathematically prove that no ray of light can escape from this event horizon. The most famous world formula is probably

Energy equals mass (density or rho) by the squared speed of light. This formula has never been experimentally proven! So what is it’s true practical benefit? If the speed of light is the maximum of all things, then multiplying it by itself (c^2 = 90,000,000,000 km/s) or another value, such as in the Schwarzschild metric above and in the following Einstein field equation 69], regardless of the plausibility of its mathematical derivation, is simply not possible or incorrect.

Where earthly logic fails to describe physical phenomena in the universe, Einstein's General Theory of Relativity is often used as an explanation and at the same time – again in a circular argument – as its confirmation, although hardly anyone understands the content and meaning of ART. 

 

Since the speed of light c is supposedly a constant quantity (contrary to the beer glass problem, see chapter 13 Ether – All from One, section Acceleration after Deceleration), a time dilation (expansion) or contraction must be used to make the calculation work, with the mathematically proven consequence of so-called space-time curvature or possible time travel in the future (the technology for which only has yet to be invented). 

 

Conclusion 

All astronomers' knowledge models and calculations are still based on Keppler's observations of planetary motion, which were made over 400 years ago, and the law of attraction derived from Newton's observations. However, gravity is not the cause of this planetary motion in the solar system, but the radial beating of the ether of the clockwise spiral galaxy Milky Way, which is counteracted by the resistance of the free ether with its beating. Both counter-rotating forces (ether-oscillations with beat) are the drive of our left-turning tiny solar system (see chapter 11 Galaxy Milky Way, section Counter-Rotating), which thus rotates like a vortex on the inside of the galactic spiral arm called Sagittarius. 

 

This pattern of movement is not only the principle of the Milky Way galaxy, but of all spiral galaxies in the universe, where by chance two beating ether-currents turn into an, initially small, vortex. The overpowering free ether permanently exerts a centripetal thrust on this structure and moulds it over tens of millions of years into a spiral galaxy with its celestial bodies drifting in it. For us, such processes in these time dimensions are barely perceptible because we are part of such a system and the galactic neighbourhood with its fixed stars appears static to us. In reality, however, everything in our galaxy is in motion, from the outside inwards with increasing speed and with the precision of a Swiss watch. 

 

However, such a process can also experience disturbances if, for example, two vortex complexes meet by chance and their paths cross. Then both ether-currents cancel each other out and come to a standstill. What remains is a collection of celestial bodies with no perceptible movement, such as the globular cluster Messier 22 or other irregular galaxies with an asymmetrical arrangement of their celestial bodies, such as the Magellanic Clouds.

Only when rotation is present does the powerful free ether exert a centripetal thrust (swinging with beat) on objects drifting in it. This is why the density of celestial bodies is much higher towards their centres than outside them. Where black holes are suspected, the motion structures of the ether are similar, because the overpowering free ether acts everywhere from the outside and concentrates its effect at the centre, leading to almost identical movements. For example, the photographed black hole of Sagittarius A* in the centre of our galaxy published on 12.05.2022 (Fig. 19.04), which is very similar to the image of the black hole of the galaxy Messier 87 (see chapter 09 Galaxies, section Galaxy Messier 87). The black dot in the centre is supposed to represent the black hole and the bright donut the hot gases that are supposedly produced by its rapid rotation. 

 

For thousands of years, it was and still is assumed that the Sun has this enormous gravitational pull, which is supposed to force the planets into their orbits, the observations of which form the basis of black hole calculations, among other factors. 

Contrary to these assumptions, the Solar Probe probe is currently orbiting our central star at a distance of only six million kilometres, flying through its corona completely untouched with a centripetal force of only around 4,566 N kg∙m/s^2** and a mass of around 685 kg*. (For comparison: the 100 kg hammer thrower has to exert 3,672 N kg∙m/s^2** against the centrifugal force of the sphere in order not to be pulled out of the circle). Similarly, the gas cloud G2 described above did not show any optical changes after it had orbited the black hole Sagittarius A*. 

 

There are no black holes with supposedly so many solar masses and corresponding gravity around which the stars orbit. Gravity has completely different causes (as described above) and only acts in the close vicinity of celestial bodies. Astronaut and space station are subject to the same centripetal ether-pressure acting on the atoms. Otherwise spacewalks and repair work on the outside of the space station would not be possible in space. 

 

There are only intensive ether-movements, whose internal stress the telescopes perceive as X-rays or gamma radiation (see Chapter 18 Cosmic Radiation) and the celestial bodies, including their aura, drift in it, completely force-free. As long as we do not understand the ether and its internal movements, we will continue to define supposed black holes with their immense gravitational forces, which are not black holes at all. 

 

The ultimate proof of this theory could only be provided by a flight through such a black hole. However, as long as these distances are insurmountable, we will continue to only speculate and fantasise about them, and with increasing intensity about their size and strength the further away they are.

 

* Wikipedia; ** author's own calculations

 

Solution Folding paper Earth-Moon:

All data without guarantee.

20 Source Reference

1] Alfred Evert; Etwas in Bewegung, Äther – Physik und Philosophie, Band 4 published 2011, 
Books on Demand, Germany

 

3] Alfred Evert; Das Tanzen der Satelliten, Beweis für die Existenz des Äthers, Band 5 published 
2013, Books on Demand, Germany

 

4] Katharina Lodders et al.: Abundances of the elements in the solar system. 
In: J. E. Trümper (Hrsg.): Landolt-Börnstein, New Series.Vol. VI/4B. Springer, Hamburg 2009, 
560–630.

 

5] List Of Martian Trojans. Minor Planet Center, retrieved on 27 July 2017 (English)

 

6] https://scilogs.spektrum.de/go-for-launch/lagrange1/

Michael Khan, Luft- und Raumfahrtingenieur und Missionsanalytiker 25. Apr 2009; 
Von Lagrange-Punkte? Wie bitte? – SciLogs is a blog portal of the Spektrum der 
Wissenschaft Verlagsgesellschaft mbH

 

7] Wikipedia, Joseph-Louis Lagrange

 

8] C. R. Nugent, A. Mainzer, J. Masiero, J. Bauer, R. M. Cutri, T. Grav, E. Kramer, S. Sonnett, 
R. Stevenson, E. L. Wright: NEOWISE Reactivation Mission Year One: Preliminary Asteroid 
Diameters and Albedos. In: Astrophysical Journal. 814, Nr. 2, 24. November 2015

 

9] Robert Johnston: (5261) Eureka. Johnston's Archive, 16. November 2014

 

10] https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lagrange-Punkte

 

11] https://bernd-leitenberger.de/voyager-jupiter-saturn.shtml

 

12] https://www.reddit.com/domain/sajri.astronomy.cz/

 

13] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Trojan_(celestial_body)

 

14] Luyuan Xu: How China's lunar relay satellite arrived in its final orbit. 
In: The Planetary Society. 25. Juni 2018, archived from the original on 17 October 2018; 

retrieved on 8 December 2018 (English).

 

15] Z. F. Seidov: The Roche Problem: Some Analytics. 
In: The Astrophysical Journal. 603:283-284, 1. März 2004.

 

16] Emily Lakdawalla: The Orbital Dance of Epimetheus and Janus. The Planetary Society, 
7. Februar 2006, retrieved on 16 August 2015 (English).

 

17] Wikipedia – Three-body problem

 

18] According to a theorem by Poincaré, which generalises a theorem by Bruns.

 

19] June Barrow-Green: The dramatic episode of Sundman. In: Abschnitt 9. The reception of 
Sundman's work. „In 1930 David Beloriszky […] calculated that if Sundman's series were 
going to be used for astronomical observations then the computations would involve at least 
108,000,000 terms!“

 

20] Hubble Images a Swarm of Ancient Stars (07/01/1999). In: hubblesite.org. retrieved on 
30. Januar 2015.

 

21] Milky Way Globular Clusters. 2007

 

22] Jump up to: a b Ashman, Keith M.; Zepf, Stephen E.: The formation of globular clusters in 
merging and interacting galaxies. In: Astrophysical Journal, Part 1. 384, 1992, S. 50–61. 
bibcode: 1992ApJ...384...50A.

 

23] P. Barmby & J.P. Huchra: M31 Globular Clusters in the Hubble Space Telescope Archive. 
I. Cluster Detection and Completeleness. In: The Astrophysical Journal. 122, 2001, 
S. 2458–2468.

 

24] Schweizer: The halo globular clusters of the giant elliptical galaxy Messier 87. 
In: Astrophysical Journal. 245, Nr. 5457, 1981, S. 416–453. bibcode:1981ApJ...245..416S.

 

25] B. Dauphole, M. Geffert, J. Colin, C. Ducourant, M. Odenkirchen, H.-J. Tucholke: 
The kinematics of globular clusters, apocentric distances and a halo metallicity gradient. 
In: Astronomy and Astrophysics. 313, 1996, S. 119–128. bibcode:1996A&A...313..119D.

 

26] https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Messier_87

 

27] Karoline M. Gilbert, Puragra Guhathakurta, Rachael L. Beaton, James Bullock, 
Marla C. Geha, Jason S. Kalirai, Evan N. Kirby, Steven R. Majewski, James C. Ostheimer, 
Richard J. Patterson, Erik J. Tollerud, Mikito Tanaka, Masashi Chiba: 
Global Properties of M31's Stellar Halo from the SPLASH Survey. I. Surface Brightness 
Profile. In: Astrophysical Journal. Band 760, Nr. 1, 2012, S. 21, bibcode:2012ApJ...760...76G.

 

28] Annette Ferguson: The Stellar Populations (in the Outskirts) of M31. 

 

29] Black holes discovered in globular clusters for the first time.

 

30] https://www.abenteuer-sterne.de/die-schoensten-kugelsternhaufen-eine-galerie/

 

31] Sterne und Weltraum Juni 2007 S. 66, german edition

 

32] Thomas Bührke in Süddeutsche Zeitung vom 17. Mai 2010: 
Nur auf der Durchreise, retrieved on 2. Februar 2020

 

33] http://www.astronews.com/frag/antworten/1/frage1149.html

 

34] http://www.astro.uni-bonn.de/~geffert/prakt01I/galaxien.html#24 
(Memento of 6 August 2007 in the Internet Archive)

 

35] http://www.br-online.de/wissen-bildung/spacenight/sterngucker/deepsky/
galaxietypen.html#elliptische

 

36] A. J. Grocholski et al.: A New Hubble Space Telescope Distance to NGC 1569: 
Starburst Properties and IC 342 Group Membership. In: Astrophysical Journal. Vol. 686, 
2008, S. L79-L82, doi:10.1086/592949, arxiv:0808.0153 [astro-ph].

 

37] https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/NGC_1569

 

38] Thomas Bührke; 
https://www.sueddeutsche.de/wissen/magellansche-wolken-nur-auf-der-durchreise-1.225117; 
published online on 17.05.2010

 

39] John Michell: VII. On the means of discovering the distance, magnitude, & c. of the fixed 
stars, in consequence of the diminution of the velocity of their light, in case such a diminution 
should be found to take place in any of them, and such other data should be procured from 
observations, as would be farther necessary for that purpose. By the Rev. John Michell, 
B.D. F.R.S. In a letter to Henry Cavendish, Esq. F.R.S. and A.S. 
In: Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London. Volume 74, 1. Januar 
1784, S. 35–57, doi:10.1098/rstl.1784.0008.

 

40] Pierre-Simon Laplace: Exposition du système du monde. Cercle-Social, Paris 1796. 
(Digitalisat auf Gallica)

 

41] R. Genzel u. a.: Near IR-Flares from Accreting Gas Near the last stable Orbit around the 
Supermassive Black Hole in the Galactic Centre. In: Nature. London 425.2003, 954.

 

42] Ein Monster im Visier. Astronomen vermessen das Schwarze Loch im Milchstraßenzentrum. 
In: wissenschaft.de.10. Dezember 2008, archived from the original on 29 July 2009; 
Retrieved on 1. Oktober 2009.

 

43] Galactic Black Hole disrupts Gas Cloud. In: mpe.mpg.de. Retrieved on 28. Januar 2014.

 

44] Astronomers Capture First Image of a Black Hole. Event Horizon Telescope (EHT), 
retrieved on 14. April 2019 (englisch).

 

45] Eventhorizontelescope.org/

 

46] W. Baade, R. Minkowski: On the Identification of Radio Sources. 
In: Astrophysical Journal. 119, 1954, S. 215–231. bibcode:1954ApJ...119..215B. 
doi:10.1086/145813.

 

47] Holland C. Ford, Richard J. Harms, Zlatan I. Tsvetanov, George F. Hartig, Linda L. Dressel, 
Gerard A. Kriss, Ralph C. Bohlin, Arthur F. Davidsen, Bruce Margon, Ajay K. Kochhar: 
Narrowband HST images of M87: 
Evidence for a disk of ionized gas around a massive black hole. 
In: Astrophysical Journal Letters (ISSN 0004-637X). Band 435, 1994, S. L27–L30, 
bibcode:1994ApJ...435L..27F.

 

48] R. D. Blandford, C. F. McKee: Reverberation mapping of the emission line regions of Seyfert 
galaxies and quasars. In: Astrophysical Journal. Band 255, 1982, S. 419–439, 
bibcode:1982ApJ...255..419B.

 

49] A. Unsöld, B. Baschek: Der neue Kosmos. Springer, 1988, S. 346. 

 

50] F. Zwicky, Die Rotverschiebung von extragalaktischen Nebeln. Helvetica Physica Acta, 
Volume 6, 1933, S. 125. 

 

51] F. Macchetto, A. Marconi, , D. J. Axon, A. Capetti, W. Sparks, P. Crane: 
The Supermassive Black Hole of M87 and the Kinematics of Its Associated Gaseous Disk. 
In: Astrophysical Journal. 489, Nr. 2, November 1997, S. 579. arxiv:astro-ph/9706252. 
bibcode:1997ApJ...489..579M. doi:10.1086/304823.

 

52] J. A. Biretta, W. B. Sparks, F. Macchetto: 
Hubble Space Telescope Observations of Superluminal Motion in the M87 Jet. 
In: The Astrophysical Journal. 520, Nr. 2, August 1999, S. 621–626

 

53] John Biretta: Hubble detects faster-than-light motion in Galaxy M87. 
Space Telescope Science Institute. 6. Januar 1999. Abgerufen am 8. Dezember 2010.

 

54] Andreas Müller: Wie man ein Schwarzes Loch entdeckt. In: wissenschaft-online.de.

 

55] Am Ende von Raum und Zeit. In: Der Spiegel. Nr. 16, 13. April 2019.

 

56] Ulf von Rauchhaupt: Eine nackte Singularität ist es schon mal nicht. 
In: Frankfurter Allgemeine Sonntagszeitung. 14. April 2019, S. 56.

 

57] Kazunori Akiyama u. a. (Event Horizon Telescope Collaboration): 
First M87 Event Horizon Telescope Results. I. The Shadow of the Supermassive Black Hole. 
In: Astroph. J. Letters. 10. April 2019, IOPScience.

 

58] WIS Wissenschaft in die Schulen, Germany

 

59] NSSDCA ID: QUEQIAO, COSPAR ID: 2018-045A, NASA Space Science Data Coordinated Data 
https://nssdc.gsfc.nasa.gov/nmc/spacecraft/display.action?id=QUEQIAO 

 

60] Prof Dr Frank Spahn, University of Potsdam; Celestial Mechanics: Lecture summer term 2016

 

61] F. Link: Der Mond; Springer-Verlag; Seiten 10-12

 

62] Alfred Evert; Plasma und Teilchen-Bewegung, Äther – Physik und Philosophie, Volume 2 
published in 2011, Books on Demand, Germany

 

63] Jean-Pierre Maillard, Thibaut Paumard, Susan R. Stolovy, François Rigaud: 

The nature of the Galactic Center source IRS 13 revealed by high spatial resolution in the infrared. 
In: Astron. and Astrophys. Band 423, 2004, S. 155, arxiv:astro-ph/0404450. 


Neues Schwarzes Loch entdeckt. Raumfahrer.net, 9. November 2004.

64] 2005. After a lecture by Michael Muno.

 

65] Anil Ananthaswamy: Through two doors at once – the elegant experiment that captures the 
enigma of our quantum reality. Dutton, New York 2018, ISBN 978-1-101-98609-7. Eine gut 
lesbare Geschichte des Doppelspaltversuchs von Young bis zum Quantenradierer (engl.).

 

66] Wolfgang Demtröder: Experimentalphysik 3: Atome, Moleküle und Festkörper. 
Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 13. Juni 2016, ISBN 978-3-662-49094-5, S. 64.

 

67] Eckhard Ignatowitz: Chemie für Schule und Beruf: ein Lehr- und Lernbuch. 5. Auflage. 
Verl. Europa-Lehrmittel Nourney, Vollmer, Haan-Gruiten 2014, ISBN 978-3-8085-7056-2.

 

68] Dirk Eidemüller: Neutrinos: Die Stiefkinder des Standardmodells 
published on 16.08.2016 auf Spectrum.de

 

69] https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Einsteinsche_Feldgleichungen

 

cf] Christian Främbs


 

IMPRESSUM | DISCLAIMER

© Copyright. All Rights reserved..

Wir benötigen Ihre Zustimmung zum Laden der Übersetzungen

Wir nutzen einen Drittanbieter-Service, um den Inhalt der Website zu übersetzen, der möglicherweise Daten über Ihre Aktivitäten sammelt. Bitte überprüfen Sie die Details in der Datenschutzerklärung und akzeptieren Sie den Dienst, um die Übersetzungen zu sehen.

Datenschutzeinstellungen

Website-Übersetzer

Datenschutzeinstellungen

Mit diesen Einstellungen aktivieren oder deaktivieren Sie die Datenerfassung von Funktionalitäten die auf dieser Website eingesetzt werden.

Alle Dienste auswählen
Website-Übersetzer
Mehr
Einstellungen speichern